Accounting Finance - McGraw

Transcription

Accounting & Finance 2012
Preparing Students for
the World That Awaits
McGraw-Hill Higher Education empowers instructors to help students succeed academically
now and into the future by providing flexible, superior-quality solutions that serve the
needs of instructors and students end to end - from textbooks and digital instructional
content and tools to innovate subject mastery, experiential learning and assignment/
assessment solutions.
Connect.
We connect instructors and students to valuable course content
and resources - and we connect instructors and students to each
other - with the best traditional and digital teaching tools.
Accounting
Learn.
We enable greater learning and deeper comprehension with the
highest-quality tools and content that let students engage with
their coursework when, where and however they learn best.
&
Succeed.
We provide the learning resources students need to connect
success in the classroom with success in the world that awaits.
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
email: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com
website: www.mheducation.asia
C11-000813-X
2012
Finance
M c g r aw - h i l l 2 0 1 2 c a t a l o g
Welcome to McGraw-Hill’s 2012 Accounting & Finance Catalog. Inside
this catalog, you will find a wide selection of McGraw-Hill latest academic
publications. Apart from those published from the US, we have also included
publications from Asia as well as from our subsidiaries in Australia, India and
United Kingdom. For the benefit of students, widely adopted textbooks are
made available as low-priced McGraw-Hill International Editions (see titles in
this catalog tagged with “International Edition”).
REVIEW COPY REQUEST
Teaching professionals who wish to consider McGraw-Hill titles for textbook
adoption may request for a review copy. To request for a review copy:

contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives or,

fax the Review Copy Request Form found in this catalog or,

e-mail to mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com or,

submit online at www.mheducation.asia
(Note: All requests for review copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill
reserves the right to refuse any requests that do not relate to teaching).
HOW TO ORDER
McGraw-Hill books and International Editions are easily available through
your local bookstores. In case of difficulty in purchasing our publications,
please contact the local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover) or send
your orders to:
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel: (65) 6863 1580
Tel: (65) 6868 8188 (Customer Service Hotline)
Fax: (65) 6862 3354
Email: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com
A Note to LibrarianS
Please place your orders through your regular local Library Supplier/Contractor.
For further assistance, kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
representative.
INVITATION TO PUBLISH
McGraw-Hill is continuously sourcing for quality manuscript for the academic
and professional markets in Asia for inclusion in our global publishing program.
Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email us directly in Singapore
at asiapub@mcgraw-hill.com if you are planning to write a book.
MAILING LIST
If you wish to receive up-to-date information on McGraw-Hill’s new publications
regularly, please submit your particulars on the mailing list form (see back
pages) and return to us by fax or mail.
Cover design images©istockphoto.com
CONTENTS
Accounting
Finance
Accounting for Non-Accounting Managers.................... 10
Bank Management........................................................95
Accounting Information Systems................................... 37
Behavioral Finance........................................................97
Accounting Principles...................................................... 5
Business Finance..........................................................83
Accounting Principles Supplements................................ 9
Cases in Corporate Finance..........................................87
Accounting Theory......................................................... 54
Derivatives / Futures & Options.....................................91
Advanced Accounting.................................................... 38
Finance for the Non-Financial Managers.................... 101
Advanced Managerial Accounting................................. 49
Financial Institutions and Markets.................................93
Auditing......................................................................... 43
Financial Institutions Management................................93
Auditing Practice Cases................................................ 48
Financial Planning.........................................................97
Computerized Accounting............................................. 29
Financial System.........................................................103
Corporate Financial Reporting...................................... 60
International Financial Management............................. 96
Cost Accounting / Cost Management............................ 33
Investments - Graduate.................................................87
Cost Accounting Supplements...................................... 35
Investments - Supplementary........................................86
College Accounting........................................................ 35
Investments - Textbooks................................................83
Financial Accounting......................................................11
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Graduate................ 79
Financial Accounting Supplements............................... 21
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Supplements.......... 77
Financial Statement Analysis........................................ 56
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Textbooks............... 65
Governmental / Non Profit............................................. 53
Mathematics of Finance..............................................102
Intermediate Accounting................................................ 31
Money and Capital Markets...........................................89
Intermediate Accounting Supplements.......................... 33
Personal Finance..........................................................98
International Accounting................................................ 55
Portfolio Management...................................................90
Management Control..................................................... 61
Managerial Accounting.................................................. 22
Insurance & Real Estate
Managerial Accounting Supplements............................ 28
Professional References.............................................106
MBA Managerial............................................................ 59
Real Estate Finance / Investment...............................106
MBA Principles.............................................................. 60
Real Estate Principles, Analysis & Management.........105
Other Accounting........................................................... 61
Risk Management.......................................................102
Survey of Accounting..................................................... 58
Upper Division Insurance............................................105
Undergraduate Taxation................................................ 49
Indexes
Author Index............................................................... 112
Title Index................................................................... 107
i
CONTENTS
ii
Live and
available for
use in your
course
TODAY!
Productivity | Efficiency | Simplicity
An unrivaled, total course solution—McGraw-Hill and Blackboard have partnered to deliver content
and tools directly inside your learning management system.*
Manage your course content, assignments, and assessments...all from within your existing Blackboard® environment.
1
Pair Your Course
IT’S AS EASY AS 1-2-3!
Just pair your Connect course with
your Blackboard course to create
a seamless experience for you and
your students.
3
2
Deploy Assignments
Once paired, you can import all your Connect
assignments with a couple of clicks, and you
can also build new Connect assignments –
right from within your Blackboard system.
Single Sign On with a Single
Integrated Gradebook
Students access all of their assignments right within the
Blackboard platform without ever logging on to another site,
and their grades are automatically recorded in the
Blackboard gradebook.
* Compatible with Blackboard Learn™, Releases 9.1, 9.0 and 8.0
Visit DoMoreNow.com
+
=
McGraw-Hill Connect® and McGraw-Hill Create are now fully integrated into
the Blackboard Learn platform.
TM
Enjoy simplified access to the highest quality, media-rich content and adaptive learning and assessment
engines for faculty, students and institutions.
A Total Course Solution
This unprecedented integration of publisherprovided content and tools into a learning
management system offers the enhanced
experience of all course resources in a
single online environment.
Locally Hosted
All hosted within your institution’s
Blackboard instance, students now
have the means to better connect
with their coursework, instructors,
and the important concepts that they
will need to master for success now
and in the future.
Key Features
l Single Sign-On
A single login and single environment provide seamless access to
all course resources – all McGraw-Hill’s resources are available
within the Blackboard Learn platform.
l One Gradebook
Automatic grade synchronization with Blackboard gradebook.
All grades for McGraw-Hill assignments are recorded in the
Blackboard gradebook automatically.
l 100% FERPA compliant solution protects student privacy.
l Deep Integration
One click access to a wealth of McGraw-Hill content and tools –
all from within Blackboard Learn™.
Visit DoMoreNow.com
L E SS M A N A G IN G .
M O RE TE A C H I N G .
G RE AT ER LEA RN I N G .
What is Connect?
Connect Features:
McGraw-Hill Connect™ is an online assignment and
assessment solution that connects your students
with the tools and resources they’ll need to achieve
success.
McGraw-Hill Connect offers a number of powerful
tools and features to make managing assignments
easier, so you can spend more time teaching.
With Connect, students can engage with their
coursework anytime and anywhere, making the
learning process more accessible and efficient.
With Connect, enjoy simple course management
so you can spend less time administering and more
time teaching. You’ll have access to rich course
resources and tools that drive performance like
never before.
Simple assignment management
With Connect, creating assignments is easier
than ever, so you can spend more time teaching
and less time managing.
Smart grading
When it comes to studying, time is precious.
Connect helps students learn more efﬁciently by
providing feedback and practice material when
they need it, where they need it.
Personalized Diagnostic and Learning Plan
– LearnSmart
Personal learning Plan assess students
understanding of key concepts with diagnostics
and adaptive questions; then tailor coaching
and practice materials to each student’s skills
and knowledge gaps
To learn more about Connect, go to
www.mcgraw-hillconnect.com or contact your
local representative.
ConnectPlus eBooks
Connect reinvents the textbook learning
experience for the modern student. Every
Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated
with ConnectPlus eBooks, which are designed
to keep students focused on the concepts key
to their success.
Higher Education
™
Bright futures begin with
a smarter way to learn.
LearnSmart is an adaptive learning system designed to
help students learn faster, study more efficiently, and
retain more knowledge for greater success.
Measure.
Assess and monitor students’ knowledge
levels.
Adapt.
Provide interactive assessments based on
strengths & weaknesses.
Empower.
Map out a personalized plan for successful
learning.
LearnSmart has helped engage the learner in a way I didn’t think was possible. It has
also helped me to be a more reflective teacher and pinpoint class issue with a topic.
~Professor Frank Wray, University of Cincinnati
Study Anytime and Anyplace.
Students may supplement their
online study with the LearnSmart
mobile app available for the
iPhone, iPod Touch, and iPad.
Scan, LearnSmart.
News.
Tips.
Tricks.
All in one
place.
www.mhhe.com/learnsmart/
Copyright © 2011 The McGraw-Hill Companies. All rights reserved.
Learning Technology by Area9
Winner of 2010 Serious Games
Showcase & Challenge
A Real World Multiplayer Marketing Game
for Practical Learning
Practice Marketing is an online, interactive learning
environment that simulates the full marketing mix
including market segmentation, product, pricing,
promotion, and place.
Using knowledge built in the Principles of Marketing
course, students become a marketing manager in a
company entering the backpack market. By making
decisions and seeing the results, players get feedback
on their actions, and learn by doing. Players then
review and can amend their decisions to react to their
competitors’ decisions. Powerful assessment, reporting,
and debriefing tools complement this educational
process.
Visit: www.mhpractice.com
BSG and GLO-BUS are Fun, Easy, and Effective
BSG and GLO-BUS are two strategy simulations giving students a competitive advantage.
Used by more than 600 schools around the world and played by more than 450,000 students, BSG
and GLO-BUS are well accepted strategy simulations used by numerous educational institutions
worldwide.
Incorporating a strategy simulation like BSG or GLO-BUS in a course is an effective and powerful
way for students to learn how to apply and use core concepts covered in the text chapters.
Professors who teach strategy courses are finding that simulations are every bit as effective as case
analysis in providing students a means of applying what they have read about in the text chapters.
The Business Strategy Game
(BSG) is McGraw-Hill/Irwin’s
online strategy simulation
modeled around athletic
footwear industry.
www.bsg-online.com
GLO-BUS is McGraw-Hill/Irwin’s
online strategy simulation
modeled around digital camera
industry.
www.glo-bus.com
Take a Virtual Tour and Demo NOW! Visit http://www.mhhe.com/irwin/BSG_Glo-Bus/
STOCK-TRAK is the most comprehensive online trading simulation featuring stocks, bonds,
mutual funds, options, futures, spots, future options, and international stocks, created
specifically for classroom use. STOCK-TRAK is used by over 1,100 professors and 60,000
students worldwide each year.
Students receive $500,000 of hypothetical money in a STOCK-TRAK brokerage account, a
toll-free number for web page support and customer service, and 24/7 access to their accounts.
No other simulation can offer all of these features!
Instructors customize STOCK-TRAK to fit their class by choosing the starting and ending date
of their trading period, initial cash balance, and diversification requirements. Instructors also
have 24/7 access to their students’ ranking and account detail so they can see exactly what
their students are doing, and they receive weekly reports of class performance.
STOCK-TRAK can be used as homework, end-of-course project, class contest, extra
credit, or just as a discussion starter in class.
There is a separate cost for using STOCK-TRAK with this text. Contact your local representatives
for more information on prices for subscribing to a semester of STOCK-TRAK. Check out the
website at www.stocktrak.com for a demo of the product and more ideas on how to use
this simulation in class.
Your Partner in
Test Generation
Imagine being able to create and access your
software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple
McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online.
Features and Functions
n Test Creation
n Online Test Management
n Online Scoring and Reporting
n EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can
use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks.
n
n
EZ Test supports the use of following question types:
n True or False n Fill In the Blank
n Short Answer
n Yes or No n Numeric Response
n Survey
n Multiple Choice n Matching
n Essay
n Check All That Apply n Ranking
Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type.
n You can create multiple versions of the same test.
n You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test. n Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types.
How do you get it?
To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives or email mghasia_sg@McGraw-Hill.com.
EZ Test.indd 1
21/11/07 11:40:26
New Titles
ACCOUNTING
2013
Author
ISBN Introduction to Managerial Accounting, 6e
Brewer
9780078025419
22
Essentials of Accounting for Governmental and Not-for-Profit Organizations, 11e
Copley
9780078025457
53
Fundamental Financial Accounting Concepts, 8e
Edmonds
9780078025365
11
Computer Accounting with Quickbooks Pro 2012, 14e
Kay
9780078025341
29
Advanced Accounting, 11e
Hoyle
9780078025402
38
Fundamentals of Advanced Accounting, 5e Hoyle
9780078025396
39
Accounting Information Systems, 3e
Hurt
9780078025334
37
Principles of Taxation for Business and Investment Planning: 2013 Edition, 16e
Jones
9780078025488
49
Auditing & Assurance Services, 5e
Louwers
9780078025440
43
Financial Statement Analysis and Security Valuation, 5e
Penman
9780078025310
56
Accounting for Governmental and NonProfit Entities, 16e
Reck
9780078110931
54
Financial Accounting, 7e
Spiceland
9780078025327
31
Financial Accounting: Making the Connection
Spiceland
9780077862268
11
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals: 2013 Edition, 4e
Spilker
9780077434113
49
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entites: 2013 Edition, 4e
Spilker
9780078025464
50
Taxation of Business Entities: 2013 Edition, 4e
Spilker
9780077434045
49
Financial Accounting: Information for Decisions, 6e
Wild
9780078025389
12
Computer Accounting Essentials using Quickbooks Pro 2012, 6e
Yacht
9780078025570
29
Computer Accounting with Peachtree Complete 2012: Release 19.0, 16e
Yacht
9780078025358
29
2012
Author
ISBN Essentials of Advanced Financial Accounting
Baker
9780078025648
39
Fundamentals of Taxation: 2012 Edition, 5e
Cruz
9780078025471
50
International Accounting, 3e
Doupnik
9780078110955
55
Survey of Accounting, 3e
Edmonds
9780078110856
58
Managerial Accounting, 14e
Garrison
9780078111006
23
College Accounting: A Contemporary Approach, 2e
Haddock
9780073396958
35
Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination, 2e
Hopwood
9780078136665
61
Messier
9780077520151
43
College Accounting, Chapters 1-30, 13e
Price
9780078025273
36
Financial Reporting and Analysis, 5e
Revsine
9780078110863
Auditing and Assurance Services: An Applied Approach
Stuart
9780073404004
44
An Introduction to Financial Accounting, 7e [UK]
Thomas
9780077132682
13
Principles of Auditing and Other Assurance Services, 18e
Whittington
9780077486273
44
Page
ACCOUNTING
Page
iii
56, 60
New Titles
ACCOUNTING
2012
Author
ISBN Fundamental Accounting Principles: Including International Financial Reporting Wild
9780071325509
5
Williams
9780077328702
14
Financial & Managerial Accounting, 16e
Williams
9780078111044
5
Computer Accounting with Peachtree By Sage Complete Accounting 2011, Release
Yacht
9780077505035
30
2011
Author
ISBN Financial Accounting Theory, 2e [UK]
Deegan
9780077126735
54
Managerial Accounting: An Asian Perspective [Asian]
Garrison
9780071088015
24
Accounting: A Framework for Decision Making, 3e [Aust]
Jackling
9780071016780
6
Management Accounting & Connect Plus, 6e [Aust]
Langfield-Smith
9780071016650
25
Consolidated Financial Statements, 2e [Asian]
Ng
9780071312912
41
Taxation in Singapore [Asian]
Poh
9780071078764
52
Management Accounting, 4e [UK Adaptation]
Seal
9780077129897
26
Management Accounting for Business Decisions [UK]
Seal
9780077126728
27
Page
Standards (IFRS) [Asian]
19.0, 15e
ACCOUNTING
iv
Page
New Titles
FINANCE, INSURANCE & REAL ESTATE
2013
Author
ISBN Bank Management & Financial Services, 9e
Rose
9780078034671
95
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: Alternate Edition, 10e
Ross9780077479459
65
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: Standard Edition, 10e
Ross
9780078034633
66
Personal Finance
Walker
9780073530659
98
2012
Author
ISBN Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 7e
Brealey
9780078034640
67
Finance: Applications and Theory, 2e
Cornett
9780073530673
68
M: Finance
Cornett
9780073382241
69
International Financial Management, 6e
Eun
9780078034657
96
Fundamentals of Cororate Finance, 5e [UK Adaptation]
Firer
9780077134525
71
Analysis for Financial Management, 10e
Higgins
9780078034688
71, 101
Fundamentals of Investment Management, 10e
Hirt
9780078034626
83
Fundamentals of Investments, 6e
Jordan
9780073530710
83
Personal Finance, 10e
Kapoor
9780073530697
99
Financial Markets & Institutions, 5e
Saunders
9780078034664
93
2011
Author
ISBN Financial Mathematics for Actuaries [Asian Pub]
Chan
9780071288934
102
Managing Your Personal Finance [Asian Pub]
Chan
9780071078863
100
Financial Markets and Corporate Strategy, 2e [UK Adaptation]
Hillier
9780077129422
72
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance [UK]
Hillier
9780077125257
73
Financial Management: Text, Problems and Cases, 6e [India]
Khan
9780071067850
73, 80
Futures and Options [Asian Pub]
Parameswaran
9780071313643
91
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: An Asian Perspective [Asian Pub]
Ross
9780071088022
74
Security Analysis and Portfolio Management [India]
Sasidharan
9780071078016
90
Understanding Mutual Funds [India]
Shashikant
9780071333481
85
Page
Page
Page
v
New Titles
vi
1
Accounting
Accounting for Non-Accounting Managers..........................................................10
Accounting Information Systems.........................................................................37
Accounting Principles............................................................................................5
Accounting Principles Supplements......................................................................9
Accounting Theory...............................................................................................54
Advanced Accounting..........................................................................................38
Advanced Managerial Accounting.......................................................................49
Auditing...............................................................................................................43
Auditing Practice Cases......................................................................................48
Computerized Accounting...................................................................................29
Corporate Financial Reporting............................................................................60
Cost Accounting / Cost Management..................................................................33
Cost Accounting Supplements............................................................................35
College Accounting..............................................................................................35
Financial Accounting...........................................................................................11
Financial Accounting Supplements.....................................................................21
Financial Statement Analysis..............................................................................56
Governmental / Non Profit...................................................................................53
Intermediate Accounting......................................................................................31
Intermediate Accounting Supplements................................................................33
International Accounting......................................................................................55
Management Control...........................................................................................61
Managerial Accounting........................................................................................22
Managerial Accounting Supplements..................................................................28
MBA Managerial..................................................................................................59
MBA Principles....................................................................................................60
Other Accounting.................................................................................................61
Survey of Accounting...........................................................................................58
Undergraduate Taxation......................................................................................49
New Titles
ACCOUNTING
2013
Author
ISBN Page
Introduction to Managerial Accounting, 6e
Brewer
9780078025419
22
Copley
9780078025457
53
Edmonds
9780078025365
11
Kay
9780078025341
29
Hoyle
9780078025402
38
Fundamentals of Advanced Accounting, 5e Hoyle
9780078025396
39
Hurt
9780078025334
37
Jones
9780078025488
49
Louwers
9780078025440
43
Penman
9780078025310
56
Reck
9780078110931
54
Spiceland
9780078025327
31
Spiceland
9780077862268
11
Spilker
9780077434113
49
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entites: 2013 Edition, 4e
Spilker
9780078025464
50
Spilker
9780077434045
49
Wild
9780078025389
12
Yacht
9780078025570
29
Yacht
9780078025358
29
Author
ISBN Essentials of Advanced Financial Accounting
Baker
9780078025648
39
Cruz
9780078025471
50
Doupnik
9780078110955
55
Edmonds
9780078110856
58
Garrison
9780078111006
23
Haddock
9780073396958
35
Hopwood
9780078136665
61
Messier
9780077520151
43
College Accounting, Chapters 1-30, 13e
Price
9780078025273
36
Revsine
9780078110863
Stuart
9780073404004
44
An Introduction to Financial Accounting, 7e [UK]
Thomas
9780077132682
13
Whittington
9780077486273
44
ACCOUNTING
2012
2
Page
56, 60
New Titles
ACCOUNTING
2012
Author
ISBN Wild
9780071325509
5
Williams
9780077328702
14
Williams
9780078111044
5
Computer Accounting with Peachtree By Sage Complete Accounting 2011, Release
Yacht
9780077505035
30
Author
ISBN Financial Accounting Theory, 2e [UK]
Deegan
9780077126735
54
Garrison
9780071088015
24
Jackling
9780071016780
6
Langfield-Smith
9780071016650
25
Ng
9780071312912
41
Poh
9780071078764
52
Management Accounting, 4e [UK Adaptation]
Seal
9780077129897
26
Seal
9780077126728
27
Fundamental Accounting Principles: Including International Financial Reporting Page
Standards (IFRS) [Asian]
19.0, 15e
ACCOUNTING
2011
Page
3
Accounting
4
Accounting
Accounting Principles
NEW
*9780071325509*
FUNDAMENTAL ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES
Including International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS)
By John J Wild, University of Wisconsin Madison, Ken Shaw, University
of Missouri-Columbia, Barbara Chiappetta and Winston Kwok
2012 (January 2012) / 1200 pages
ISBN: 9780071325509
An Asian Publication
NEW TO THIS EDITION
New coverage of IFRS discusses how important topics in accounting such as LIFO, statement of cash flows, and fixed assets
might be impacted by the adoption of IFRS.
NEW! McGraw-Hill’s Connect uses end-of-chapter material
pulled directly from the textbook to create static and algorithmic questions that can be used for homework and practice tests.
Motivation
CONTENTS
Fundamental Accounting Principles provides students every advantage as they strive to understand the key concepts of accounting and
their role in business. Covering both Financial Accounting and Managerial Accounting, it helps students to develop good decision-making
habits as they prepare, analyze and apply accounting information. It
also includes the current financial reports of Nestlé, Adidas, and Puma
to further reinforce the real-world relevance of accounting concepts.
Features
A unique pedagogical framework that provides insight into
every aspect of business decision making supported by accounting
information
The CAP (Conceptual/Analytical/Procedural) Model that clearly
identifies learning objectives, textual materials, assignments and test
items so that instructors can easily customize their courses
Decision Insight opening vignettes featuring successful Asian
entrepreneurs
A focus on International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
and IFRS-reporting companies
Additional points and examples placed strategically in side
margins
Comprehensive end-of-chapter questions, exercises, and
problems
International edition
NEW
ing concepts. In this revision, the authors have added to and refined
the coverage of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS),
particularly in Chapter 15 (“Global Business and Accounting”). Hallmarks of the text—including the solid Accounting Cycle Presentation,
relevant pedagogy, and high quality, end-of-chapter material—have
been updated throughout the book.
*9780078111044*
FINANCIAL & MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING
Chapter 1: Accounting: Information for Decision Making
Chapter 2: Basic Financial Statements
Chapter 3: The Accounting Cycle: Capturing Economic Events
Chapter 4: The Accounting Cycle: Accruals and Deferrals
Chapter 5: The Accounting Cycle: Reporting Financial Results
Comprehensive Problem 1: Susquehanna Equipment Rentals
Chapter 6: Merchandising Activities
Chapter 7: Financial Assets
Chapter 8: Inventories and the Cost of Goods Sold
Comprehensive Problem 2: Guitar Universe, Inc.
Chapter 9: Plant and Intangible Assets
Chapter 10: Liabilities
Chapter 11: Stockholders’ Equity: Paid-in Capital
Comprehensive Problem 3: McMinn Retail, Inc.
Chapter 12: Income and Changes in Retained Earnings
Chapter 13: Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 14: Financial Statement Analysis
Comprehensive Problem 4: Home Depot, Inc.
Chapter 15: Global Business and Accounting
Chapter 16: Management Accounting: A Business Partner
Chapter 17: Job Order Cost Systems and Overhead Allocations
Chapter 18: Process Costing
Chapter 19: Costing and the Value Chain
Chapter 20: Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Chapter 21: Incremental Analysis
Comprehensive Problem 5: The Gilster Company
Chapter 22: Responsibility Accounting and Transfer Pricing
Chapter 23: Operational Budgeting
Chapter 24: Standard Cost Systems
Chapter 25: Rewarding Business Performance
Comprehensive Problem 6: Utease Corporation
Chapter 26: Capital Budgeting
Appendix A: 2009 Home Depot Financial Statements
Appendix B: The Time Value of Money: Future Amounts and Present
Values
Appendix C: Forms of Business Organization
16th Edition
By Jan Williams, University of TennesseeKnoxville, Sue Haka, Michigan State University-East Lansing, Mark S Bettner, Bucknell
University and Joseph V Carcello, University of
Tennessee-Knoxville
2012 (January 2011) / 1264 pages
ISBN: 9780078111044
ISBN: 9780071316903 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/williams_basis16e
With the sixteenth edition of Financial and Managerial Accounting:
The Basis for Business Decisions, the Williams author team continues
to be a solid foundation for students who are learning basic account-
5
Accounting
Introduction to ACCOUNTING
NEW
By Penne Ainsworth, University of Wyoming-Laramie and Dan Deines,
Kansas State University
2011 (January 2010) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780078136603
ISBN: 9780071220583 [IE] 3rd Edition
By Beverley Jackling, Victoria University of
Technology, Jean Raar, Swinburne University of
Technology, Graeme Wines and Tracey McDowall of Deakin University
www.mhhe.com/ainsworth6e
NContents
Part One Introduction: Business Operating Activities
Chapter 1: Accounting and Business
Chapter 2: Business Processes and Accounting Information
Chapter 3: Operating Processes: Planning and Control
Part Two Planning: Operating Activities
Chapter 4: Short-term Decision Making
Chapter 5: Strategic Planning Regarding Operating Processes
Chapter 6: Planning, the Balanced Scorecard, and Budgeting
Part Three Recording and Evaluating: Operating Activities
Chapter 7: Accounting Information Systems
Chapter 8: Purchasing/Human Resources/Payment Process: Recording and Evaluating Expenditure Process Activities
Chapter 9: Recording and Evaluating Conversion Process Activities
Chapter 10: Marketing/Sales/Collection/Customer Support Process:
Recording and Evaluating Revenue Process Activities
Part Four Introduction: Capital Resource Process Activities
Chapter 11: Time Value of Money
Part Five Planning: Capital Resource Process Activities
Chapter 12: Planning Investments: Capital Budgeting
Chapter 13: Planning Equity Financing
Chapter 14: Planning Debt Financing
Part Six Recording and Evaluating Capital Resource Process
Activities
Chapter 15: Recording and Evaluating Capital Resource Process
Activities: Financing
Chapter 16: Recording and Evaluating Capital Resource Process
Activities: Investing
Part Seven Evaluating: Operating and Capital Resource Processes
Chapter 17: Company Performance: Profitability
Chapter 18: Company Performance: Owners’ Equity and Financial
Position
Chapter 19: Company Performance: Cash Flows
Chapter 20: Company Performance: Comprehensive Evaluation
Appendix: Apple’s 2008 Financial Statements and Accompanying
Notes
Index
6
*9780071016780*
accounting: a
framework for decision
making
An Integrated Approach, 6th Edition
This textbook integrates Financial and Managerial Accounting as
opposed to keeping these areas separate, the approach followed by
most books and curriculums. By “integration”, we mean the authors
focus on the business process and examine the activities from both
an external, financial reporting perspective and an internal, management decision-making perspective. The text incorporates real world
applications, including actual financial statements, to reinforce the
relevance of topics to real business situations and promote student
interest. The text also promotes active learning through Enhance Your
Understanding “probing” questions placed sporadically throughout
many chapters, Of Interest boxes that provide additional information
relating to the chapter concepts, Fast Fact boxes that provide additional information related to chapter concepts in a short, trivia-like
manner, and end-of-chapter group exercises.
2011 (March 2011)
ISBN: 9780071016780
McGraw-Hill Australia Title
www.mhhe.com/au/jackling3e
Thoroughly updated and re-sequenced in response to market feedback, Accounting: A Framework for Decision Making 3e is an ideal
first year accounting principles text. Presented in a straightforward
style, the third edition focuses on key concepts and illustrates each
concept with clear graphical or textual explanations and examples.
The latest AASB standards and accounting techniques underpin the
content throughout and new and revised questions have been added
to the end of chapter material. With an accessible technical focus,
Accounting 3e has a clear and broad content structure that means
the book lends itself to both majors and non-majors courses.
Contents
Part 1 Background environment and principles
CHAPTER 1 The accounting environment
CHAPTER 2 Accounting reports: their nature and uses
CHAPTER 3 Classification and analysis of transactions
CHAPTER 4 The structure and content of financial statements
CHAPTER 5 Financial statement analysis
CHAPTER 6 Accounting and financial management
Part 2 Accounting for management decisions
CHAPTER 7 Managerial decisionmaking and the accountant
CHAPTER 8 Cost concepts for management decisions
CHAPTER 9 Accounting for short-term management planning
Part 3 Conceptual frameworks for financial reporting
CHAPTER 10 Sources of authority and conceptual frameworks for
accounting
CHAPTER 11 Assets and expense
CHAPTER 12 Income
CHAPTER 13 Liabilities
CHAPTER 14 The recording focus
CHAPTER 15 Inventory transactions
CHAPTER 16 End-of-period adjustments
CHAPTER 17 Accounting information systems and internal control
CHAPTER 18 The principles applied: owner’s equity
APPENDIX 1 Extracts from Santos Ltd Annual Report 2008
APPENDIX 2 Interest tables
Glossary
Index
Accounting
COLLEGE ACCOUNTING CHAPTER 1-29
WITH ANNUAL REPORT
FUNDAMENTAL ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES
2nd Edition
By John Wild, University of Wisconsin at Madison, Barbara Chiappetta,
Nassau Community College and Ken Shaw, University of MissouriColumbia
2011 (October 2010) / 1188 pages
ISBN: 9780078110870
By John J Wild, University of Wisconsin Madison, Vernon Richardson, University of Arkansas-Fayetteville and Ken Shaw, University of
Missouri-Columbia
2011 (January 2010)
ISBN: 9780077346096
www.mhhe.com/wildCA2e
20th Edition
www.mhhe.com/wildFAP20e
College Accounting by Wild, Richardson, and Shaw draws upon the
success of Wild’s Fundamental Accounting Principles text. Its innovation is reflected in its extensive use of small business examples,
the integration of new computerized learning tools, superior end-ofchapter material, and a highly engaging, pedagogical design. Inclusion of technology products such as Connect, Connect Plus, Excel
Templates, and QuickBooks Pro 2010 software provides students
with every possible advantage as they strive to understand the key
concepts of accounting and their role in business.
With 55 years of success in the principles of accounting market,
Fundamental Accounting Principles, 20th edition by Wild, Shaw and
Chiappetta has endured and adapted to changes in accounting,
technology, and student learning styles. Its innovation is reflected in
its extensive use of small business examples, the integration of new
technology learning tools, superior end-of-chapter material, and a
highly engaging, pedagogical design. Inclusion of Connect, Connect
Plus and Carol Yacht’s General Ledger and Peachtree application
software provides students every advantage as they strive to understand the key concepts of accounting and their role in business.
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Introduction to Accounting
2 Accounting for Business Transactions
3 Applying Double-Entry Accounting
4 Preparing the General Journal and General Ledger
5 Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
6 Closing Process and Financial Statements
7 Fraud, Ethics, and Controls
8 Cash and Controls
9 Employee Earnings, Deductions, and Payroll
10 Employer Payroll Tax Reporting
11 Merchandise Sales and Accounts Receivable
12 Merchandise Purchases and Accounts Payable
13 Accrual Accounting Overview
14 Financial Statements and the Accounting Cycle
15 Accounts Receivable and Uncollectibles
16 Notes Receivable and Notes Payable
17 Inventories and Cost of Sales
18 Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangibles
19 Accounting for Partnerships
20 Corporate Formation and Stock Transactions
21 Corporate Earnings, Taxes, and Distributions
22 Long-Term Bonds
23 Cash Flow Reporting
24 Financial Statement Analysis
25 Managerial Accounting Concepts and Principles
26 Departmental and Responsibility Accounting
27 Job Order Cost Accounting
28 Budgets and Standard Costing
29 Relevant Costing for Managerial Decisions
Appendix A: Financial Statement Information
Appendix B: Accounting Principles
Appendix C*: Capital Budgeting and Investment Decisions
Appendix D*: Time Value of Money
* Appendixes C and D are available on the book’s Website, mhhe.
com/wildCA, and as print copy from a McGraw-Hill representative
1. Accounting in Business
2. Analyzing and Recording Transactions
3. Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
4. Completing the Accounting Cycle
5. Accounting for Merchandising Operations
6. Inventories and Cost of Sales
7. Accounting Information Systems
8. Cash and Internal Controls
9. Accounting for Receivables
10. Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangibles
11. Current Liabilities and Payroll Accounting
12. Accounting for Partnerships
13. Accounting for Corporations
14. Long-Term Liabilities
15. Investments and International Operations
16. Reporting the Statement of Cash Flows
17. Analysis of Financial Statements
18. Managerial Accounting Concepts and Principles
19. Job Order Cost Accounting
20. Process Cost Accounting
21. Cost Allocation and Performance Measurement
22. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
23. Master Budgets and Planning
24. Flexible Budgets and Standard Costs
25. Capital Budgeting and Managerial Decisions
REVIEW COPY (Available for course adoption only)
To request for a review copy,
contact your local McGraw-Hill representatives or,
e-mail your request to mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com or,
7
Accounting
Asian Adaptation
PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING
19th Edition
By John Wild, University of Wisconsin Madison, Ken Shaw, University of
missouri-Columbia, Barbara Chiappetta, Nassau Community College and
Patrick Ng
2009 (December 2008) / 1240 pages
ISBN: 9780071282833
ISBN: 9780071269308 (Chapter 1-17)
An Asian Adaptation
Principles of Accounting 19e combines leading-edge accounting content with state-of-the-art technology to provide accounting students
every advantage as they strive to understand the key concepts of accounting and their role in business. The book’s innovation is reflected
in its extensive use of small business examples, the integration of
new computerized learning tools, superior end-of-chapter material,
and a highly engaging, pedagogical design.
Contents
Chapter 1 Accounting in Business
Chapter 2 Analyzing and Recording Transactions
Chapter 3 Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
Chapter 4 Completing the Accounting Cycle
Chapter 5 Accounting for Merchandising Operations
Chapter 6 Inventories and Cost of Sales
Chapter 7 Accounting Information Systems
Chapter 8 Cash and Internal Controls
Chapter 9 Accounting for Receivables
Chapter 10 Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangibles
Chapter 11 Current Liabilities and Payroll Accounting
Chapter 12 Accounting for Partnerships
Chapter 13 Accounting for Corporations
Chapter 14 Long-Term Liabilities
Chapter 15 Investments and International Operations
Chapter 16 Reporting the Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 17 Analysis of Financial Statements
Chapter 18 Managerial Accounting Concepts and Principles
Chapter 19 Job Order Cost Accounting
Chapter 20 Process Cost Accounting
Chapter 21 Cost Allocation and Performance Measurement
Chapter 22 Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Chapter 23 Master Budgets and Planning
Chapter 24 Flexible Budgets and Standard Costs
Chapter 25 Capital Budgeting and Managerial Decisions
Appendix A Financial Statement Information A-1
Appendix B Time Value of Money
Appendix C Comparison between IFRSs and U.S. GAAP
FUNDAMENTAL FINANCIAL AND
MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS
WITH H-D ANNUAL REPORT
By Thomas P. Edmonds, Cindy Edmonds and Bor-Yi Tsay of University
of Alabama-Birmingham and Philip R. Olds, Virginia Commonwealth
University and Frances M McNair, Mississippi State University
2007 (December 2005)
ISBN: 9780073222936
ISBN: 9780071107693 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/edmonds/concepts
Contents
Chapter 1 Elements of Financial Statements
Chapter 2 Understanding the Accounting Cycle
Chapter 3 The Double-Entry Accounting System
Chapter 4 The Double-Entry Accounting System
Chapter 5 Accounting for Inventories
8
Chapter 6 Internal Control and Accounting for Cash Chapter 7 Accounting for Receivables
Chapter 8 Accounting for Long-Term Operational Assets
Chapter 9 Accounting for Current Liabilities and Payroll
Chapter 10 Accounting for Long-Term Notes Payable and Bond Liabilities Chapter 11 Proprietorships, Partnerships, and Corporations
Chapter 12 Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 13 Financial Statement Analysis
Chapter 14 Management Accounting: A Value-Added Approach
Chapter 15 Cost Behavior, Operating Leverage, and Profitability
Analysis
Chapter 16 Cost Accumulation, Tracing, and Allocation
Chapter 17 Product Costing in Service and Manufacturing Companies
Chapter 18 Job-Order, Process, and Hybrid Cost Systems
Chapter 19 Analysis of Cost, Volume, and Pricing to Increase Profitability
Chapter 20 Relevant Information for Special Decisions
Chapter 21 Planning for Profit and Cost Control
Chapter 22 Performance Evaluation
Chapter 23 Responsibility Accounting
Chapter 24 Planning for Capital Investment
Appendix A Accessing the EDGAR Database through the Internet
Appendix B Topps Annual Report for 2003 / Index
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BOOKKEEPING
AND ACCOUNTING
4th Edition
By Joel J Lerner, Sulivan County Community College and Rajul Gokarn
2010 (September 2009) / 480 pages
ISBN: 9780071635363
A Schaum Publication
Schaum’s Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting is the ideal review
and reference for your accounting class. Inside you’ll find explanations
of the subject’s fundamentals and topics such as financial analysis,
preparing cash flow statements, and the distinction between accounting for perpetual and periodic inventory system. It also includes a
chapter on the most popular accounting software, which accounting
students are expected to master before they graduate.
Contents
1. Assets, Liabilities, and Capital
2. Debits and Credits: The Double-Entry System
3. Journalizing and Posting Transactions
4. Financial Statements
5. Adjusting and Closing Procedures
6. Computer Application: Peachtree Complete® Software Introduction
7. Repetitive Transaction: The Sales and the Purchases Journals
8. The Cash Journal
9. Summarizing and Reporting via the Worksheet
10. The Merchandising Company
11. Costing Merchandise Inventory
12. Pricing Merchandise
13. Negotiable Instruments
14. Controlling Cash
15. Payroll
16. Property, Plant, and Equipment: Depreciation
17. The Partnership
18. The Corporation
Accounting
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF
ACCOUNTING I
3rd Edition
5th Edition
By Jae K Shim, California State University Long Beach and Joel G Siegel
ISBN: 9780071635318
By Joel Lerner, Sullivan County Community College and James Cashin
ISBN: 9780071635387 Schaum’s Outline of Financial Management provides a succinct review
of all financial management concepts in topics such as financial forecasting, planning and budgeting, the management of working capital,
short-term financing, time value of money, risk, return, and valuation,
capital budgeting, and more.
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Accounting I helps you understand
basic accounting concepts and offer extra practice on topics such as
debits, credits, the chart of accounts, the ledger, inventory measurement, net realizable value, recovery of bad debts, and methods for
computing interest. Coverage also includes fixed assets, depreciation
and scrap value, methods of depreciation, payroll, and payroll taxes.
Contents
1. Introduction
2. Analysis of Financial Statements and Cash Flow
3. Financial Forecasting, Planning, and Budgeting
4. The Management of Working Capital
5. Short-Term Financing
6. Time Value of Money
7. Risk, Return, and Valuation
8. Capital Budgeting (Including Leasing)
9. Capital Budgeting Under Risk
10. Cost of Capital
11. Leverage and Capital Structure
12. Dividend Policy
13. Term Loans and Leasing
14. Long-Term Debt
15. Preferred and Common Stock
Accounting Principles Supplements
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF
ACCOUNTING
CONTENTS
1. Accounting Concepts
3. Analyzing and Classifying Transactions, Examination I
4. Recording Transactions
5. Repetitive Transactions
6. Adjusting and Closing Procedures, Examination II
7. Summarizing and Reporting Via the Service Business Work Sheet
8. Summarizing and Reporting Via the Merchandising
9. Business Work Sheet
11. Alternative Inventory Valuation Methods
12. Repetitive Transactions 13. Capital and Equity, Examination III
14. Receivables and Payables
15. Cash and Its Control
16. Payroll
18. Property, Plant, and Equipment: Disposal and Taxation
19. Examination IV
20. Final Examination.
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES
OF ACCOUNTING
By Joel J. Lerner, Sullivan County Community College
2001 / 153 pages
ISBN: 9780071369725
Revised Edition
CONTENTS
By Joel Lerner, Sullivan County Community College and James Cashin
2012 (December 2011) / 160 pages
ISBN: 9780071777520
Chapter 1: Accounting Concepts: The Accounting Equation and
Financial Statements.
Chapter 2: Analyzing and Recording Transactions.
Chapter 3: Adjusting and Closing Procedures.
Chapter 4: Summarizing and Reporting Via the Work Sheet.
Chapter 5: Inventory Valuation Methods.
Chapter 6: Alternative Valuation Methods.
Chapter 7: Cash and Its Control.
Chapter 8: Receivables and Payables.
Chapter 9: Property, Plant, and Equipment: Depreciation.
Chapter 10: Property, Plant, and Equipment: Disposal and Taxation.
Chapter 11: Capital and Equity.
Chapter 12: Repetitive Transactions and Payroll.
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Principles of Accounting I mirrors the
courses in scope and sequence to help enrolled students understand
basic concepts and offer extra practice on topics such as debits,
credits, the chart of accounts, the ledger, inventory measurement, net
realizable value, recovery of bad debts, and methods for computing
interest. Coverage also includes fixed assets, depreciation and scrap
value, methods of depreciation, payroll, and payroll taxes.
9
Accounting
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF
ACCOUNTING II
4th Edition
By Joel J. Lerner, Sullivan County Community College and James A.
Cashin, Hofstra University
1994 / 306 pages
ISBN: 9780070375895
(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)
CONTENTS
Partnerships: Formation.
Partnerships: Admission and Dissolution.
The Corporation: Organization.
The Corporation: Stock Issue and Book Value.
The Corporation: Subscriptions and Treasury Stock.
The Corporation: Retained Earnings.
The Corporation: Issuing Bonds.
The Corporation: Redemption of Bonds. Examination I.
Manufacturing Accounting: Accounts and Statements.
Manufacturing Accounting: Worksheets and Joint and By-Products.
Cost Systems: Job Order.
Cost Systems: Process.
Budgets: Income Statement.
Budgets: Balance Sheet and Standard Costs. Examination II.
Financial Statement Analysis: Horizontal and Vertical.
Financial Statement Analysis: Ratios. Examination III.
Appendix: Statement of Cash Flows.
Accounting For Non-Accounting Managers
ACCOUNTING
Understanding and Practice, 3rd Edition
By Robert Perks and Danny Leiwy
2010 (March 2010) / 584 pages
ISBN: 9780077124786
McGraw-Hill UK Title
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/perks
Accounting: Understanding and Practice by Robert Perks and Danny
Leiwy provides a gentle introduction to the complexities of accounting. An evolution of the successful textbook Financial Accounting:
Understanding and Practice, this new edition has been enhanced
to provide more emphasis on Management Accounting topics, with
new material that has been structured in line with current teaching in
introductory accounting modules. Fully revised throughout, the whole
text has been thoroughly updated in accordance with the International
Financial Reporting Standards. Ample practice illustrations and examples help present the subject in relation to a business world to which
readers can easily relate.
CONTENTS
1- The Balance Sheet and What It tells us
2- The Income Statement
3- The Development of Financial Reporting
4- Ratios and Interpretations: A Straightforward Introduction
5- How the Stock Market Assesses Company Performance
6- Cash Flow Statements: understanding and preparation
7- Advanced Interpretation of Company and Group Accounts
8- Current Issues in Financial Reporting
9- Financing a Business
10- Management of Working Capital
11- Introduction to Management Accounting
12- Investment Appraisal
13- Budgetary Planning and Control
14- Absorption Costing
15- Marginal Costing and Decision Making
16- Standard Costing and Variance Analysis
17- Book-keeping to Trial Balance
18- Trial Balance to Final Accounts
19- Incomplete Records
Appendix 1: Developments in Management Accounting
Answers to Self Test Questions
Answers to Activities
Invitation to Publish
McGraw-Hill is interested to review your
textbook proposals for publication.
Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or
email to asiapub@mcgraw-hill.com.
Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
Website: http://www.mheducation.asia/publish/
10
Accounting
Financial Accounting
NEW
*9780078025365*
FUNDAMENTAL FINANCIAL
ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS
8th Edition
Thomas P Edmonds, University of Alabama at
Birmington, Frances M McNair, Mississippi
State University and Philip R Olds, Virginia
Commonwealth University
2013 (January 2012) / 808 pages
ISBN: 9780078025365
ISBN: 9780071317856 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/edmonds8e
Fundamental Financial Accounting Concepts 8th Edition by Edmonds/
McNair/Olds is ideal for the undergraduate introductory financial
accounting course, specifically for those wanting to focus on the
relationships between business events and financial statements. This
text is also appealing to those instructors looking for a shorter text
that focuses more on “key” financial accounting concepts rather than
rather than procedural details, and to those desiring a stronger user
orientation in their course. Overview: Students are often overwhelmed
by the amount of information presented in the introductory financial
accounting course. By focusing on fundamental concepts in a logical
sequence, students are able to fully comprehend the material rather
than memorize seemingly unrelated terms and topics. The goal of
Fundamental Financial Accounting Concepts is to enable students to
understand how any given business event affects the financial statements. The “financial statements model” is a highly praised feature
because it allows students to visualize the simultaneous impact of
business events on all of the key financial statements (the income
statement, the balance sheet, and the statement of cash flows).
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Chapters 1 and 2 have been broken into 2 parts that allow
instructors to cover the pace of coverage. Chapter 1, Section 1
covers basic terminology, introduces the accounting equation, and
demonstrates how business events are recorded under the equation;
Section 2 introduces students to financial statement. Chapter 2, Section 1 covers accruals, while Section 2 covers deferrals. Breaking the
chapters into sections offers an added benefit of promoting a stepwise
learning environment.
Enhanced coverage of financial statement analysis.
Created an appendix for Chapter 2 that covers depreciation
and the computation of interest with EOC material added covering
these topics
Added an appendix and related end-of-chapter materials to
Chapter 3 that provide continuing coverage of depreciation and the
computation of interest.
Added coverage of the framework for internal controls and enterprise risk management developed by the Committee of Sponsoring
Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) to Chapter 6
The Target annual report in Appendix D has been redesigned:
Target’s 2008, 2009, and 2010 financial statements have been
loaded into an Excel spreadsheet that is available on the OLC. The
income statement shown in the spreadsheet has been revised to
better reflect the income statement format and wording used in the
textbook. Credit card revenues (interest income) are moved to the
nonoperating section, enabling the project solution for gross margin
percentages to agree to those identified in the Management Discussion & Analysis section of the annual report. A multiple choice project
quiz is available in Connect.
Contents
Chapter 1 An Introduction to Accounting
Section 1: Collecting and Organizing Information
Section 2: Reporting Information
Chapter 2 Accounting for Accruals and Deferrals
Section 1: Accounting for Accruals
Section 2: Accounting for Deferrals
Chapter 3 The Double-Entry System
Chapter 4 Accounting for Merchandising Businesses
Chapter 5 Accounting for Inventories
Chapter 6 Internal Control and Accounting for Cash
Chapter 7 Accounting for Receivables
Chapter 9 Accounting for Current Liabilities and Payroll
Chapter 10 Accounting for Long-Term Debt
Chapter 11 Proprietorships, Partnerships, and Corporations
Chapter 13 Financial Statement Analysis 13-0 (ONLINE ONLY)
Appendix B Portion of the Form 10-K for Target Corporation
Appendix C Summary of Financial Radios
Appendix D Annual Report and Financial Statement Analysis Projects
Appendix E Accounting for Investment Securities
Appendix F Time Value of Money
Glossary
NEW
*9780077862268*
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
Making the Connection
By David Spiceland, University of Memphis, Wayne Thomas, University of
Oklahoma and Don Hermann, Oklahoma State University
2013 (January 2012) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780077862268
www.mhhe.com/spicelandMTC1e
Financial Accounting: Making the Connection 1e, has been developed
based on the great success of Financial Accounting 2e, Spiceland,
Thomas, Herrmann. 2e was developed with feedback from over 330
reviewers and focus group participants from across the country. With
the usage of digital resources growing exponentially, and high Connect
usage rates among instructors and students using Financial Accounting, 2e, Financial Accounting: Making the Connection 1e, removes all
end of chapter content from the 2e print text, and houses it exclusively
in Connect. The result is the same highly successful content contained
in 2e, without the added page length of end of chapter problems and
exercises. Financial Accounting: Making the Connection, 1e also
provides additional study materials and explanations through short
tutorial videos and practice activities that can be accessed via SmartPhone by scanning the Quick Response codes in the margin. Just like
with Financial Accounting 2e, the authors, David Spiceland, Wayne
Thomas and Don Herrmann, have developed a unique text based
on over 50 collective years of experience in the classroom. They’ve
brought together best practices like highlighting Common Mistakes,
offering frequent Let’s Review exercises, integrating the course with
a running Continuing Problem, demonstrating the relevance of the
course to non-majors with a Career Corner, and communicating it all
in a student-friendly Conversational Writing Style.
FEATURES
Conversational Writing Style The authors took special care to
write a textbook that fosters a friendly dialogue between the text and
11
Accounting
each individual student. The tone of the presentation is intentionally
conversational – creating the impression of speaking with the student,
as opposed to teaching to the student.
where reviewers noted that we needed mid-chapter exercises that
provided a more comprehensive and meaningful review of key
chapter segments.
Common Mistakes boxes highlight mistakes made by financial
accounting students throughout each of the chapters. With greater
awareness of the pitfalls the average student will find in their first accounting class, students can avoid making the same mistakes and
gain a deeper understanding of the chapter material.
IFRS boxes appear in select chapters and marginal notes are
in the IFRS appendix (E) highlighting differences between GAAP
and IFRS.
The Flip Side feature demonstrates how various transactions
are viewed by each participant. Including the “flip side” of a transaction - in context - enhances the student’s understanding of both the
initial and the related transaction. Selected homework in the end-ofchapter materials also includes the Flip Side transactions for students
to reinforce their understanding of this concept.
Continuing Problem The story of Great Adventures progresses
from chapter to chapter, encompassing the accounting issues of each
new chapter as the story unfolds. This progressive problem allows
students to see how each chapter’s topics can be integrated into the
operations of a single company.
Decision Maker’s Perspective Each chapter includes one or
more distinctive Decision Maker’s Perspective sections, which offer
insights into how the information discussed in the chapters affects
decisions made by investors, creditors, managers, and others. Each
chapter also contains Decision Points highlighting specific decisions
in the chapter that can be made using financial accounting information. This feature competes directly with Kimmel’s Decision Toolkit.
Real World Focus Students learn best when they see how
concepts are applied in the real world. For that reason, real-world
examples from companies, such as Dell and Apple, are used extensively and routinely to enhance the presentation. The real-world
focus adds realism to discussions and serves as the foundation for
exercises, problems, and cases.
Strong Supplements Package The authors write all of the major
supplements for Financial Accounting, including the Testbank, Solutions Manual, and Instructor’s Manual. With iPod material, narrated
PowerPoints, online quizzing, Working Papers, Excel templates and
QuickBooks templates integrated into the end-of-chapter material,
Spiceland’s Financial Accounting provides the cutting-edge technology demanded by today’s accounting instructors and students.
Unique End-of-Chapter Cases The Additional Perspectives section of each chapter offers the most distinctive variety of case material
available in financial accounting textbooks. Cases and activities are
designed to allow students to apply the knowledge and skills they’ve
learned in provocative, real or realistic situations. Each chapter offers
an engaging mix of activities and opportunities to perform real-world
financial accounting analysis.
The Inventory (6) chapter has been edited to correspond with
reviewer comments. The authors heavily revised Part B, “Recording
Inventory Transactions,” to focus only on the perpetual system. (In
the body of the chapter, entries for periodic no longer appear sideby-side with those for perpetual.) They also added a new Appendix
A, “Recording Inventory Transactions Using a Periodic System.” In
the new appendix, journal entries for periodic and perpetual appear
side-by-side, as they did in the body of the chapter in 1e.
The same content development editor (Ann Torbert, director
of development) who edited Kimmel’s Financial Accounting worked
closely with the authors on every chapter of 2e. Ann worked with the
authors on every line, every illustration and every problem to ensure
we have market-leading material in every chapter.
Concise Chart of Accounts appears in Ch. 2 and a full Chart of
Accounts has been added to the inside back cover. Account titles
used in text and EOC have been revised to be consistent with Chart
of Accounts as well.
Let’s Review exercises take the place of Stop and Go and Quick
Quiz features. These were changed in response to review feedback,
12
Marginal Accounting Equation Analyses clearly demonstrate
the equality of the accounting equation, as well as the effects of the
transactions on the stockholders’ equity accounts. Marginal Equation
Analyses appear where there is no existing mini-financial statement
display.
Analysis Section comparing 2 well-known, publicly traded companies, appears at the end of chapters 4-11. Chapter 12 provides a
comprehensive financial analysis of UnderArmour and Nike.
Earnings Management Cases are included in chapters 5-12.
CONTENTS
1. Accounting Information and Decision Making
2. The Accounting Information System
3. The Financial Reporting Process
5. Receivables and Sales
6. Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold
7. Long-Term Assets
8. Current Liabilities
10. Stockholders’ Equity
11. Statement of Cash Flows
12. Financial Statement Analysis
Appendix A – Annual Report of American Eagle
Appendix B – Annual Report of The Buckle
Appendix C – Time Value of Money
Appendix D – Investments
Appendix E – International Financial Reporting Standards
Appendix F— Additional Perspective cases and activities
NEW
*9780078025389*
Information for Decisions,
6th Edition
By John Wild, University of Wisconsin at
Madison
2013 (January 2012) / 744 pages
ISBN: 9780078025389
www.mhhe.com/wildFA6e
Contents
Chapter 1: Introducing Accounting in Business
Chapter 2: Analyzing and Recording Transactions
Chapter 3: Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
Chapter 4: Reporting and Analyzing Merchandising Operations
Chapter 5: Reporting and Analyzing Inventories
Chapter 6: Reporting and Analyzing Cash and Internal Controls
Chapter 7: Reporting and Analyzing Receivables
Chapter 8: Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Assets
Chapter 9: Reporting and Analyzing Current Liabilities
Chapter 10: Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Liabilities
Accounting
Chapter 11: Reporting and Analyzing Equity
Chapter 12: Reporting and Analyzing Cash Flows
Chapter 13: Analyzing and Interpreting Financial Statements
Appendix A: Financial Statements Information
Appendix B: Applying Present and Future Values
Appendix C: Investments and International Operations
Appendix D: Reporting and Analyzing Partnerships (online only www.
mhhe.com/wildfa6e)
Appendix E: Reporting and Analyzing Special Journals (online only
www.mhhe.com/wildfa6e)
NEW
*9780077132682*
AN INTRODUCTION TO
7th Edition
By Andrew Thomas, University of Birmingham
and Ann Mary Ward
2012 (January 2012) / 872 pages
ISBN: 9780077132682
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/thomas
The new seventh edition of Introduction to Financial Accounting by
Andrew Thomas and Anne Marie Ward has been fully revised and
updated to reflect the very latest developments in this dynamic field
and offers contemporary and comprehensive coverage of Financial
Accounting today.
New to this edition
Fully revised and updated to include the latest developments in
both the International
Accounting Standards (IAS) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
Part One has been revised to feature a new chapter to greater
reflect the history and purpose
Contents
Part 1: The Framework of Accounting
1. Entities and financial reporting statements
2. International accounting: institutional framework and standards
3. The history and purpose of the conceptual framework
4. The nature and objectives of financial accounting (corporate social
responsibility and accountability)
5. Accounting principles, concepts and policies
6. The conceptual framework of accounting
7. Auditing, corporate governance and ethics
Part 2: Double-entry bookkeeping (recording transactions and
the books of account)
8. The accounting equation and its components
9. Basic documentation and books of account
10. Double entry and the general ledger
11. The balancing of accounts and the trial balance
12. Day books and the journal
13. The cash book
14. The petty cash book
Part 3: Preparing final financial statements for sole traders
15. The final financial statements of sole traders (introductory)
16. Depreciation and non-current assets
17. Bad debts and provisions for bad debts
18. Accruals and prepayments
19. The preparation of final financial statements from the trial balance (advanced)
Part 4: Internal control and check
20. The bank reconciliation statement
21. Control accounts
22. Errors and suspense accounts
23. Single entry and incomplete records
Part 5: Preparing final financial statements for manufacturing
entities
24. Inventory valuation
25. Financial statements for manufacturing entities
Part 6: Clubs
26. The final financial statements of clubs
Part 7: Partnerships
27. The final financial statements of partnerships
28. Changes in partnerships
29. Partnership dissolution and conversion to a limited company
Part 8: Companies
30. The nature of limited companies and their capital
31. The final financial statements of limited companies
32. Statement of cash flows
33. The appraisal of company financial statements using ratio analysis
of the accounting framework.
Increased coverage of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)
and new coverage of Environmental
Accounting has been included to reflect the growing importance
of these issues in financial accounting today.
Over 50 brand new real world examples from companies such
as Tesco, Ryanair, BP, Nortel and
Marks & Spencer’s help illustrate accounting concepts and bring
the subject to life.
Plentiful worked examples and assessment material give students the opportunity to practise key
concepts and techniques. Review questions are highlighted by
level of difficulty to offer progressive
learning and some solutions can be found at the end of the book.
Excellent supplements package – packed with a wealth of additional online material for instructors
and students as well as additional assessment platforms and
practise resources to aid learning.
13
Accounting
NEW
*9780077328702*
15th Edition
By Jan Williams, University of TennesseeKnoxville, Sue Haka, Michigan State University-East Lansing, Mark S Bettner, Bucknell
University and Joseph V Carcello, University of
Tennessee-Knoxville
FUNDAMENTAL FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
CONCEPTS
7th Edition
Thomas P Edmonds, University of Alabama at Birmington, Frances M
McNair, Mississippi State University and Philip R Olds, Virginia Commonwealth University
2011 (January 2010) / 800 pages
ISBN: 9780073527123
ISBN: 9780071220712 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/edmonds7e
2012 (January 2011) / 800 pages
ISBN: 9780077328702
www.mhhe.com/williamsfinancial15e
While many texts characterize themselves as having either a “user”
approach or a “preparer” approach, Williams’ Financial Accounting
is written for faculty who want to strike a balance between these approaches. Business majors will find relevance in the “Ethics, Fraud
& Corporate Governance,” “Your Turn” and “Case in Point” boxes
throughout the chapters while accounting majors will receive a firm
grounding in accounting basics that will prepare them for their intermediate course.
New to this edition
New International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) coverage throughout the book introduces students to the concept in relation
to important topics in accounting such as LIFO, statement of cash
flows, and fixed assets
NEW! McGraw-Hill’s Connect uses end-of-chapter material
pulled directly from the textbook to create static and algorithmic questions that can be used for homework and practice tests.
Contents
Chapter 1: Accounting: Information for Decision Making
Chapter 2: Basic Financial Statements
Chapter 3: The Accounting Cycle: Capturing Economic Events
Chapter 4: The Accounting Cycle: Accruals and Deferrals
Chapter 5: The Accounting Cycle: Reporting Financial Results
Chapter 6: Merchandising Activities
Chapter 7: Financial Assets
Chapter 8: Inventories and the Cost of Goods Sold
Comprehensive Problem 2: Guitar Universe, Inc.
Chapter 9: Plant and Intangible Assets
Chapter 10: Liabilities
Chapter 11: Stockholders’ Equity: Paid-in Capital
Comprehensive Problem 3: McMinn Retail, Inc.
Chapter 12: Income and Changes in Retained Earnings
Comprehensive Problem 4: Home Depot, Inc.
Chapter 15: Global Business and Accounting
Appendix A: 2009 Home Depot Financial Statements
Values
Students are often overwhelmed by the amount of information presented in the introductory financial accounting course. By focusing
on fundamental concepts in a logical sequence, students are able
to fully comprehend the material rather than memorize seemingly
unrelated terms and topics. The goal of Fundamental Financial Accounting Concepts is to enable students to understand how any given
business event affects the financial statements. The “financial statements model” is a highly praised feature because it allows students
to visualize the simultaneous impact of business events on all of the
key financial statements (the income statement, the balance sheet,
and the statement of cash flows).
Contents
Chapter 1: An Introduction to Accounting
Chapter 2: Understanding the Accounting Cycle
Chapter 3: The Double-Entry Accounting System
Chapter 4: Accounting for Merchandising Businesses
Chapter 5: Accounting for Inventories
Chapter 6: Internal Control and Accounting for Cash
Chapter 7: Accounting for Receivables
Chapter 8: Accounting for Long-Term Operational Assets
Chapter 9: Accounting for Current Liabilities and Payroll
Chapter 10: Accounting for Long-Term Debt
Chapter 11: Proprietorships, Partnerships, and Corporations
Chapter 12: Statement of Cash Flow
Chapter 13: (Online) Financial Statement Analysis
Appendix A: Accessing the EDGAR Database through the Internet
Appendix B: Portion of the Form 10-K for Target Corporation
Appendix C: Summary of Financial Ratios
Appendix D: Annual Report and Financial Statement Analysis Project
Appendix E: Accounting for Investment Securities
Appendix F: Time Value of Money
14
Accounting
Global edition
financial accounting
7th Edition
By Robert Libby, Cornell University-Ithaca, Patricia Libby, Ithaca College and Daniel G Short, Texas Christian University
ISBN: 9780078111020
ISBN: 9780071313940 [GE]
www.mhhe.com/libby7e
Libby/Libby/Short wrote this text based on their belief that the subject
of financial accounting is inherently interesting, but financial accounting textbooks are often not. They believe most financial accounting
textbooks fail to demonstrate that accounting is an exciting field of
study and one that is important to future careers in business. When
writing this text, they considered career relevance as their guide when
selecting material, and the need to engage the student as their guide
to style, pedagogy, and design. Libby/Libby/Short is the only financial
accounting text to successfully implement a real-world, single focus
company approach in every chapter. Students and instructors have
responded very favorably to the use of focus companies and the
real-world financial statements. The companies chosen are engaging and the decision-making focus shows the relevance of financial
accounting regardless of whether or not the student has chosen to
major in accounting.
Contents
Chapter 1: Financial Statements and Business Decisions
Focus company: Maxidrive Corporation
Chapter 2: Investing and Financing Decisions and the Balance Sheet
Focus company: Papa John’s International
Chapter 3: Operating Decisions and the Income Statement
Chapter 4: Adjustments, Financial Statements, and the Quality of
Earnings
Chapter 5: Communicating and Interpreting Accounting Information
Focus company: Callaway Golf
Chapter 6: Reporting and Interpreting Sales Revenue, Receivables,
and Cash
Focus company: Deckers Outdoor Corporation
Chapter 7: Reporting and Interpreting Cost of Goods Sold and
Inventory
Focus company: Harley-Davidson, Inc.
Chapter 8: Reporting and Interpreting Property, Plant, and Equipment;
Natural Resources; and Intangibles
Focus company: Southwest Airlines
Chapter 9: Reporting and Interpreting Liabilities
Focus company: Starbucks
Chapter 10: Reporting and Interpreting Bonds
Focus company: Burlington Northern Santa Fe
Chapter 11: Reporting and Interpreting Owners’ Equity
Focus company: Kroger
Chapter 12: Reporting and Interpreting Investments in Other Corporations
Focus company: The Washington Post Company
Chapter 13: Reporting and Interpreting Investments in Other Corporations
Focus company: National Beverage Corp.
Chapter 14: Analyzing Financial Statements
Focus company: Home Depot
Appendix A: Present and Future Value Tables
Appendix B: American Eagle Outfitters Annual Report
Appendix C: Pacific Sunwear 2004 Annual Report
Appendix D: Industry Ratio Report
FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL
ACCOUNTING WITH ANNUAL REPORT
3rd Edition
By Fred Phillips, University of Saskatchewan, Robert Libby, Cornell
University and Patricia Libby, Ithaca College
2011 (January 2010)
ISBN: 9780077344931
ISBN: 9780071313780 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/phillips3e
Fundamentals of Financial Accounting, presents an engaging, balanced, and appropriately paced analysis of the fundamentals of financial accounting. Its conversational writing style makes it easy to read
and understand, while the selection of real focus companies reinforces
the relevance of accounting by introducing students to accounting and
business activities in the context of their favorite companies. Balance
between preparer and user orientations is achieved throughout the
book, by studying both the accounting activities that take place inside
the company, as well as evaluating their impact on decisions, and
users outside the company. Topic coverage is paced appropriately
for students new to accounting, and is thoroughly reinforced every
step of the way with an ample variety of innovative pedagogical tools.
Clearly understandable, relevant, and accessible, Fundamentals of
Financial Accounting is simply the most student-friendly financial book
on the market and provides the tools for students to grasp financial
accounting from the ground up.
Contents
Chapter 1: Business Decisions and Financial Accounting
Chapter 2: Reporting Investing and Financing Results on the Balance Sheet
Chapter 3: Reporting Operating Results on the Income Statement
Chapter 4: Adjustments, Financial Statements, and Financial Results
Chapter 5: Financial Reporting and Analysis
Chapter 6: Internal Control and Financial Reporting for Cash and
Merchandise Sales
Chapter 7: Reporting and Interpreting Inventories and Cost of Goods
Sold
Chapter 8: Reporting and Interpreting Receivables, Bad Debt Expense, and Interest Revenue
Chapter 9: Reporting and Interpreting Long-Lived Tangible and
Intangible Assets
Chapter 10: Reporting and Interpreting Liabilities
Chapter 11: Reporting and Interpreting Stockholders’ Equity
Chapter 12: Reporting and Interpreting the Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 13: Measuring and Evaluating Financial Performance
Appendix A: Excerpts from the Fiscal 2008 Annual Report of The
Home Depot, Inc
Appendix B: Excerpts from the Fiscal 2008 Annual Report of Lowe’s
Companies, Inc
Appendix C: Present and Future Value Concepts
Appendix D: Reporting and Interpreting Investments in Other Corporations
(at text website www.mhhe.com/phillips3e)
All Global Editions are
adapted to better meet the
needs of courses outside
the United States. Please contact your local
sales representative for
more details.
15
Accounting
2nd Edition
By J David Spiceland, University of Memphis, Wayne M Thomas,
University of Oklahoma-Norman and Don Herrmann, Oklahoma State
University-Stillwater
2011 (October 2010) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780078110825
ISBN: 9780071088381 [IE] www.mhhe.com/succeed
David Spiceland, Wayne Thomas and Don Herrmann have developed
a unique text based on over 50 collective years of experience in the
classroom. They’ve brought together best practices like highlighting
Common Mistakes, offering frequent Let’s Review exercises, integrating the course with a running Continuing Problem, demonstrating
the relevance of the course to non-majors with a Career Corner, and
communicating it all in a student-friendly Conversational Writing Style.
The new 2nd edition of Financial Accounting, Spiceland, Thomas, Herrmann, has been developed with feedback from over 330 reviewers
and focus group participants from across the country. The following
list of changes and improvements is a testament to the many hours
that reviewers spent analyzing the 1st edition, helping make Financial
Accounting, 2nd edition, the best book of its kind.
Contents
1. Accounting Information and Decision Making
2. The Accounting Information System
3. The Financial Reporting Process
5. Receivables and Sales
6. Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold
7. Long-Term Assets
8. Current Liabilities
10. Stockholders’ Equity
Appendix A – Annual Report of American Eagle
Appendix B – Annual Report of The Buckle
Appendix C – Time Value of Money
Appendix D – Investments
Appendix E – International Financial Reporting Standards
Asian Adaptation
An IFRS Perspective
By John Wild, ken Shaw, Barbara Chiappetta and Winston Kwok (NUS)
2011 (July 2010) / 664 pages
ISBN: 9780071288972
An Asian Adaptation
www.mheducation.asia/olc/wildkwok
Financial Accounting: Information for Decisions provides leading
accounting content that engages and motivates students. It helps
students to develop good decision-making habits as they prepare,
analyze, and apply accounting information. It also includes the current
financial reports of Nestle, Kraft Foods, and Adidas to further reinforce
real-world relevance of accounting concepts.
Contents
Chapter 1 Introducing Accounting in Business
Importance of Accounting
Fundamentals of Accounting
Transaction Analysis and the Accounting Equation
Financial Statements
Decision Analysis—Return on Assets
16
Chapter 2 Analyzing and Recording Transactions
Analyzing and Recording Process
Analyzing and Processing Transactions
Trial Balance
Decision Analysis—Debt Ratio
Chapter 3 Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
Timing and Reporting
Adjusting Accounts
Preparing Financial Statements
Closing Process
Classified Balance Sheet
Decision Analysis—Profit Margin and Current Ratio
Appendix 3A Alternative Accounting for Prepayments
Appendix 3B Work Sheet as a Tool
Appendix 3C Reversing Entries
Chapter 4 Reporting and Analyzing Merchandising Operations
Merchandising Activities
Accounting for Merchandise Purchases
Accounting for Merchandise Sales
Completing the Accounting Cycle
Financial Statement Formats
Decision Analysis—Acid-Test and Gross
Margin Ratios
Appendix 4A Periodic (and Perpetual) Inventory System
Appendix 4B Work Sheet—Perpetual System
Chapter 5 Reporting and Analyzing Inventories
Inventory Basics
Inventory Costing under a Perpetual System
Valuing Inventory at LCM and the Effects of Inventory Errors
Decision Analysis—Inventory Turnover and Days’ Sales in Inventory
Appendix 5A Inventory Costing under a Periodic System
Appendix 5B Inventory Estimation Methods
Chapter 6 Reporting and Analyzing Cash and Internal Controls
Internal Control
Control of Cash
Banking Activities as Controls
Decision Analysis—Days’ Sales Uncollected
Appendix 6A Documents in a Voucher System
Appendix 6B Control of Purchase Discounts
Chapter 7 Reporting and Analyzing Receivables
Accounts Receivable
Notes Receivable
Disposing of Receivables
Decision Analysis—Accounts Receivable
Turnover
Chapter 8 Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Assets
SECTION 1—PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Cost Determination
Depreciation
Additional Expenditures
Disposals of Property, Plant and Equipment
SECTION 2—NATURAL RESOURCES
SECTION 3—INTANGIBLE ASSETS 329
Decision Analysis—Total Asset Turnover 331
Appendix 8A Exchanging Property, Plant and
Equipment 335
Chapter 9 Reporting and Analyzing Current Liabilities
Characteristics of Liabilities
Known (Determinable) Liabilities
Estimated Liabilities
Contingent Liabilities
Decision Analysis—Times Interest Earned Ratio
Chapter 10 Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Liabilities
Basics of Bonds
Bond Issuances
Bond Retirement
Long-Term Notes Payable
Decision Analysis—Debt Features and the Debt-to-Equity Ratio
Appendix 10A Present Values of Bonds and Notes
Appendix 10B Effective Interest Amortization
Accounting
Appendix 10C Issuing Bonds between Interest Dates
Appendix 10D Leases and Pensions
Chapter 11 Reporting and Analyzing Equity
Corporate Form of Organization
Common Stock
Dividends
Preferred Stock
Treasury Stock
Reporting of Equity
Decision Analysis—Earnings per Share, Price-Earnings Ratio, Dividend Yield, and Book
Value per Share
Chapter 12 Reporting and Analyzing Cash Flows
Basics of Cash Flow Reporting
Cash Flows from Operating
Cash Flows from Investing
Cash Flows from Financing
Decision Analysis—Cash Flow Analysis
Appendix 12A Direct Method of Reporting
Operating Cash Flows
Chapter 13 Analyzing and Interpreting Financial Statements
Basics of Analysis
Horizontal Analysis
Vertical Analysis
Ratio Analysis
Decision Analysis—Analysis Reporting
Appendix 13A Sustainable Income
Appendix A Financial Statement Information
Nestlé
Kraft Foods
Adidas
Appendix B Time Value of Money B-1
Glossary
Credits
Index
Chart of Accounts
with IFRS Fold Out Primer, 5th Edition
By John J Wild, University of Wisconsin at Madison
2011 (January 2010) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780077408770
www.mhhe.com/wild5e
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING: Information for Decisions, 5th Edition addresses the topics and issues typically covered in Financial Accounting while at the same time motivating student interest in accounting
through the extensive use of entrepreneurial examples, application
of analysis skills, integration of interactive tutorial software, and a
highly engaging pedagogical design. This book thoroughly integrates
ideas and practices followed by today’s business entrepreneurs,
speaking more directly to students and better preparing them to
enter the workforce.
New to this edition
Integrated Apple iPod Content: Each chapter features icons
connecting course content with learning resources available for
download with the Apple iPod. Available downloads include audioonly lectures, lecture slideshows, narrated lecture slideshows, and
educational videos.
New Presentation of Transaction Analysis: Identify – Analyze –
Record – Post: a more logical and simple presentation of transaction
analysis that students understand. The change from the forth edition
to this approach came directly from reviewer feedback.
handy 8-page laminated fold-out reference tool packaged free with
new copies of the text.
New IFRS (International Financial Reporting Standards) Boxes:
These boxes reflect recent developments in the business world that
are relevant to accounting practice and how IFRS may differ from
current practices in the U.S. GAAP reporting.
New Global View section: Financial accounting according to U.S.
GAAP is similar, but not identical, to IFRS. Towards the end of each
chapter, a new “Global View” section highlights international accounting practices, including the similarities and differences for financial
reporting under IFRS versus U.S. GAAP relating to topics covered
within that chapter. Most chapters use GOME’s financial statements as
compared to Best Buy to illustrate the differences/similarities between
these financial reporting rules and concepts.
New Feature Company: Students are provided relevant, realworld companies as a resource tool and motivating force in learning
accounting. Best Buy is the new feature company, which means that
each chapter has selected assignments that require student to use,
analyze, or interpret its accounting data.
New Comparative Companies: For comparative purposes with
Best Buy, students are provided the financial statements of RadioShack. Assignments are included that ask students to compare
and interpret Best Buy, and RadioShack data. GOME, a Hong Kong
based-company, serves as a global comparison for Best Buy and
RadioShack Selected 2009 financial data for all three companies
is included in end-of-book Appendix A. Each of these companies is
integrated into the end-of-chapter material. Finally, Apple financial
statements are also included along assignments for each chapter.
NEW! McGraw-Hill’s Connect uses end-of-chapter material pulled
directly from the textbook to create static and algorithmic questions
that can be used for practice, homework, quizzes, and tests. FA 5e
Connect also includes The Personal Learning Plan (PLP) that connects each student to the learning resources needed for success in
the course. For each chapter, students: Take a practice test to initiate
the Personal Learning Plan; Immediately upon completing the practice test, see how their performance compares to chapter learning
objectives within chapters; Receive a Personal Learning Plan that
recommends specific readings from the text, supplemental study
material, and practice work that will improve their understanding and
mastery of each learning objective. All new texts come bundled with
Connect Plus at no additional cost.
CONTENTS
1 Introducing Accounting in Business
2 Analyzing and Recording Business Transactions
3 Adjusting Accounts and Preparing Financial Statements
4 Reporting and Analyzing Merchandising Operations
5 Reporting and Analyzing Inventories
6 Reporting and Analyzing Cash and Internal Controls
7 Reporting and Analyzing Receivables
8 Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Assets
9 Reporting and Analyzing Current Liabilities
10 Reporting and Analyzing Long-Term Liabilities
11 Reporting and Analyzing Equity
12 Reporting and Analyzing Cash Flows
13 Analyzing and Interpreting Financial Statements
Appendix B: Applying Present and Future Values
Appendix C: Investments and International Operations
*Appendix D: Reporting and Analyzing Partnerships
*Appendix E: Reporting and Preparing Special Journals
New IFRS (International Financial Reporting Standards) Quick
Reference Guide: This reference toll sets the stage for IFRS mapping similarities and differences to GAAP for each text chapter in a
17
Accounting
ACCOUNTING MADE EASY
2nd Edition
By Rajesh Agrawal, International Crops Research Institute for Semi Arid
Tropics and R Srinivasan, Professor IIM Bangalore
2010 (July 2010) / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780070700987
McGraw-Hill India Title
This new edition of Accounting Made Easy continues to provide a
simple and easy-to-assimilate introduction to the subject of Financial Accounting. The structure of the book has been defined and
built around two levels. The first level helps the readers to build an
understanding of accounting in a step-by-step manner. The second
level builds a bridge between the accounting learnt in the first level
and the real-world accounting. The book follows a novel ‘Learn by
Doing’ approach which engages the reader in work modules while
one reads the book.
Contents
Level I
The Green Company (Cash & Trading)
The Yellow Company (Credit & Trading
The Blue Company (Credit & Manufacturing)
The Brown Company (More Manufacturing)
The Red Company (A Brief Strategy)
The Orange Company
Learning from Level I
Level II
Simple T-Accounts: An Introduction
Simple T-Accounts: Do-It-Yourself
Taking Stock of Stocks
Complex T- Accounts: An Introduction
Complex T- Accounts: Do-It-Yourself
Accounting Systems: Cash Book, Journal and Ledgers
Learning from Accounting Scams
Accounting Concepts and the Policy
Learning from this Book
By S John Gabriel, Madras Christian College-Chennai and A Marcu,
Loyola College-Chennai
2010 (July 2010) / 1076 pages
ISBN: 9780070682177
This book aims at discussing the basic as well as advanced concepts
of financial accounting. The focus of this book is on the principles and
tools of financial accounting and their application. This book covers
the syllabus of Financial Accounting of the undergraduate courses of
University of Madras as well as other universities in South I region.
This book will meet the requirements of the students of this subject
in a comprehensive manner.
Contents
Unit I
1. Introduction to Accounting
2. Accounting Cycle –Journal and Ledger
3. Cash Book Petty Cash Book
4. Subsidiary Books
5. Trial Balance
Unit II
6. Final accounts of Sole Trading Concerns
Unit III
7. Single entry
Unit IV
8. Accounting for Non-Trading concerns – all methods
Unit V
9. Depreciation
Unit VI
18
10. Rectification of Errors
11. Bank Reconciliation Statement
Unit VII
12. Self balancing ledger – meaning – procedure – self balancing
journal entries – self balancing ledgers – transfer from one ledger
to another
13. Insurance claims – normal loss – abnormal loss
Unit VIII
14. Hire purchase & installment – including Hire purchasing trading
account
Unit IX
15. Branch accounts – excluding foreign branches 16. Departmental
accounts – Transfers at cost or selling price
Unit X
17. Average due date – calculation of due date based on holidays
intervention – interest calculation
18. Account current – methods of calculation of interest – product
method – red ink interest method – époque method – periodic balance method
Unit XI
19. Royalty accounts – accounting treatment in the books of lessor
and lessee – sub lease
Unit XII
20. Insolvency of individual and firm
Unit XIII
21. Bills of exchange – Trading and Accommodation bills – Renewals – Dishonour due to insolvency – Retiring of bills
Unit XIV
22. Accounting for goods sent on ‘ Sale or Return basis’
23. Investment Accounts
24. Voyage accounts
Unit XV
25. Consignment accounts – invoicing goods at cost price – proforma
invoice price – valuation of unsold stocks – accounting treatment of
normal loss and abnormal loss
26. Joint venture accounts – recording in individual venturer’s book
– recording in separate set of books
Unit XVI
27. Human Resource accounting
28. Inflation accounting
Unit XVII
29. Definition – provision relating to partnership – capital and current
accounts of partners – fixed and fluctuating – appropriation of profits
– past adjustments and guarantee – final accounts of firms
30. Introduction – Admission of a Partner – Treatment of goodwill –
Revaluation of assets and liabilities – calculation of ratios for distribution of profits – capital adjustments
31. Retirement of partner – calculation of gaining ratio-Revaluation of
assets and liabilities-Treatment of goodwill – adjustment of goodwill
through capital account only-settlement of accounts retiring partner’s
loan account with equal installments only
32. Death of a partner – treatment of JLP – settlement of amount due
to legal representatives of deceased partner
33. Dissolution – insolvency of partners – garner Vs murray – insolvency of all partners – deficiency accounts – piecemeal distribution
– proportionate capital method only
34. Amalgamation of firms – creation of new firm – sale to a company
Accounting
Including International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS)
By Jan R Williams, Sue F Haka, Mark S Bettner, Joseph V Carcello,
Nclson Lam and Peter Lau
2010 (August 2010) / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780071288965
www.mheducation.asia/olc/williamlamlau
While many texts are characterized as having either a “user” approach or a “preparer” approach, Financial Accounting: Including
International Financial Reporting Standards is written for faculty who
want to strike a balance between these approaches. Business majors
will find relevance in the “Ethics, Fraud & Corporate Governance,”
“Your Turn” and “Case in Point” boxes throughout the chapters while
accounting majors will receive a firm grounding in accounting basics
that will prepare them for their intermediate course. In addition, the
textbook incorporates examples, case studies, and questions drawn
from Asian contexts and practices. Combined with robust end-ofchapter exercises and exciting interactive supplementary materials,
Financial Accounting: Including International Financial Reporting
Standards is absolutely relevant and essential for instructors and
students in the region.
CONTENTS
1 Accounting: Information for Decision Making
2 Basic Financial Statements
3 The Accounting Cycle: Capturing Economic Events
4 The Accounting Cycle: Accruals and Deferrals
5 The Accounting Cycle: Reporting Financial Results
6 Merchandising Activities
7 Financial Assets
8 Inventories and the Cost of Goods Sold
Comprehensive Problem 2: Guitar Universe Company
9 Property, Plant, and Equipment, Intangible Assets and Natural
Resources
10 Liabilities
11 Shareholders’ Equity: Capital
Comprehensive Problem 3: McMinn Retail Limited
12 Profit and Changes in Retained Earnings
13 Statement of Cash Flows
Comprehensive Problem 4: Adidas AG, Herzogenaurach
15 Global Business and Accounting
Appendix A: Adidas AG, Herzogenaurach 2009 Consolidated Group
Financial Statements (IFRS) and Additional Information
Values
Index
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING
By Bill Collins and John McKeith of University of Stirling
2009 / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780077114527
www.mcgraw-hill.com.uk/textbooks.collins
Financial Accounting and Reporting by Bill Collins and John McKeith
takes an uncomplicated, step-by-step approach to intermediate level
financial accounting for specialist students. Its unique three-part
chapter structure builds up topic understanding without assuming
too much prior knowledge, offering a manageable way to master the
subject one step at a time.
Contents
1. The Preparation and Regulation of Company Financial Statements
2. Non-Current (Fixed) Assets
3. Intangible Assets and Impairment of Assets
4. Leases
5. Inventories and Construction Contracts
6. Share Capital and Reserves
7. Liabilities
8. Income Taxes
9. Cash Flow Statements
10. Groups
11. Foreign Currency
12. Interpretation of Financial Statements
AUSTRALIAN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
6th Edition
By Craig Deegan, RMIT University in Melbourne
2009
ISBN: 9780070277748
McGraw-HIll Australia Title
www.mhhe.com/au/deegan6e
Australia’s market-leading financial accounting text provides students
with a detailed grasp of reporting requirements in an accessible and
engaging manner. Fully updated throughout, Australian Financial Accounting further develops and extends its coverage of consolidations
and encompasses topical issues such as social and environmental
accounting. Renowned for his clear writing style, Craig Deegan successfully communicates the detail necessary to understand, challenge
and critically evaluate financial reporting. Complete in theoretical and
practical coverage, this text gives students a strong foundation for
current study and their future professional lives.
Contents
Part 1--The Australian Accounting Environment
Ch 1. An overview of the Australian external reporting environment
Ch 2. The conceptual framework of accounting and its relevance to
financial reporting
Part 2--Theories of Accounting
Ch 3. Theories of accounting
Part 3--Accounting for Assets
Ch 4. An overview of accounting for assets
Ch 5. Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Ch 6. Revaluations and impairment testing of non-current assets
Ch 7. Inventory
Ch 8. Accounting for intangibles
Ch 9. Accounting for heritage assets and biological assets
Part 4--Accounting for Liability and Owner’s Equity
Ch 10. An overview of accounting for liabilities
Ch 11. Accounting for leases
Ch 12. Set-off and extinguishment of debt
Ch 13. Accounting for employee benefits
Ch 14. Share capital and reserves
Ch 15. Accounting for financial instruments
Ch 16. Revenue recognition issues
Ch 17. The income statement
Ch 18. Share-based payments
Ch 19. Accounting for income tax
Part 5--Accounting for the Disclosure of Cash Flows
Ch 20. Statement of cash flows
Part 6--Industry-specific Accounting Issues
Ch 21. Accounting for the extractive industries
Ch 22. Financial reporting of general insurance activity
Ch 23. Accounting for superannuation plans
Part 7--Other Disclosure Issues
Ch 24. Events occurring after reporting date
Ch 25. Financial reporting by segments
Ch 26. Related party disclosures
Ch 27. Earnings per share
Part 8--Accounting for Equity Interests on Other Entities
Ch 28. Accounting for group structures: an introduction to
19
Accounting
consolidation accounting
Ch 29. Further consolidation issues I: accounting for intragroup
transactions
Ch 30. Further consolidation issues II: minority interests
Ch 31. Further consolidation issues III: accounting for indirect interests
Ch 32. Further consolidation issues IV: accounting for changes in the
degree of ownership of a subsidiary
Ch 33. Accounting for equity investments
Ch 34. Accounting for interests in joint ventures
Part 9--Foreign currency
Ch 35. Accounting for foreign currency transactions
Ch 36. Translation of the accounts of foreign operations
Part 10--Corporate Social-Responsibility Reporting
Ch 37. Accounting for corporate social responsibility
29. The nature of limited companies and their capital
30. The final financial statements of limited companies
31. Statement of cash flows
32. The appraisal of company financial statements using ratio analysis
Extra chapters available Online
33. UK accounting: institutional framework and standards
34. Changes in share capital
35. An introduction to consolidated financial statements
36. Value added tax, columnar books of prime entry and the payroll
37. The role of computers in accounting
38. Accounting for changing price levels
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL
ACCOUNTING
6th Edition
Andrew Thomas, University of Birmingham
2009 / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780077122805
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/thomas
The sixth edition of Introduction to Financial Accounting has been
fully revised and updated to provide comprehensive coverage of
accounting in the 21st century. Retaining its short, student-friendly
chapters and practical approach, it’s an essential text for students
studying accounting for the first time.
Contents
Part 1: The basic framework of accounting
1. Entities and financial reporting standards
2. International accounting: institutional framework and standards
3. The nature and objectives of financial accounting
4. Accounting principles, concepts and policies
5. The conceptual framework of accounting
6. Auditing, corporate governance and ethics
Part 2: Double-entry bookkeeping
7. The accounting equation and its components
8. Basic documentation and books of accounts
9. The general ledger
10. The balancing of accounts and the trial balance
11. Day books and the journal
12. The cash book
13. The petty cash book
Part 3: Preparing final financial statements
14. The final financial statements of sole traders (in brief)
15. Depreciation and non-current assets
16. Bad debts and provisions for bad debts
17. Accruals and prepayments
18. The preparation of final financial statements from the trial balance
Part 4: Internal control and check
19. The bank reconciliation statement
20. Control accounts
21. Errors and suspense accounts
22. Single entry and incomplete records
Part 5: Preparing final financial statements for manufacturing
entities
23. Inventory valuation
24. Financial statements for manufacturing entities
Part 6: Clubs
25. The final financial statements of clubs
Part 7: Partnerships
26. The final financial statements of partnerships
27. Changes in partnerships
28. Partnership dissolution and conversion to company status
Part 8: Companies
20
A New Perspective By Paul E. Solomon
2004 / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780071217187 [IE with PowerWeb]
www.mhhe.com/solomon
CONTENTS
Chapter 1- Introduction to a Business: Cards & Memorabilia Unlimited
Appendix 1-1 Cards & Memorabilia Unlimited
Chapter 2- Analyzing the Transactions of a Business
Chapter 3- Financial Statements and Their Relationships
Chapter 4- The Balance Sheet
Chapter 5- Using the Balance Sheet to Make Decisions
Chapter 6- The Income Statement
Chapter 7- Using the Income Statement to Make Decisions
Chapter 8- The Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 9- The Accounting Process: Manual and Computerized
Systems Appendix 9-1 Learning How to Use T-Account Analysis
Chapter 10- Comparing Financial Statements by Entity and Industry
Appendix 10-1 Learning How to Read Consolidated Financial Statements
Chapter 11- How Operating Activities Affect Financial Statements
Chapter 12- How Investing Activities Affect Financial Statements
Appendix 12-1 Mastering Compound Interest Concepts (With Tables)
Chapter 13- How Financing Activities Affect Financial Statements
Appendix 13-1 Measuring and Reporting Leases Appendix 13-2 Accounting for Deferred Income Taxes
Chapter 14- Applying What You Have Learned To Analyze the Gap
Appendix 14-1 2001 Financial Information for the Gap, Inc. and for
The Limited, Inc. Appendix 14-3 Creating a Statement of Cash Flows
Appendix A Performance Objectives Appendix B Commonly Used
Account Titles Appendix C Transactions A 1 through Z for Cards &
Memorabilia Unlimited
Accounting
Financial Accounting Supplements
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF
BOOKKEEPING AND ACCOUNTING
Revised Edition
By Joel Lerner, Sulivan County Community College
ISBN: 9780071779753
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting is a book for
students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview. This book is a
pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor,
Schaum’s Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting. With an emphasis
on clarity and brevity, this title features a streamlined and updated
format and the absolute essence of the bookkeeping and accounting,
presented in a concise and readily understandable form.
Expert tips for mastering bookkeeping and accounting
Last-minute essentials to pass the course
Easily-understood review of bookkeeping and accounting
Supports all major textbooks for bookkeeping and accounting
courses
Covers all course fundamentals – supplements the major bookkeeping and accounting textbooks
Appropriate for the following courses: Bookkeeping and Accounting, Principles of Accounting, Intermediate Accounting, Financial
Accounting
ACCOUNTING
Easy-to-follow review of financial accounting
Supports all the major textbooks for financial accounting courses
AND ACCOUNTING
4th Edition
By Joel J. Lerner, Sullivan County Community College and Rajul Gokarn
ISBN: 9780071635363
Contents
6. Computer Application: Peachtree Complete- Software Introduction
8. The Cash Journal
15. Payroll
17. The Partnership
18. The Corporation
Revised 2nd Edition
By Jae K Shim, California State University and Joel G Siegel, Queens
College
2012 (October 2011) / 360 pages
ISBN: 9780071762502
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Accounting mirrors the course in scope
and sequence to help enrolled students understand basic concepts
and offer extra practice on topics such as income statements, balance sheets, ledgers, debits, credits, financial statements, accrued
expenses, accrued revenue, condensed income statements, bank
statements, interest computation, and notes payable. Coverage
also includes current and noncurrent liabilities, bonds, stock splits,
dividends, admitting a new partner, liquidating a partnership, solvency
ratios, profitability ratios, cash and cash equivalents, and harmonization of accounting standards.
490 fully-solved problems
REVIEW COPY Full coverage of accounting concepts, principles, and tools
(Available for course adoption only)
Complete self-testing exams
Supports and supplements the leading textbooks in Financial
Accounting
Appropriate for the following courses: Financial Accounting,
Accounting for Management, Accounting Principles, Accounting I,
Accounting II
21
Accounting
Managerial Accounting
Global edition
NEW
*9780078025419*
INTRODUCTION
TO MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING
6th Edition
By Peter C Brewer, Miami University of
Oh-Oxford, Ray H Garrison, Brigham Young
University-Provo and Eric Noreen, University of
Washington
2013 (January 2012) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780078025419
ISBN: GE ISBN unavailable at press time
Introduction to Managerial Accounting, 6/e by Brewer/Garrison/
Noreen is based on the market-leading text, Managerial Accounting,
by Garrison, Noreen and Brewer. Brewer 6e is a briefer, more accessible, and thoroughly student-friendly text that satisfies the basic
needs of the managerial accounting student without unnecessary
depth on advanced topics associated with the follow-up course cost
accounting/cost management. Faculty and students alike will find this
new edition has retained the hallmark features of the Garrison brand:
author-written supplements, excellent readability, terrific examples,
and balanced end-of-chapter material. In addition, Connect Accounting for Brewer/Garrison/Noreen has been expanded with new learning
resources for your students.
New to this edition
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Accounting offers a number of powerful
tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so you can
spend more time teaching. Students can engage with their coursework
anytime and anywhere, making the learning process more accessible
and efficient. In short, Connect Accounting facilitates student learning and optimizes your time and energies, enabling you to focus on
course content, teaching, and student learning.
Create and deliver online, auto-graded homework assignments,
quizzes, and tests directly from the end-of-chapter materials or
test bank. Problems are available as both static and algorithmic
problems, and there are also multiple-choice conceptual questions.
Students receive immediate, detailed feedback on their assignments, allowing them to focus on the areas where they need
improvement.
Questions mapped to AACSB and AICPA skill areas, Bloom’s
Taxonomy levels, learning objectives, and difficulty level enable
you to run reports that assess specific learning outcomes.
NEW! LearnSmart ensures your students are learning faster, studying more efficiently, and retaining more knowledge. It pinpoints
concepts the student does not understand and maps out a personalized study plan for success. Based on students’ self-diagnoses
of their proficiency, LearnSmart intelligently provides students
with a series of adaptive questions. This provides students with a
personalized one-on-one tutor experience.
NEW! Select key problems offer Guided Examples next to the
assigned problems to show how to work through a similar problem. Students can learn from this video to then solve their own
assigned problems
NEW! Interactive Presentations teach the core learning objectives
of the text in a multimedia format, bringing the key concepts to life.
Detailed Feedback offers the option to present worked-out solutions
22
to the problem, showing the students each step of the process.
Appropriate chapters and problems include calculator keystroke
solutions in addition to formulas.
A Self Quiz and Study program allows students to evaluate their
performance through a practice test and then receive recommendations for specific readings from the text, supplemental study
material, and practice work that will improve their mastery of each
learning objective.
Pre-built assignments are available to save you set up time.
NEW! Chapter Updates
Chapter 1 (Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts) has been
rewritten to include coverage of mixed costs and contribution format income statements. The redundant coverage of the schedule
of cost of goods manufactured has been eliminated so that it is
now only covered in Chapter 2. The comparison of financial and
managerial accounting has been moved to the Prologue.
Chapter 2 (Job-Order Costing) has added a cost formula approach
to computing predetermined overhead rates.
Chapter 6 (Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for
Management) – the variable costing appendix has been expanded
to an entire chapter. The coverage of segmented income statements has been moved to this chapter.
Chapter 8 (Flexible Budgets, Standard Costs, and Variance Analysis) combines material from two chapters in the previous edition.
It discusses flexible budgets and their application in service businesses. It also explains how standards can be used to separate
spending variances into quantity and price variances.
Chapter 9 (Performance Measurement in Decentralized Organizations) has been reorganized, moving the segmented income statements to an earlier chapter and adding nonfinancial performance
measures to the chapter.
Chapter 12 (Statement of Cash Flows) has been completely
overhauled to simplify the process of creating a statement of cash
flows and to expand the discussion of how to interpret the statement of cash flows.
NEW! “Helpful Hint” boxes are found several times throughout
each chapter and include a variety of common mistakes, key points,
and “pulling it all together” insights for students.
NEW! Each chapter now contains one “Foundational 15” exercise
that includes fifteen “building-block” questions related to one concise
set of data. These exercises can be used for in-class discussion or
as homework assignments. They are found before the Exercises and
are available in Connect Accounting.
NEW! “Take Two” is a new end of chapter feature that provides a
second set of alternate numbers for selected exercises. The numbers
can be plugged into the exercise, thereby providing instructors an
option to work out the same exercise more than once during class,
sometimes showcasing a much different variation in the solution to
facilitate an additional learning opportunity. The alternate solutions
can be found in the instructor’s solutions manual.
NEW! “Applying Excel” is a new end-of-chapter feature that
provides students with an opportunity to build their own Excel worksheets and formulas. Students are then asked “what if” questions in
which they analyze how and why the related pieces of accounting
data affect each other. This feature will also be integrated in Connect.
“Decision Point” boxes combine the “Decision Maker” and “You
Decide” boxes from previous editions into one feature that fosters
critical thinking and decision-making skills by providing real-world
business scenarios that require resolution of a business issue. The
suggested solution is located at the end of the chapter. (Example:
Shoe Store Manager, Chapter 9.)
Connect Plus Accounting. This packaging option combines all
the great features of Connect Accounting, along with access to an
online version of Introduction to Managerial Accounting, 6e, so that
students can easily refer back to the text for review and guidance.
This media rich e-book links directly to tutorials and online resources
and offers additional functionality like taking notes and highlighting
key passages for reviewing later.
Accounting
Contents
Prologue: Managerial Accounting: An Overview
Chapter 1: Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts
Chapter 2: Job-Order Costing
Chapter 3: Activity-Based Costing
Chapter 5: Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships
Chapter 6: Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for
Management
Chapter 7: Profit Planning
Chapter 8: Flexible Budgets, Standard Costs, and Variance Analysis
Chapter 9: Performance Measurement in Decentralized Organizations
Chapter 10: Differential Analysis: The Key to Decision Making
Chapter 11: Capital Budgeting Decisions
NEW
*9780078111006*
MANAGERIAL
AccOUNTING Chapter 14: This chapter has been completely overhauled to
simplify the process of creating a statement of cash flows.
In Business boxes and End-of-Chapter material: revised
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Accounting: In addition to Self-Quiz and
Study, the 14th edition of Garrison Connect Accounting offers new
game-changing features including LearnSmart and Guided Examples.
Contents
1. Managerial Accounting: An Overview
2. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts
3. Job-Order Costing
4. Process Costing
5. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships
6. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management
7. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making
8. Profit Planning
9. Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis
10. Standard Costs and Variances
11. Performance Measurement in Decentralized Organizations
12. Differential Analysis: The Key to Decision Making
13. Capital Budgeting Decisions
Appendix A Pricing Products and Services
Appendix B Profitability Analysis
14th Edition
By Ray H Garrison, Brigham Young UniversityProvo, Eric Noreen, Univesity of Washington
and Peter C Brewer, Miami University of OhOxford
FUNDAMENTAL MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING CONCEpts
6th Edition
2012 (January 2011) / 832 pages
ISBN: 9780078111006
www.mhhe.com/garrison14e
As the long-time #1 best-seller, Garrison has helped guide close to
3 million students through managerial accounting since it was first
published. It identifies the three functions managers must perform
within their organizations—plan operations, control activities, and
make decisions—and explains what accounting information is
necessary for these functions, how to collect it, and how to interpret
it. Garrison’s Managerial Accounting is known for its relevance, accuracy, and clarity. It is also unique in that the authors write the most
important supplements that accompany the book: solutions manual,
test bank, instructor’s manual, and study guide – making them both
of high quality and extremely consistent with the textbook.
New to this edition
Applying Excel: This new feature, which has been added to
Chapters 2-13 of the text and Connect Accounting, gives students
the opportunity to practice using Excel formulas to build their own
worksheets. They are then asked a series of “what if” questions, all of
which illustrate the relationship among various pieces of accounting
data. The Applying Excel feature links directly to the concepts introduced in the chapter, providing students with an invaluable opportunity to apply what they have learned using a software they will use
throughout their careers, whether they become an accountant or not.
Chapter 1: This chapter has been completely overhauled to help
all business students better understand why managerial accounting
is relevant to their future careers.
Chapter 2: This chapter has been extensively rewritten to include
coverage of mixed costs and contribution format income statements.
The redundant coverage of the schedule of cost of goods manufactured has been eliminated so that it is now only covered in the Job
Order Costing chapter. The comparison of financial and managerial
accounting has been moved to Chapter 1.
By Thomas P Edmonds, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Philip
R Olds, Virginia Commonwealth University, Bor-Yi Tsay, University of
Alaabama at Birmingham
ISBN: 9780078110894
ISBN: 9780071220729 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/edmonds2011
Course Overview: Fundamental Managerial Accounting Concepts
6th edition is intended for the managerial accounting course taken
primarily by sophomores at both two and four year schools. Adopters
of Edmonds’ Fundamental Financial Accounting Concepts may be
interested in this text for their managerial courses. This book is also
a fit for schools moving away from Principles of Accounting texts to
splits and/or schools that find their current text to be too encyclopedic
and would like a text integrating a more user-oriented perspective.
Title Overview: Fundamental Managerial Accounting Concepts 6th
edition by Edmonds/Edmonds/Tsay/Olds focuses on concepts that
are isolated and introduced in a logical sequence. The authors intentionally limit the scope of the material to help students build a solid
foundation of the most important concepts in managerial accounting.
Fundamental Managerial Accounting Concepts 6th edition is organized in a distinctive way, particularly in the first six chapters. The
objective is to establish a coherent, integrative framework that enables
students to build knowledge in stepwise fashion. The authors’ goal
is for students to understand the underlying principles of accounting,
not just memorize content.
Contents
Chapter 1 Management Accounting and Corporate Governance
Analysis
Chapter 3 Analysis of Cost, Volume, and Pricing to Increase Profitability
Chapter 4 Cost Accumulation, Tracing, and Allocation
Chapter 5 Cost Management in an automated Business Environment:
ABC, ABM and TQM
Chapter 6 Relevant Information for Special Decisions (Previously
23
Accounting
Chapter 5)
Chapter 9 Responsibility Accounting
Chapter 10 Planning for Capital Investments
Chapter 11 Product Costing in Service and Manufacturing Entities
Chapter 12 Job-Order, Process, and Hybrid Costing Systems
Appendix
Glossary
Photo Credits
Index
NEW
*9780071088015*
MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING
An Asian Perspective
By Ray H. Garrison, Eric Noreen, Peter Brewer,
Cheng Nam Seng (Singapore Management
University) and Katherine Yuen (Singapore
Management University)
2011 (April 2011) / 888 pages
ISBN: 9780071088015
www.mheducation.asia/olc/garrison
Managerial Accounting: An Asian Perspective builds on the foundation of the market leading text, Managerial Accounting by Garrison,
Noreen, and Brewer. It identifies the three functions managers must
perform within their organizations—plan operations, control activities,
and make decisions—and explains what accounting information is
necessary for these functions, how to collect it, and how to interpret
it. Faculty and students alike will find this new edition has retained the
hallmark features: author-written supplements, excellent readability,
terrific examples, and balanced end-of-chapter material.
Features
Change of Chapter Flow: The 2 chapters on Systems Design
(Chapter 3 Systems Design: Job-Ordering Costing and Chapter 4
Systems Design: Process Costing) are moved to chapters 8 and 9,
after the discussion on Activity-Based Costing. This change of chapter
flow would highlight Activity-based costing being an important foundation that could be mixed with Job-order and Process costing methods
to form activity-based job costing and activity-based process costing.
New Chapter: Even with activity-based costing system, some
organization-level activities may still be allocated judgmentally.
Furthermore, cost allocations are problems that consume much of
management’s time to resolve. Therefore, this new edition highlights
cost allocation in a new Chapter 6, moving it from 2 appendices (4B
& 12B) previously.
New Asian companies, examples and cases are included in
In Business boxes and chapter opening Business Focus feature.
Examples of Asian companies include Japan Airlines, Temasek Holdings, Bank of Thailand, Disney Hong Kong, Samsung Electronics etc.
New frameworks and approaches are introduced as alternatives
to explain concepts and workings. Traditional workings/approaches
are retained to give instructors an option to continue their existing
method or adopt the alternative systematic approach.
24
A simpler method for calculating multiproduct breakeven point
using the concept of breakeven percentage of sales in Chapter 4.
Included the dual method of cost allocation in Chapter 6, giving a
comprehensive view of cost allocation techniques.
A tabulated format for ABC calculation to encourage students to
follow a systematic approach in addressing the topic in Chapter 7.
A systematic tabulated format to help student solve easy or complicated process costing exercises in Chapter 9
A modified easy to use technique for variance calculations in
Chapter 12 to help readers solve and modify variance calculations
for future real life problems.
The Value to Business (Owners) also known as Deprival Value
model in Chapter 14 to help assess the true value of assets in the
decision making process.
New exercises: The authors have written new exercises for
every chapter (with suggested answers) at different challenging levels
(easy, intermediate and difficult) and formats (MCQ, short questions
or long questions). These questions are in general more challenging
and relevant to the Asia-Pacific environment. They will be available
to adopters in the instructor resource CD.
CONTENTS
About the Authors
Let Garrison be Your Guide
Powerful Pedagogy
New Asian Content
Instructor Supplements
Student Supplements
Acknowledgments
Chap 1: Managerial Accounting and the Business Environment
Chap 2: Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts
Chap 3: Cost Behavior: Analysis and Use
Chap 4: Cost-Volume: Profit Relationships
Chap 5: Variable Costing: A Tool for Management
Chap 6: Cost Allocation
Chap 7: Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making
Chap 8: Systems Design: Job-Order Costing
Chap 9: Systems Design: Process Costing
Chap 10: Profit Planning
Chap 11: Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis
Chap 12: Standard Costs and Operating Performance Measures
Chap 13: Segment Reporting, Decentralization, and the Balanced
Scorecard
Chap 14: Relevant Costs for Decision Making
Chap 15: Capital Budgeting Decisions
Appendix A: Pricing Products and Services
Appendix B: Profitability Analysis
Global edition
9th Edition
By Ronald W Hilton, Cornell University-Ithaca
2011 (October 2010) / 832 pages
ISBN: 9780078110917
ISBN: 9780071220866 [GE] - Pub April 2011
www.mhhe.com/hilton9e
The emphasis of Managerial Accounting, 9th edition is on teaching
students to use accounting information to best manage an organization. In a practice Hilton pioneered in the first edition, each chapter
is written around a realistic business or focus company that guides
the reader through the topics of that chapter. Known for balanced
examples of Service, Retail, Nonprofit and Manufacturing companies,
Hilton offers a clear, engaging writing style that has been praised
by instructors and students alike. As in previous editions, there is
significant coverage of contemporary topics such as activity-based
costing, target costing, the value chain, customer profitability analysis,
and throughput costing while also including traditional topics such as
Accounting
job-order costing, budgeting and performance evaluation.
Contents
Chapter 1 The Changing Role of Managerial Accounting in a Dynamic
Business Environment
Chapter 2 Basic Cost Management Concepts and Accounting for
Mass Customization Operations
Chapter 3 Product Costing and Cost Accumulation in a Batch Production Environment
Chapter 3 Appendix Activity-Based Costing: An Introduction
Chapter 4 Process Costing and Hybrid Product-Costing Systems
Chapter 5 Activity-Based Costing and Management
Chapter 5 Appendix Just-in-Time Inventory and Production Management
Chapter 6 Activity Analysis, Cost Behavior, and Cost Estimation
Chapter 6 Appendix Least-Squares Regression Using Microsoft Excel
Chapter 7 Appendix Effect of Income Taxes
Chapter 8 Absorption and Variable Costing
Chapter 9 Profit Planning and Activity-Based Budgeting
Chapter 10 Standard Costing, Operational Performance Measures
and the Balanced Scorecard
Chapter 10 Appendix Use of Standard Costs for Product Costing
Chapter 11 Flexible Budgeting and the Management of Overhead
and Support Activity Costs
Chapter 11 Appendix A Standard Costs and Product Costing
Chapter 11 Appendix B Sales Variances
Chapter 12 Responsibility Accounting, Quality Control and Environmental Cost Management
Chapter 13 Investment Centers and Transfer Pricing
Chapter 14 Decision Making: Relevant Costs and Benefits
Chapter 14 Appendix Linear Programming
Chapter 15 Target Costing and Cost Analysis for Pricing Decisions
Chapter 16 Capital Expenditure Decisions
Chapter 16 Appendix A Future Value and Present Value Tables
Chapter 16 Appendix B Impact of Inflation
Chapter 17 Allocation of Support Activity Costs and Joint Costs
Chapter 17 Appendix Reciprocal-Services Method
Appendix I The Sarbanes-Oxley Act, Internal Controls, and Management Accounting
Appendix II Compound Interest and the Concept of Present Value
Appendix III Inventory Management
References for In their Own Words
Glossary
Photo Credits
Index of Companies and Organizations
Index of Subjects
All Global Editions are
adapted to better meet the
needs of courses outside
the United States. Please contact your local
sales representative for
more details.
NEW
*9780071016650*
MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING & CONNECT
PLUS
6th Edition
Kim Langfield-Smith, Monash University, Helen
Thorne, University of South Australia and Ronald W Hilton, Cornell University-Ithaca
2011 (August 2011)
ISBN: 9780071016650
www.mhhe.com/au/langfield6e
Management Accounting: Information for Creating and Managing
Value 6e explains the contemporary role of management accounting in organisations and demonstrates how it creates and enhances
value for shareholders. This text has been developed using major
cases based on real Australian businesses and includes numerous
illustrations of current management accounting practices of organisations in Australia, New Zealand and the wider Asia-Pacific region.
It takes a broad perspective in viewing management accounting as
the efficient and effective use of resources, supporting managers in
the improvement of customer and shareholder value. The strategic
and topical focus has been further developed and strengthened, new
questions have been added, text-flow streamlined and extensive revisions have been made to capital expenditure decisions, activity and
target-based costings, corporate social responsibility, and supply chain
management. Respected authors, a clear writing style and a wealth
of features that reference the management accounting practices of
real-life companies have made Management Accounting the most
popular management accounting text in Australia.
New to this edition
Material on processes and techniques to improve value and
competitiveness.
Extensive range of review questions and exercises
Coverage of emerging issues and focus on the dominant Australian service sector
Contents
Part 1 Introduction to Management Accounting
1.Management accounting: information for creating value and managing resources
2.Management accounting: cost terms and concepts
Part 2: Costs and Costing Systems
3. Cost and costing systems
4. Product costing systems
5. Process costing and operation costing
6. Service costing
7. A closer look at overhead costs
8. Activity-based costing
Part 3: Information for Managing Resources
9. Budgeting systems
10. Standard costs for control: direct material and direct labour
11. Standard costs for control: flexible budgets and manufacturing
overhead
12. Financial performance reports and transfer pricing
13. Financial performance measures for investment centres and
reward systems
14. Contemporary approaches to measuring and managing performance
15. Suppliers and customers
16. Managing costs and quality
Part 4: Information for creating value
17. Sustainability and management accounting
25
Accounting
18. Cost volume profit analysis
19. Information for tactical decisions
20. Pricing and product mix decisions
21. Information for capital expenditure decisions
UK Adaptation
NEW
*9780077129897*
MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING
4th Edition
MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING FOR
MANAGERS
By Will Seal, Loughborough University Business
School, UK
2nd Edition
By Eric Noreen, University of Washington, Peter C Brewer, Miami University of OH-Oxford and Ray H Garrison, Brigham Young UniversityProvo
2011 (January 2010) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073527130
ISBN: 9780071221085 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/nbg2e
Managerial Accounting for Managers, 2nd Edition by Noreen/Brewer/
Garrison is based on the market-leading text, Managerial Accounting,
by Garrison, Noreen and Brewer. The Noreen book was created to
serve customers who do not wish to teach the financial accountingoriented content that is included in the Garrison book. Of our three
books (the Brewer book, the Garrison book, and the Noreen book),
the Noreen book is the most pure management accounting textbook.
The other two books have greater amounts of financial accounting
content. Managerial Accounting for Managers, 2nd Edition is geared
towards professors who love Garrison’s market-leading managerial
accounting content, but have been bothered by the debits and credits
included in the book. It includes the same coverage of managerial
accounting topics such as Relevant Costs for Decision Making, Capital
Budgeting Decisions, and Segment Reporting and Decentralization
without the journal entries. The job-order costing chapter has been
extensively rewritten to remove all journal entries. Furthermore, the
chapters dealing with process costing, the statement of cash flows,
and financial statement analysis have been dropped to enable
professors to focus their attention on the bedrocks of managerial
accounting—planning, control, and decision making.
Contents
Chapter 1: Managerial Accounting and the Business and Environment
Chapter 3: Cost Behavior: Analysis and Use
Chapter 5: Systems Design: Job-Order Costing
Chapter 6: Variable Costing: A Tool for Management
Chapter 7: Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making
Chapter 9: Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis
Chapter 10: Standard Costs and Operating Performance Measures
Chapter 11: Segment Reporting, Decentralization, and the Balanced
Scorecard
Chapter 12: Relevant Costs for Decision Making
Appendix A: Pricing Products and Services
Appendix B: Profitability Analysis
26
ISBN: 9780077129897
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/seal
Management Accounting offers the ideal balance between technical
and conceptual approaches to Management Accounting. With its
comprehensive coverage and focus on assessment material and
application, this new edition is an essential core text for undergraduate accounting students and flexible enough to be used across a
variety of levels.
Contents
Part I: An introduction to management accounting
Chapter 1: Accounting and decision making in business
Part II: Cost and revenues for decision making
Chapter 2: Cost terms and concepts
Chapter 3: Short-term decision making: cost-volume-profit relationships
Chapter 4: Relevant costs for decision making
Chapter 5: The principles of cost allocation: full costing
Chapter 6: Activity-based costing
Chapter 7: Pricing, target costing and transfer pricing
Part III: Business planning and organizational control
Chapter 8: Profit planning and controlling: budgeting
Chapter 9: Standard costing and variance analysis
Chapter 10: Long-term decision making: capital investment appraisal
Chapter 11: Strategic management accounting and the balanced
scorecard
Chapter 12: Performance measurement and management control in
segmented organizations
Chapter 13: Management control and business process improvement
Accounting
NEW
*9780077126728*
MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING FOR
BUSINESS DECISIONS
By Will Seal, Loughborough University Business
School, UK
2011 (March 2011)
ISBN: 9780077126728
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/seal
Written with the decision maker in mind, this new text from Professor
Will Seal, author of the highly successful Management Accounting,
takes a practical, real-world approach to the subject. Suitable for
one or two semester courses, the text is aimed at both specialist and
non-specialist students at an introductory level. The book provides
concise and manageable coverage of key topics and theory, and is
supported by contemporary examples from both the manufacturing
and services industries, ensuring it is relevant and engaging to both
today’s students and tomorrow’s decision makers.
CONTENTS
An introduction to management accounting
Chapter 1: Accounting and decision making in business
Cost and revenues for decision making
Chapter 2: Cost terms and concepts
Chapter 3: Short-term decision making: cost-volume-profit relationships
Chapter 4: Relevant costs for decision making
Chapter 5: The principles of cost allocation: full costing
Chapter 6: Activity-based costing
Chapter 7: Pricing, target costing and transfer pricing
Business planning and organizational control
Chapter 8: Profit planning and controlling: budgeting
Chapter 9: Standard costing and variance analysis
Chapter 10: Long-term decision making: capital investment appraisal
Chapter 11: Strategic management accounting and the balanced
scorecard
Chapter 12: Performance measurement and management control in
segmented organizations
Chapter 13: Management control and business process improvement
By Stacey M Whitecotton, Arizona State University-Tempe, Patricia
Libby, Ithaca College, Robert Libby, Cornell University-Ithaca and Fred
Phillips, University of Saskatchewan
2011 (January 2010) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780078110771
ISBN: 9780071221214 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/whitecotton1e
Tag line: Teaching Managerial Accounting in the Context of BusinessWhitecotton 1e addresses the reality of students taking the managerial
accounting course: the majority of them will not become accounting
majors and accountants; instead they will use accounting information
in their professional lives to make business decisions. Therefore, the
greatest challenges instructors have are to engage these students
in the managerial accounting course, keep the students motivated
throughout the course, and teach them accounting in a way that
connects conceptual understanding to the real world, so students will
be able to analyze and apply their managerial accounting knowledge
successfully in careers as managers in the world of business. Whitecotton 1e will engage and motivate students by presenting accounting
in the context of real, recognizable companies like Starbucks, Mattel,
and Tombstone Pizza, then integrate those companies throughout
the chapters. This will allow students to see accounting information
being used to make real business decisions in companies that are
part of their lives, helping them connect their learning to the real world.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Managerial Accounting
2. Job-Order Costing
3. Process Costing
4. Activity-Based Cost Management
5. Cost Behavior and Estimation
6. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
7. Incremental Analysis for Short-Term Decision Making
8. Capital Budgeting for Long-Term Investment Decisions
9. Budgeting and Planning
10. Controlling with Standard Costs and Variances
11. Decentralized Performance Evaluation and the Balanced Scorecard
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING
5th Edition
By Peter C Brewer, Miami University of Oh-Oxford, Ray H Garrison,
Brigham Young University-Provo and Eric Noreen, University of Washington
ISBN: 9780073527079
ISBN: 9780070181915 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/brewer5e
Introduction to Managerial Accounting, 5/e by Brewer/Garrison/Noreen
is based on the market-leading text, Managerial Accounting, by Garrison, Noreen and Brewer. However, this is not simply a briefer book
with chapters removed; Brewer 5e has been rethought and retooled
to meet the needs of the market. Brewer 5e is a more accessible,
yet thoroughly student-friendly text that satisfies the basic needs of
the managerial accounting student without unnecessary depth on
advanced topics associated with the follow-up course: cost accounting/cost management. Faculty and students alike will find this new
edition has retained the hallmark features of the Garrison brand:
author-written supplements, excellent readability, terrific examples,
and balanced end-of-chapter material.
Contents
Prologue: Managerial Accounting and the Business Environment
Chapter 2: Systems Design: Job-Order Costing
Chapter 3: Systems Design: Activity-Based Costing
Chapter 4: Systems Design: Process Costing
Chapter 5: Cost Behavior: Analysis and Use
Chapter 8: Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis
Chapter 9: Standard Costs
Chapter 10: Segment Reporting, Decentralization, and the Balanced
Scorecard
Chapter 11: Relevant Costs for Decision Making
Chapter 13: “How Well Am I Doing?” Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 14: “How Well Am I Doing?” Financial Statement Analysis
27
Accounting
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
Revised Edition, 3rd Edition
By Bill Neish, Macquarie University and Alan Banks, Grafton College of
TAFE
2010 (November 2010) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780070278448
www.mhhe.com/au/manacc3r
This revised edition of Management Accounting is an invaluable
resource for students of Certificate IV Financial Services (Accounting), Diploma of Accounting and Advanced Diploma of Accounting
in the FNS10 financial services training package. Featuring a new
user-friendly layout and writing style with updated revision exercises,
this text is ideal for VET-level management accounting students.
Chapter 11. Costing and Control of Administrative, Selling and Distribution Overheads
Chapter 12. Activity Based Costing System
Chapter 13. Job-Order, Batch and Service Costing
Chapter 14. Process, Joint and By-Product Costing
Chapter 15. Variable Costing and Absorption (Full) Costing
Chapter 16. Volume-Cost-Profit Analysis
Chapter 17. Budgeting and Profit Planning
Chapter 18. Standard Costs and Quality Costs
Chapter 19. Cost Variance Analysis
Chapter 20. Revenue and Profit Variance Analysis
Chapter 21. Responsibility Accounting
Chapter 22. Short-Run Decision Analysis
Chapter 23. Capital Budgeting
KEY Features
Mapped to the relevant competencies of the FNS10 Financial
Services Training Package
User-friendly writing style and layout to increase readability
A wealth of self-test questions, end-of-chapter review questions and easy-to-follow examples to assist students with practice
and revision
Managerial Accounting Supplements
Additional practice and review exercises are available on the
Online Learning Centre
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING
Scope
Revised 2nd Edition
The book is mapped to the relevant core and elective competencies of the FNS10 financial services training package and covers:
By Jae K Shim, California State University and Joel G Siegel, Queens
College
ISBN: 9780071762526
FNSACCT402B Produce job costing information—core unit for
Certificate IV Financial Services (Accounting)
FNSACCT507B Provide management accounting information—
core unit for Diploma of Accounting
FNSACCT613B Prepare and analyse management accounting
information—elective unit for Advanced Diploma of Accounting
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
5th Edition
By MY Khan, University of Delhi and PK Jain, Indiana Institute of
Technology-Delhi
2009
ISBN: 9780070681965
This new edition provides a penetrating and comprehensive analysis
of the concepts, theories, and techniques in a simple lucid style in
the frame work of Indian business environment. The subject matter
of this volume is woven round the application of accounting information for decision making both about a firm and as well as by a firm.
Schaum’s Outline of Managerial Accounting mirrors the course in
scope and sequence to help enrolled students understand basic
concepts and offer extra practice on topics such as cost classifications, income statements, balance sheets, analysis of cost behavior,
target income volume, margin of safety, break-even, and CVP analysis
assumptions. Coverage also includes the make-or-buy decision,
the sell-or-process-further decision, utilization of scarce resources,
standard costs, variance analysis, fixed overhead variances, transfer
pricing, and capital budgeting techniques.
490 fully-solved problems
Information on costing, capital budgeting, quality, variances,
and inventory
Excellent preparation for the CPA, CMA, SMA, and CGA exams
Supports and supplements the leading textbooks in Managerial
Accounting
Appropriate for the following courses: Management Accounting,
Cost Accounting, Accounting for Management, Managerial Accounting
Easy-to-follow review of managerial accounting
Supports all the major textbooks for managerial accounting
courses
Contents
Chapter 1. Nature of Management Accounting
Chapter 2. Generally accepted Accounting Principles and Accounting Standards
Chapter 3. Accounting Cycle and Statements of Financial Information
Chapter 4. Understanding Corporate Financial Statements and
Reports
Chapter 5. Cash Flow Statement
Chapter 6. Financial Statements Analysis
Chapter 7. Cost Concepts and Management Needs
Chapter 8. Costing and Control of Materials
Chapter 9. Costing and Control of Labour
Chapter 10. Costing and Control of Factory (Manufacturing) Overheads
28
Accounting
Computerized Accounting
NEW
*9780078025341*
COMPUTER ACCOUNTING WITH
QUICKBOOKS PRO 2012
14th Edition
By Donna Kay, Maryville University
2013 (February 2012) / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780078025341
(Details unavailable at press time)
NEW
*9780078025358*
PEACHTREE COMPLETE 2012
Release 19.0, 16th Edition
By Carol Yacht, Peachtree Consultant
2013 (March 2012) / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780078025358
NEW
*9780078025570*
COMPUTER ACCOUNTING ESSENTIALS
USING QUICKBOOKS PRO 2012
6th Edition
By Carol Yacht, Peachtree Consultant and Susan Crosson, Santa FE
College
2013 (March 2012) / 256 pages
ISBN: 9780078025570
QUICKBOOKS PRO 2011
MP - wQBPremAccCD, with Student CD,
13th Edition
By Donna Kay, Maryville University
2012 (March 2011) / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780077499860
www.mhhe.com/kay2011
Using a hands-on approach, Computer Accounting with QuickBooks®
2011 integrates understanding accounting with mastery of QuickBooks
software. The text provides proven instructional techniques based on
action research throughout the new edition to make students mastery
of QuickBooks as effortless as possible. The Thirteenth Edition offers
a complete package to learn the leading small business accounting
software: QuickBooks software, comprehensive text, Student Blog,
and LIVE Projects.
The text uses a highly effective three-step approach that aids students in constructing their own customized learning based on what
they already know:
1. Chapter Tutorials. Providing numerous screen shots and detailed
instructions, chapters in Computer Accounting with QuickBooks are
designed as tutorials for the student to initially learn the accounting
software features. All chapters are based on realistic, virtual company
cases to enhance your understanding of the business environment in
which QuickBooks is used. YouTube videos @ www.myquickbooks.
me reinforce chapter tutorials.
2. Learning Activities. To improve long-term retention of student software skills and mastery of QuickBooks, learning activities are included
at the end of the chapters. Designed with fewer instructions to test the
understanding and, when needed, to develop skills at quickly seeking
out additional information to complete tasks, the activities consist of
exercises, projects and web quests. JIT Learning, the ability to seek
out information as needed, is an increasingly important skill in a
rapidly changing business environment. Computer Accounting with
QuickBooks is designed to seamlessly facilitate your development of
this crucial skill. In addition, the virtual cases challenge you to apply
and develop both software and problem-solving skills.
3. Reflection. Reflection improves learning and retention. A reflection
exercise, A Wish and A Star, appears at the end of each chapter to
highlight what the student has learned.
New to this edition
Same Author, New Name: Donna Ulmer is now Donna Kay: Don’t
let the name change fool you, this text is written by the same market
leading author just like the previous 12 editions.
New for Instructors! QuickBooks Grade Assistant automatically
grades selected QuickBooks assignments (labeled with *).
New! Expanded assignments 12 new QuickBooks projects and
4 QuickBooks cases are incorporated throughout this new edition
of the text.
Go Paperless. Consistent with the sustainability and cost reduction initiatives on many college campuses, this edition offers three
options for going paperless with QuickBooks.
Live Project: QuickBooks in Action. Chapter 13 guides you
through the development of an authentic QuickBooks application that
can be used as a capstone project or as a service learning project
for a not-for-profit. By integrating and synthesizing skills learned in
the course, the QuickBooks in Action project provides you with an
effective mastery opportunity and bolsters your resume with professional experience.
A 140 day student trial edition of the QuickBooks software comes
packaged in the inside back cover of the text. The software allows the
student to do the various projects and exercises in the book from their
home computer. There are no limitations to the product functionality
within those 140 days.
The book can be used with QuickBooks Pro and QuickBooks
Accountant. The new edition is geared towards both versions of
QuickBooks. This edition the book comes with QuickBooks Accountant instead of QuickBooks Pro.
Contents
Section I: Exploring QuickBooks with Rock Castle Construction
1 Quick Tour of QuickBooks Pro 2010
2 Customizing QuickBooks and the Chart of Accounts
3 Banking
4 Customers and Sales
5 Vendors, Purchases, and Inventory
6 Employees and Payroll
7 Reports and Graphs
Section II: Small Business Accounting with QuickBooks 2010
8 New Company Setup
9 Accounting for a Service Company
10 Merchandising Corporation: Sales, Purchases, and Inventory
29
Accounting
11 Merchandising Corporation: Payroll
12 Advanced QuickBooks Features for Accountants
13 QuickBooks in Action: An Authentic Project
Section III: Quick Guide
QuickBooks Software
Company Commands
Chart of Accounts
Customer Transactions
Vendor Transactions
Employee Transactions
Banking Transactions
Entries
Reports
Microsoft Office and QuickBooks
Section IV: QuickBooks Extras
Appendix A Install & Register QuickBooks Software
Appendix B Back Up and Restore QuickBooks Files
Appendix C Troubleshooting QuickBooks
Appendix D Electronic Deliverables
Appendix E QuickBooks for Mac
Appendix F QuickBooks Blog
NEW
*9780077505035*
COMPUTER ACCOUNTING
WITH PEACHTREE BY SAGE
COMPLETE ACCOUNTING
2011
Release 19.0, 15th Edition
By Carol Yacht, Peachtree Consultant
Contents
Part 1: Exploring Peachtree Complete Accounting 2011
Chapter 1: Introduction to Bellwether Garden Supply
Chapter 2: Vendors
Chapter 3: Customers
Chapter 4: Employees
Chapter 5: General Ledger, Inventory, and Internal Control
Chapter 6: Job Cost
Chapter 7: Financial Statements
Chapter 8: Stone Arbor Landscaping—Time and billing
Part 2: Peachtree Complete Accounting 2011 for Service Businesses
Chapter 9: New Company Setup and Beginning Balances
Chapter 10: Maintaining Accounting Records for Services Businesses
Chapter 11: Completing Quarterly Activities and Closing the Fiscal
Year
Project 1: Susan Watson, Accounting
Project 1A: Student-Designed Service Business
Part 3: Peachtree Complete Accounting 2011 for Merchandising
Businesses
Chapter 12: Vendors & Purchases
Chapter 13: Customers & Sales
Chapter 14: Inventory & Services
Chapter 15: Employees, Payroll, and Account Reconciliation
Project 2: Mountain Sports
Project 2A: Student-Designed Merchandising Business
Part 4: Advanced Peachtree Complete Accounting 2011 Applications
Chapter 16: Customizing Forms
Chapter 17: Import/Export
Chapter 18: Microsoft Word and Templates
Project 3: Atlanta Computer Club
Project 4: ML Manufacturing, Inc.
Project 4A: Student-Designed Project
Appendix A: Troubleshooting
Appendix B: Accounting Information Systems
Appendix C: Review of Accounting Principles
Appendix D: Glossary
ISBN: 9780077505035
www.mhhe.com/yacht2011
Carol Yacht’s Peachtree textbook is the market leader because her
pedagogy is unmatched—she incorporates real-world businesses;
step-by step-directions; numerous screen illustrations; challenging
exercises and projects; and a website with additional resources. In
Computer Accounting with Peachtree by Sage Complete Accounting 2011, 15th Edition, you learn about the relationship between
Peachtree software and fundamental accounting principles, procedures, and business processes. The primary goal is for the student
to have a working familiarity with the software after completing
the course with this text. Computer Accounting with Peachtree by
Sage Complete Accounting 2011, 15th Edition, teaches you how
to use Peachtree Complete Accounting 2011 software. For more
than 35 years , Peachtree by Sage has produced award-winning
accounting software. Over 6.2 million customers use Sage software
products. More than 13,000 employees work for Sage (http://sage.
com/ourbusiness/aboutus). The Sage family of software products,
which includes Peachtree Complete Accounting, is the leading global
supplier of business management solutions and services. For more
information about Sage’s worldwide community, refer to page xxxii.
In the United States and Canada, Peachtree is used by more than
3.1 million businesses. Each year, tens of thousands of customers
choose accountant-recommended Peachtree by Sage for their business needs. Why? Because Peachtree helps you do more to support
the success of your business. Industries that use Peachtree include
retail stores, healthcare, human resources/payroll, construction/real
estate, transport/distribution, payment processing, not-for-profit,
manufacturing, public utilities, legal, medical, and accounting firms.
30
computer accounting essentials
using quickbooks PRO 2011
5th Edition
By Carol Yacht, Peachtree Consultant and Susan Crosson, Santa Fe College
2011 (April 2010) / 224 pages
ISBN: 9780077408954
www.mhhe.com/QBProessentials2010
QuickBooks Pro 2010 Essentials is an accessible, step-by-step guide
to installing, using and mastering the most widely used software for
small businesses. Supportive pedagogy helps students develop a
strong working knowledge of QuickBooks Pro. This book focuses on
the basic business processes of the software and teaches students
step-by-step how to set up and run a merchandising corporation.
Contents
Chapter 1: Software Installation and Creating a New Company
Chapter 2: Exploring QuickBooks
Chapter 3: New Company Setup for a Merchandising Business
Chapter 4: Working with Inventory, Vendors, and Customers
Chapter 5: Accounting Cycle and Year End
Chapter 6: First Month of the New Year
Project 1: Your Name Hardware Store
Project 2: Student-Designed Merchandising Business
Appendix A: Review of Accounting Principles
Accounting
COMPUTER ACCOUNTING USING MYOB
BUSINESS SOFTWARE
Intermediate Accounting
Version 19.5, 13th Edition
By Bill Neish, Macquarie University and George Kahwati, Northern
Sydney Institute of TAFE
ISBN: 9780070279070
www.mhhe.com/au/myob19
Computer Accounting Using MYOB Business Software is the ideal
learning resource for all students and professionals taking their first
steps with MYOB, whether in a classroom-based or self-paced
learning environment. The thirteenth edition of the text is written for
MYOB AccountRight Plus v19, MYOB AssetManager Pro v3.5 and
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19. This new edition gives students
a thorough understanding of MYOB business software, and the
expertise and confidence to use it in their professional lives. This
book will prove useful to all levels of users from those with little or
no accounting knowledge to qualified accountants. For providers of
accredited courses, assessment material is provided at the end of
each chapter. Some assessment material is cumulative to allow for
module integration and re-enforcement of material covered in previous chapters. The authors have maintained the user-friendly style
of previous editions, with clear step-by-step instructions, abundant
MYOB screen images, competency skills checklists, self-test questions and answers, and concise practical examples.
Key Features
Revised and updated to incorporate instructions for the features
of MYOB AccountRight Plus v19 including payroll functions, 2010 tax
tables, and numerous other smaller changes), MYOB AssetManager
Pro v3.5 and MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19
NEW: 100 videos taking learners step-by step through the most
common and important functions (on CD)
A wealth of screenshots and clear step-by-step instructions for a
full understanding of new and existing features of MYOB v19
User-friendly writing style enables students to process information easily
Competency skills checklists, self-test questions and practical
examples assist student comprehension
NEW
*9780078025327*
INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING
7th Edition
By J David Spiceland, University of Memphis, James Sepe, Santa Clara
University, Mark W Nelson, Cornell University-Ithaca
2013 (July 2012) / 1280 pages
ISBN: 9780078025327
ISBN: 9780077446499 (Volume 1, Chapters 1-12)
ISBN: 9780077446482 (Volume 2, Chapters 13-21)
www.mhhe.com/spiceland7e
CONTENTS
1. Environment and Theoretical Structure of Financial Accounting
2. Review of the Accounting Process
3. The Balance Sheet and Financial Disclosures
4. The Income Statement and Statement of Cash Flows
5. Income Measurement and Profitability Analysis
6. Time Value of Money Concepts
7. Cash and Receivables
8. Inventories: Measurement
9. Inventories: Additional Issues
10. Property, Plant, and Equipment and Intangible Assets: Acquisition
and Disposition
11. Property, Plant, and Equipment and Intangible Assets: Utilization
and Impairment
12. Investments
13. Current Liabilities and Contingencies
14. Bonds and Long-Term Notes
15. Leases
16. Accounting for Income Taxes
17. Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits
18. Shareholders’ Equity
19. Share-Based Compensation and Earnings per Share
20. Accounting Changes and Error Corrections
21. Statement of Cash Flows Revisited
Scope
Computer Accounting Using MYOB Business Software is written
for MYOB Accounting Plus v19, MYOB AssetManager Pro v3.5 and
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19.
NEW
*9780071328029*
INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL REPORTING
An IFRS Perspective, 2nd Edition
By Nelson Lam and Peter Lau
2012 (March 2012) / 950 pages
ISBN: 9780071328029
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective, Second Edition explains the financial reporting concepts, accounting treatments
and requirements, and preparation and presentation of financial
statements encountered at the corporate or individual entity level by
using the most updated International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRSs), including the latest IFRSs on financial instruments and fair
value measurement. This book is suitable for students, lecturers and
practitioners. Students and lecturers should find this a good textbook
for undergraduate and postgraduate intermediate and advanced
accounting and financial reporting courses. Users and preparers
of financial reports will find the concepts and explanations useful in
their daily work, and they can use the book as a guide in analysing,
auditing and preparing their financial reports.
31
Accounting
CONTENTS
Contents
About the Authors
Preface
1. Financial Reporting and International Financial Reporting Standards
2. Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting
3. Property, Plant and Equipment
4. Leases
5. Investment Property
6. Intangible Assets
7. Borrowing Costs
8. Impairment of Assets
9. Inventories
10. Construction Contracts
11. Revenue
12. Employee Benefits
13. Income Taxes
14. Provisions and Contingencies
15. Financial Instruments — An Introduction
16. Financial Assets
17. Financial Liabilities and Derecognition
18. Financial Instruments — Presentation and Disclosure
19. Presentation of Financial Statements
20. Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors
21. Events after the Reporting Period
22. Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations
23. The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
25. Fair Value Measurement
Index
The Role of Accounting as an Information System
Chapter 1. Environment and Theoretical Structure of Financial Accounting
Chapter 2. Review of the Accounting Process
Chapter 3. The Balance Sheet and Financial Disclosures
Chapter 4. The Income Statement and Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 5. Income Measurement and Profitability Analysis
Chapter 6. Time Value of Money Concepts Economic Resources
Chapter 7. Cash and Receivables
Chapter 8. Inventories: Measurement
Chapter 9. Inventories: Additional Issues
Chapter 10. Property, Plant, and Equipment and Intangible Assets:
Acquisition and Disposition
Chapter 11. Property, Plant, and Equipment and Intangible Assets:
Utilization and Impairment
Financial Instruments and Liabilities
Chapter 12. Investments
Chapter 13. Current Liabilities and Contingencies
Chapter 14. Bonds and Long-Term Notes
Chapter 15. Leases
Chapter 16. Accounting for Income Taxes
Chapter 17. Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits
Chapter 18. Shareholders’ Equity
Additional Financial Reporting Issues
Chapter 19. Share-Based Compensation and Earnings per Share
Chapter 20. Accounting Changes and Error Corrections
Chapter 21. The Statement of Cash Flows Revisited
Appendix A: Derivatives
Appendix B: Dell Annual Report
Appendix C: IFRS Comprehensive Case
INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING WITH
BRITISH AIRWAYS ANNUAL REPORT
6th Edition
By J David Spiceland, University of Memphis, James Sepe, Santa Clara
University, Mark W Nelson, Cornell University-Ithaca and Lawrence A
Tomassini, Ohio State University
2011 (March 2010)
ISBN: 9780077395810
ISBN: 9780071313988 [IE]
ISBN: 9780077395834 (Volume 1, Chapter 1-12)
ISBN: 9780077395827 (Volume 2, Chapter 13-21)
www.mhhe.com/spiceland6e
Rated the most satisfying textbook by students in independent research, Spiceland/Sepe/Nelson’s Intermediate Accounting, 6th Edition, has the quality, flexibility, and attention to detail students need
to master a challenging subject. It’s your Vehicle to Success in the
Intermediate Accounting course and beyond! Spiceland/Sepe/Nelson
provides a decision maker’s perspective to emphasize the professional judgment and critical thinking skills required of accountants
today. Reviewers, instructors, and student users of Spiceland have
enthusiastically embraced the relaxed, conversational writing style
that engages students in an enjoyable and effective learning experience. In addition, accounting’s preeminent textbook website provides
students a wide variety of electronic learning resources, including
iPod content. Study Guide, Instructor’s Manual, Solutions Manual,
Testbank, and Website content are all created by authors, ensuring
seamless compatibility throughout the Spiceland learning package.
The end-of-chapter material is also written by the author team and
tested in their own classes before being included in Intermediate
Accounting. Few areas see the kind of rapid change that accounting does, and the Spiceland team is committed to staying current.
The sixth edition fully integrates all the latest FASB Standards, and
the authors are committed to keeping you updated with all relevant
content changes throughout the edition.
32
INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL REPORTING
An IFRS Perspective
By Nelson Lam and Peter Lau
2009 (October 2008) / 912 pages
ISBN: 9780071274241
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective explains the
financial reporting concepts, accounting treatments and requirements,
and preparation and presentation of financial statements encountered
at the corporate or individual entity level by using the most updated
international financial reporting standards (IFRSs). This book also
contains several illustrative examples and real-life cases to help readers digest and understand the IFRS. The real-life cases are sourced
from those countries and places that have adopted or permitted the
use of IFRS, including Australia, China, Finland, France, Germany,
Hong Kong, Italy, the Netherlands, Singapore, the United Kingdom
and some emerging markets such as the Russian Federation.
CONTENTS
About the Authors
Preface
Part I Conceptual and Regulatory Framework
1 Financial Reporting and International Financial Reporting Standards
2 Framework for International Financial Reporting
Part II Elements of Financial Statements--Assets
3 Property, Plant and Equipment
4 Leases
5 Investment Property
6 Intangible Assets
7 Borrowing Costs
8 Impairment of Assets
9 Inventories
10 Construction Contracts
Part III Elements of Financial Statements--Liabilities, Equity,
Income and Expenses
Accounting
11 Revenue
12 Employee Benefits
13 Income Taxes
14 Provisions and Contingencies
Part IV Financial Instruments
15 Financial Instruments--Introduction
16 Financial Assets
17 Financial Liabilities and Derecognition
18 Financial Instruments: Presentation and Disclosure
Part V Presentation of Financial Statements and Related Topics
19 Presentation of Financial Statements
20 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors
21 Events after the Reporting Period
22 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations
23 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
24 Statement of Cash Flows
Index
Intermediate Accounting Supplements
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING II
2nd Edition
By Baruch Englard, College of Staten Island-City University of New York
2009 (May 2009) / 336 pages
ISBN: 9780071611664
Millions of students trust Schaum’s Outlines to help them succeed in
the classroom and on exams. Schaum’s is the key to faster learning
and higher grades in every subject. Each Outline presents all the essential course information in an easy-to-follow, topic-by-topic format.
You also get hundreds of examples, solved problems, and practice
exercises to test your skills.
Contents
Ch 1: Long-Term Liabilities
Ch 2: Stock Ownership
Ch 3: Stockholders’ Equity
Ch 4: Dilutive Securities & Earnings Per Share
Ch 5: Investments: Temporary & Long-Term
Ch 6: Revenue Recognition Issues
Ch 7: Accounting for Leases
Ch 8: The Statement of Cash Flows
Ch 9: Accounting Changes and Correction of Errors
Ch 10: Accounting for Pensions
Ch 11: Net Operating Loss Carrybacks and Carry Forwards
Deferred Income T
Taxes Appendix: The Time Value of Money
Compound Interest Tables
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTERMEDIATE
ACCOUNTING I
Revised, 2nd Edition
By Baruch Englard, College of Staten Island, City University of New York
ISBN: 9780071756068
In the thirteen years since the first edition of Schaum’s Outline of
Intermediate Accounting II was published, the Federal Accounting
Standards Board has implemented important new guidelines for
financial accounting which reflect the financial industry’s focus on
transparency and accountability in accounting practices. This second
edition of Schaum’s Outline of Intermediate Accounting II reflects
these changes, and closely follows the table of contents of McGrawHill’s bestselling Spiceland textbook.
Cost Accounting/ Cost Management
FUNDAMENTALS OF COST ACCOUNTING
Contents
3rd Edition
Ch 1: Review of the Accounting Process
Ch 2: The Income Statement and Retained Earnings Statement
Ch 3: The Balance Sheet
EXAMINATION I
Ch 4: The Conceptual Framework of Accounting Theory
Ch 5: The Time Value of Money
Ch 6: Cash and Temporary Investments
EXAMINATION II
Ch 7: Receivables
Ch 8: Inventories: General Topics
Ch 9: Inventories: Additional Issues and Methods
EXAMINATION III
Ch 10: Property, Plant, and Equipment
Ch 11: Depreciation and Depletion
Ch 12: Intangible Assets
Ch 13: Current Liabilities
Ch 14: Long-Term Liabilities
By William N Lanen, University of Michigan-Ann Arbor, Shannon Anderson, Rice University and Michael W Maher, University of California
Davis
2011 (January 2010) / 752 pages
ISBN: 9780073527116
ISBN: 9780071220965 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/lanen3e
A direct, realistic, and efficient way to learn cost accounting. Fundamentals is short (approximately 700 pages) making it easy to cover in
one semester. The authors have kept the text concise by focusing on
the key concepts students need to master. Opening vignettes and In
Action boxes show realistic applications of these concepts throughout.
All chapters end with a “Debrief” that links the topics in the chapter to
the decision problem faced by the manager in the opening vignette.
Comprehensive end-of-chapter problems provide students with all
the practice they need to fully learn each concept.
Contents
Introduction and Overview
1 Cost Accounting: Information for Decision Making
2 Cost Concepts and Behavior
Cost Analysis and Estimation
3 Fundamentals of Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
33
Accounting
4 Fundamentals of Cost Analysis for Decision Making
5 Cost Estimation
Cost Management Systems
6 Fundamentals of Product and Service Costing
7 Job Costing
8 Process Costing
9 Activity-Based Costing
10 Fundamentals of Cost Management
11 Service Department and Joint Cost Allocation
Management Control Systems
12 Fundamentals of Management Control Systems
13 Planning and Budgeting
14 Business Unit Performance Measurement
15 Transfer Pricing
16 Fundamentals of Variance Analysis
17 Additional Topics in Variance Analysis
18 Nonfinancial and Multiple Measures of Performance
Appendix: Capital Investment Decisions: an Overview
Chapter 15: Operational Performance Measurement: Indirect Cost
Variances and Resource-Capacity Planning
Chapter 16: Operational Performance Measurement: Further Analysis
of Productivity and Sales Variances
Chapter 17: The Management and Control of Quality, Six-Sigma,
and Lean Accounting
Part 4: Management-Level Control
Chapter 18: Strategic Performance Measurement: Cost Centers,
Profit Centers, and the Balanced Scorecard (BSC)
Chapter 19: Strategic Performance Measurement: Investment Centers
Chapter 20: Management Compensation, Business Analysis, and
Business Valuation
COST MANAGEMENT
Strategies for Business Decisions, 4th Edition
COST MANAGEMENT
A Strategic Emphasis, 5th Edition
By Edward Blocher, University of NC-Chapel Hill, David Stout, Youngstown State University and Gary Cokins, Sas/Worldwide Strategy
2010 (October 2009) / 928 pages
ISBN: 9780073526942
ISBN: 9780071267489 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/blocher5e
Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis, by Blocher/Stout/Cokins is
the first cost accounting text to offer integrated coverage of strategic
management topics in cost accounting. The text is written to help
students understand more about management and the role of cost
accounting in helping an organization succeed. This text aims to teach
management concepts and methods, also to demonstrate how managers use cost management information to make better decisions and
improve their organization’s competitiveness. In teaching these key
management skills, the text takes on a strategic focus. It addresses
issues such as: How does a firm compete? What type of cost management information is needed for a firm to succeed? How does the
management accountant develop and present this information? This
text helps students learn why, when, and how cost information is used
to make effective decisions that lead a firm to success.
Contents
Part 1: Introduction to Strategy, Cost Management, and Cost
Systems
Chapter 1: Cost Management and Strategy
Chapter 2: Implementing Strategy: The Value Chain, the Balanced
Scorecard, and the Strategy Map
Chapter 3: Basic Cost-Management Concepts
Chapter 4: Job Costing
Chapter 5: Activity-Based Costing (ABC) and Customer Profitability
Analysis
Chapter 7: Cost Allocation: Departments, Joint Products, and ByProducts
Part 2: Planning and Decision-Making
Chapter 8: Cost Estimation
Chapter 9: Profit Planning: Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis
Chapter 10: Strategy and the Master Budget
Chapter 11: Decision-Making with a Strategic Emphasis
Chapter 12: Strategy and Long-Term Investment Analysis
Chapter 13: Cost Planning for the Product Life-Cycle: Target Costing,
Theory of Constraints (TOC), and Strategic Pricing
Part 3: Operational-Level Control
Chapter 14: Operational Performance Measurement: Sales, DirectCost Variances, and the Role of Nonfinancial Performance Measures
34
By Ronald W Hilton, Cornell University-Ithaca, Michael W Maher,
University of California Davis and Frank Selto, University of ColoradoBoulder
ISBN: 978 0071287999 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hilton4e
Hilton/Maher/Selto (HMS) is for instructors who want to teach students
to manage costs and not just account for costs. HMS maintains that,
“Costs don’t just happen,” and with a pro-active approach toward
costs, managers who understand cost implications as well as accountants can add value to an organization. Hilton, Maher, Selto
focuses on having students learn to make decisions by the use of Cost
Management Challenges in the chapter opener, “You’re the Decision
Maker” boxes throughout each chapter, and the “You’re the Decision
Maker” simulation on the text website.
Contents
Part 1 Setting the Strategic Foundation: The Importance of Analyzing and Managing Costs
1.Cost Management and Strategic Decision Making Evaluating Opportunities and Leading Change
2.Product Costing Systems: Concepts and Design Issues
3.Cost Accumulation for Job-Shop and Batch Production Operations
Part 2 Activity-Based Management
4.Activity-Based Costing Systems
5.Activity-Based Management
6.Managing Customer Profitability
7.Managing Quality and Time to Create Value
Part 3 Process Costing and Cost Allocation
8.Process-Costing Systems
9.Joint-Process Costing
10.Managing and Allocating Support-Service Costs
Part 4 Planning and Decision Making
11.Cost Estimation
12.Financial and Cost-Volume-Profit Models
13.Cost Management and Decision Making
14.Strategic Issues in Making Long-Term Capital Investment Decisions
15.Budgeting and Financial Planning
Part 5 Evaluating and Managing Performance Creating and
Managing Value-Added Effort
16.Standard Costing, Variance Analysis, and Kaizen Costing
17.Flexible Budgets, Overhead Cost Management, and ActivityBased Budgeting
18.Organizational Design, Responsibility Accounting, and Evaluation
of Divisional Performance
19.Transfer Pricing
20.Performance Measurement Systems
Glossary
Photo Credits
Accounting
Bibliography
Company Name Index
Subject Index
Cost Accounting
Supplements International edition
COST ACCOUNTING
Principles and Applications, 7th Edition
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COST
ACCOUNTING
By Horace R Brock, University of North Texas, Linda Herrington and La
Vonda G Ramey of School Craft College
2007 (August 2006) / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780071115605 [IE]
3rd Edition
www.mhhe.com/brock7e
Contents
Part 1
Chapter 1 Monitoring Costs
Chapter 2 Purchasing Materials
Chapter 3 Storing and Issuing Materials
Chapter 4 Controlling and Valuing Inventory
Chapter 5 Timekeeping and Payroll
Chapter 6 Charging Labor Costs into Production
Chapter 7 Departmentalizing Overhead Costs
Chapter 8 Setting Overhead Rates
Chapter 9 Applying Manufacturing Overhead
Chapter 10 Completing the Cost Cycle and Accounting for Lost
Materials
Part 2
Chapter 11 Process Cost System – Production Data and Cost Flow
Chapter 12 Average Costing of Work in Process
Chapter 13 Units Lost or Increased in Production
Chapter 14 First In, First Out (FIFO) Costing of Work in Process
Chapter 15 Accounting for By-Products and Joint Products
Part 3
Chapter 16 The Analysis of Cost Behavior
Chapter 17 Budgeting
Chapter 18 Standard Costs: Materials and Labor
Chapter 19 Manufacturing Overhead Standard Costs: Completing
the Accounting Cycle for Standard Costs
Chapter 21 Analysis of Manufacturing Costs for Decision Making
Chapter 22 Cost Accounting for Distribution Activities and Service
Businesses
Chapter 23 Decision Making – Capital Investment Decisions
By Ralph S Polimeni, Hofstra University
1994
ISBN: 9780070110267
This powerful study guide includes all subjects found in the leading
textbooks and parallels the full-year cost accounting courses most
schools offer. Also appropriate for solo study, this book makes the
complex concepts and techniques accessible through clear explanations and solved problems to provide a review and help students
master their skills.
College Accounting
NEW
*9780073396958*
COLLEGE ACCOUNTING
A Contemporary Approach,
2nd Edition
By M David Haddock, Chattanooga State Tech,
John Price, University of North Texas and
Michael Farina, Cerritos College
2012 (May 2011) / 528 pages
ISBN: 9780073396958
www.mhhe.com/haddock2e
The Haddock text features the successful author team Price et al. The
author team based A Contemporary Approach on the solid foundation of the Price 12e textbook; however, in Haddock, the approach
has been modified to fit the needs of a growing number of College
Accounting instructors who teach the course without covering special
journals. These instructors feel that special journals are an unnecessarily complicated subject for such a basic course. By eliminating
special journal coverage, professors are free to focus on recording
to the general journal and posting to the general ledger - the basic
bookkeeping functions that are so important to accountants in the real
world. Competing books have placed special journals in an appendix
(Slater) or tried to separate special journal coverage from general
journal coverage but retain both (McQuaig). Haddock is the only text
on the market that eliminates special journal coverage completely (why
make students pay for material they will not learn in the course?). With
Haddock on the roster, instructor’s have a choice between a traditional
approach that fully integrates special journals into the text in a succinct and logical way (Price 12e) or a contemporary approach that
focuses on the basics and is more in keeping with where the course
is headed in the future (Haddock 1e).
35
Accounting
Contents
1. Accounting: The Language of Business
2. Analyzing Business Transactions
3. Analyzing Business Transactions Using T Accounts
4. The General Journal and the General Ledger
5. Adjustments and the Worksheet
6. Closing Entries and the Postclosing Trial Balance
7. Accounting for Sales and Accounts Receivable, and Cash Receipts
8. Accounting for Purchases, Accounts Payable, and Cash Payments
9. Cash
10. Payroll Computations, Records, and Payment
11. Payroll Taxes, Deposits, and Reports
12. Accruals, Deferrals, and the Worksheet
13. Financial Statements and Closing Procedures
Appendix A: The Home Depot 2009 Financial Statements for the year
ended January 31, 2010
NEW
24. The Statement of Cash Flows
25. Departmentalized Profit and Cost Centers
26. Accounting for Manufacturing Activities
27. Job Order Cost Accounting
28. Process Cost Accounting
29. Controlling Manufacturing Costs: Standard Costs
30. Cost-Revenue Analysis for Decision Making
Appendix A: The Home Depot, Inc. Annual Report.
Appendix B: Combined Journal
WITH ANNUAL REPORT
2nd Edition
By John J Wild, University of Wisconsin-Madison, Vernon Richardson, University of Arkansas-Fayetteville and Ken Shaw, University of
Missouri-Columbia
2011 (January 2010)
ISBN: 9780077346102
*9780078025273*
COLLEGE ACCOUNTING
Chapters 1-30, 13th Edition
By John Ellis Price, University of North Texas,
M David Haddock, Chattanooga State Tech and
Michael Farina, Cerritos College
CONTENTS
2012 (May 2011) / 1136 pages
ISBN: 9780078025273
ISBN: 9780077430627 (Chapters 1-13)
ISBN: 9780077430634 (Chapters 1-24)
www.mhhe.com/price13e
Overview: Price/Haddock/Farina has been a long-time market leader
because of its readability and relevance. The book includes many
real-world examples, high-interest problems and activities, in-text
help and practice, and classroom-tested dynamic pedagogy. With
the addition of McGraw-Hill’s Connect Accounting, the new edition
includes more technology support than ever before.
Contents
1. Accounting: The Language of Business
2. Analyzing Business Transactions
3. Analyzing Business Transactions Using T Accounts
4. The General Journal and the General Ledger
5. Adjustments and the Worksheet
6. Closing Entries and the Postclosing Trial Balance
7. Accounting for Sales and Accounts Receivable
8. Accounting for Purchases and Accounts Payable
9. Cash Receipts, Cash Payments, and Banking Procedures
10. Payroll Computations, Records, and Payment
11. Payroll Taxes, Deposits, and Reports
12. Accruals, Deferrals, and the Worksheet
13. Financial Statements and Closing Procedures
14. Accounting Principles and Reporting Standards
15. Accounts Receivable and Uncollectible Accounts
16. Notes Payable and Notes Receivable
17. Merchandise Inventory
18. Property, Plant, and Equipment
19. Accounting for Partnerships
20. Corporations: Formation and Capital Stock Transactions
21. Corporate Earnings and Capital Transactions
22. Long-Term Bonds
36
Chapter 1: Introduction to Accounting
Chapter 2: Accounting for Business Transactions
Chapter 3: Applying Double-Entry Accounting
Chapter 4: Preparing the General Journal and General Ledger
Chapter 6: Closing Process and Financial Statements
Chapter 7: Fraud, Ethics, and Controls
Chapter 8: Cash and Cash Controls
Chapter 9: Employee Earnings, Deductions, and Payroll
Chapter 10: Employer Payroll Tax Reporting
Chapter 11: Merchandise Sales and Accounts Receivable
Chapter 12: Merchandise Purchases and Accounts Payable
Chapter 13: Merchandiser’s Purchases Adjustments and Trail Balance
Chapter 14: Merchandiser’s Financial Statements and the Closing
Process
Appendix C via Web: Capital Budgeting and Investment Analysis
Appendix D via Web: Time Value of Money
Accounting
WITH ANNUAL REPORT
2nd Edition
By John J Wild, University of Wisconsin-Madison, Vernon Richardson, University of Arkansas-Fayetteville and Ken Shaw, University of
Missouri-Columbia
2011 (January 2010)
ISBN: 9780077346096
Accounting Information Systems
NEW
*9780078025334*
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION
SYSTEMS
3rd Edition
By Robert Hurt, Californina State Poly University-Pomona
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to Accounting
Chapter 2: Accounting for Business Transactions
Chapter 3: Applying Double-Entry Accounting
Chapter 4: Preparing the General Journal and General Ledger
Chapter 6: Closing Process and Financial Statements
Chapter 7: Fraud, Ethics, and Controls
Chapter 8: Cash and Cash Controls
Chapter 9: Employee Earnings, Deductions, and Payroll
Chapter 10: Employer Payroll Tax Reporting
Chapter 11: Merchandise Sales and Accounts Receivable
Chapter 12: Merchandise Purchases and Accounts Payable
Chapter 13: Merchandiser’s Purchases Adjustments and Trail Balance
Chapter 14: Merchandiser’s Financial Statements and the Closing
Process
Chapter 15: Accounts Receivable and Uncollectibles
Chapter 16: Notes Receivable and Notes Payable
Chapter 17: Inventories and Cost of Sales
Chapter 18: Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangibles
Chapter 19: Accounting for Partnerships
Chapter 20: Corporate Formation and Stock Transactions
Chapter 21: Corporate Earnings, Taxes, and Distributions
Chapter 22: Long-Term Bonds
Chapter 23: Cash Flow Reporting
Chapter 25: Managerial Accounting Concepts and Principles
Chapter 26: Departmental and Responsibility Accounting
Chapter 27: Job Order Cost Accounting
Chapter 28: Budgets and Standard Costing
Chapter 29: Relevant Costing for Managerial Decisions
Appendix C*: Capital Budgeting and Investment Decisions
Appendix D*: Time Value of Money
* Appendixes C and D are available on the book’s Website, mhhe.
com/wildCA, and as print copy from a McGraw-Hill representative
ISBN: 9780078025334
ISBN: 9780071318426 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hurt3e
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS
2nd Edition
By Robert Hurt, Californina State Poly University-Pomona
ISBN: 9780078111051
ISBN: 9780071220521 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hurt2e
Hurt’s Accounting Information Systems, 2e continues to take a fresh
new approach that puts judgment and critical thinking, not technology,
at the heart of the AIS course. Using a conversational writing style
appealing to students, this book presents AIS as an art as much as a
science. AIS is presented as a set of fundamental ideas and concepts
that can be applied in various organizational contexts. Students are
provided with vocabulary they will need to succeed in the profession and ensuring that they can communicate clearly and effectively
about accounting information systems with both accountants and
nonaccountants. The text end-of-chapter exercises and assessment
tools are all competency-based, distilling knowledge to its essential
elements and then encouraging students to use those essential elements to think for themselves.
Contents
Part One Introduction and Basic Concepts
1 Role and Purpose of Accounting Information Systems
2 Transaction Processing in the AIS
3 Professionalism and Ethics
4 Internal Controls
Part Two Documentation Techniques
5 Flowcharting
6 Data Flow Diagramming
7 REAL Modeling
Part Three Systems Analysis and Information Technology
8 Information Systems Concepts
9 XBRL
10 E-business and Enterprise Resource Planning Systems
Part Four Business Processes
11 Sales/Collection Process
37
Accounting
12 Acquisition/Payment Process
13 Other Business Processes
14 Business Process Management
Part Five Other Topics in Accounting Information Systems
15 Computer Crime and Information Technology Security
16 Decision-Making Models and Knowledge Management
17 Professional Certifications and Career Planning
18 Auditing and Evaluating the AIS
Glossary
Comprehensive Chapter References
Index
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION AND
REPORTING SYSTEMS
By Al Aseervatham, Moreton Institute of TAFE in Queensland
2009
ISBN: 9780070286733
Enterprise Ontology
Chapter 3: The REA Enterprise Ontology: Value System and Value
Chain Modeling
Chapter 4: The REA Enterprise Ontology: Business Process Modeling
Chapter 5: Task Level Modeling
Chapter 6: Relational Database Design: Converting Conceptual REA
Models to Relational Databases
Chapter 7: Information Retrieval from Relational Databases
Chapter 8: The Sales/Collection Business Process
Chapter 9: The Acquisition/Payment Business Process
Chapter 10: View Integration and Implementation Compromises
View Integration
Chapter 11: The Conversion Business Process
Chapter 12: The Human Resource Business Process
Chapter 13: The Financing Business Process
Chapter 14: Introduction to Enterprise System Risks and Controls
Chapter 15: ERP Systems and E-Commerce: Intra- and InterEnterprise Modeling
www.mhhe.com/au/aseervatham
The only Australian book on accounting information systems. This
innovative new text follows a logical progression from basic principles
and builds on the knowledge acquired in each chapter. A running
case study throughout the book offers a practical application of the
theory that is developed in each chapter. With learning objectives,
key terms, practical and numerical examples, summaries, self-test
problems and review exercises this text provides all the teaching and
learning tools students require.
Contents
Chapter 1 Information systems
Chapter 2 Business activities and transaction processing
Chapter 3 Documentation techniques and databases
Chapter 4 Project management tools
Chapter 5 System requirements
Chapter 6 Accounting information systems and security
Chapter 7 Accounting statutory obligations
Chapter 8 Testing and documenting systems
Chapter 9 The implementation of systems and records
Chapter 10 Monitoring reporting systems and reviewing reporting
procedures
Chapter 11 Accounting transaction titles
Chapter 12 The revenue cycle
Chapter 13 The expenditure cycle
Chapter 14 The payroll cycle
Chapter 15 The conversion cycle
Chapter 16 The financial cycle
Solutions
Index
Advanced Accounting
NEW
*9780078025402*
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING
11th Edition
By Joe Ben Hoyle, University of Richmond,
Thomas Schaefer, University of Notre Dame and
Timothy Doupnik, University of South Carolina
ISBN: 9780078025402
ISBN: 9780071318211 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hoyle11e
ENTERPRISE INFORMATION SYSTEMS
A Pattern-Based Approach, 3rd Edition
By Cheryl Dunn, Florida State University—Tallahassee, J. Owen Cherrington, Brigham Young Univeristy—Provo and Anita Sawyer Hollander,
University of Tennessee—Knoxville, Anita Hollander, University of Tulsa,
Eric Denna and Jay Owen Cherrington, and Brigham Young University
- Provo
2005 / 544 pages
ISBN: 9780071253192 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: An Introduction to Integrated Enterprise Information
Systems
Chapter 2: Representation and Patterns: An Introduction to the REA
38
Accounting
NEW
*9780078025396*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING
5th Edition
By Joe Ben Hoyle, University of Richmond,
Thomas Schaefer, University of Notre Dame and
Timothy Doupnik, University of South Carolina
2013 (March 2012) / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780078025396
ISBN: 9780071318259 [IE]
NEW
*9780078025648*
ESSENTIALS OF ADVANCED
By Richard E Baker, Northern Illinois University,
Theodore Christensen and David Cottrell of
Brigham Young University-Provo
ISBN: 9780078025648
ISBN: 9780071325998 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/baker2012
Essentials of Advanced Financial Accounting is an up-to-date and
highly illustrated presentation of the accounting and reporting principles and procedures used in a variety of business entities. The book
is ideal for instructors who have only a single term or semester to
teach the core elements of the advanced accounting material that
is most frequently represented on the CPA exam; this text contains
the essential information on consolidations, multinational entities,
partnerships, and governmental and not-for-profit entities. Most
one-term courses are unable to cover all the topics included in a
traditional comprehensive advanced accounting text. In recognition
of time constraints, this text is structured to provide the most efficient
use of the time available, while maintaining all the learning support
and ancillary materials that cover these essential topics. For students
and instructors who would like to cover a wider set of topics, we invite
you to examine our comprehensive text, Advanced Accounting, which
is now in its ninth edition. The text is highly illustrated with complete
presentations of worksheets, schedules, and financial statements so
that students can see the development of each topic. Inclusion of all
recent FASB and GASB pronouncements and the continuing deliberations of the authoritative bodies provide a current and contemporary
text for students preparing for the CPA Examination and current
practice. The book’s building block approach introduces concepts with
simple examples and then gradually introduces complexity, allowing
students to easily keep pace with the material.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting and Connect Plus Accounting:
This edition will include Connect and Connect Plus to be available
for fall 2011.
Introductory Vignettes—Each chapter begins with a brief story of
a well-known company to illustrate why topics covered in that chapter
are relevant in current practice.
New FASB Codification—All authoritative citations to U.S. GAAP
include secondary citations to the new FASB codification. We maintain
the authoritative citations during this period of transition. The next
edition will transition completely to the FASB codification.
IFRS Comparisons—As the FASB and IASB work toward convergence to a single set of global accounting standards, the SEC is
debating the wholesale introduction of international financial reporting
standards (IFRS). Given the SEC’s February 2010 work plan, students need to prepare for the imminent transition to IFRS. The text
summarizes key differences between current U.S. GAAP and IFRS
to make students aware of changes that will likely occur if the SEC
adopts IFRS in the near future.
A Building-Block Approach to Consolidation—Virtually all advanced financial accounting classes cover consolidation at least to
some extent. While this topic is perhaps the most important to instructors, students frequently struggle to gain a firm grasp of consolidation
principles. The text introduces consolidation concepts and procedures
more gradually by beginning the discussion earlier in chapters 2 and 3.
Reorganization of Consolidation Elimination Entries—Consistent
with the building block approach to consolidation, the text organizes
the elimination entries used in consolidation to facilitate the elimination of the investment in a subsidiary in two steps: (1) first the book
value portion of the investment and income from the subsidiary are
eliminated and (2) then the differential portion of the investment and
income from subsidiary are eliminated with separate entries. This
approach facilitates the building-block approach in chapters 2-5. The
text also uses frequent illustrations to help students visualize the steps
in the elimination process.
Presentation of Intercompany Transactions— Intercompany
inventory transfers are presented before fixed-asset transfers. Inventory transfers are (1) far more common than fixed-asset transfers
and (2) easier for students to understand. The fully adjusted equity
method is presented in Chapters 6 and 7. This method links back to
the building-block approach in Chapters 2–5.
Instructor Resources—The authors have developed a set of
PowerPoint slides designed to do much more than simply summarize the topics in each chapter. They illustrate key concepts but also
include group exercises and practice quiz questions to give students
hands-on practice in class to better prepare them for future homework
and assessment experiences. Instructors benefit from proven interactive class discussions and exercises fully annotated by the authors.
Advanced Study Guide—The book introduces the most cutting
edge technology supplement ever delivered in the advanced accounting market. AdvancedStudyGuide.com is a product created exclusively
by the authors of the text which represents a new generation in study
resources available to students as well as a new direction and options
in the resources Instructors can use to help their students and elevate
their classroom experiences
CONTENTS
1 Intercorporate Acquisitions and Investments in Other Entities
2 Reporting Intercorporate Investments and Consolidation of Wholly
Owned Subsidiaries with No Differential
3 The Reporting Entity and Consolidation of Less-than-Wholly-Owned
Subsidiaries with No Differential
4 Consolidation of Wholly Owned Subsidiaries Acquired at More
than Book Value
5 Consolidation of Less-than-Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries Acquired
at More than Book Value
39
Accounting
6 Intercompany Inventory Transactions
7 Intercompany Transfers of Services and Noncurrent Assets
8 Multinational Accounting: Foreign Currency Transactions and
Financial Instruments
9 Multinational Accounting: Issues in Financial Reporting and Translation of Foreign Entity Statements
10 Partnerships: Formation, Operation, and Changes in Membership
11 Partnerships: Liquidation
12 Governmental Entities: Introduction and General Fund Accounting
13 Governmental Entities: Special Funds and Government-wide
Financial Statements
ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
Chapter 18: Governmental Entities: Special Funds and Governmentwide Financial Statements
Chapter 19: Not-for-Profit Entities
Chapter 20: Corporations in Financial Difficulty
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING
10th Edition
By Joe Ben Hoyle, University of Richmond, Thomas Schaefer, University
of Notre Dame and Timothy Doupnik, University of South Carolina
2011 (March 2010) / 928 pages
ISBN: 9780078136627
ISBN: 9780071327091 [IE]
9th Edition
By Richard E Baker, Northern Illinois University, Valdean C Lembke,
University of Iowa, Thomas E King, Southern Illinois University and
Cynthia Jeffrey, Iowa State University
2011 (December 2010) / 1120 pages
ISBN: 9780078110924
ISBN: 9780071289108 [IE]
The approach used by Hoyle, Schaefer, and Doupnik in the new edition allows students to think critically about accounting, just as they
will do while preparing for the CPA exam and in their future careers.
With this text, students gain a well-balanced appreciation of the
Accounting profession. As Hoyle 10e introduces them to the field’s
many aspects, it often focuses on past controversies and present
resolutions. The text continues to show the development of financial
reporting as a product of intense and considered debate that continues
today and into the future. The writing style of the nine previous editions has been highly praised. Students easily comprehend chapter
concepts because of the conversational tone used throughout the
book. The authors have made every effort to ensure that the writing
style remains engaging, lively, and consistent which has made this
text the market leading text in the Advanced Accounting market. The
Tenth Edition includes an increase integration of IFRS as well as the
updated accounting standards.
www.mhhe.com/baker9e
The Ninth Edition of Advanced Financial Accounting is an up-to-date,
comprehensive, and highly illustrated presentation of the accounting
and reporting principles and procedures used in a variety of business
entities. This edition continues to provide strong coverage of advanced
accounting topics, with clarity of presentation and integrated coverage
based on continuous case examples. The text is highly illustrated
with complete presentations of worksheets, schedules, and financial
statements so that students can see the development of each topic.
Inclusion of all recent FASB and GASB pronouncements and the
continuing deliberations of the authoritative bodies provide a current
and contemporary text for students preparing for the CPA Examination and current practice. This has become especially important given
the recent rapid pace of the authoritative bodies in dealing with major
issues having far-reaching The book’s building block approach introduces concepts with simple examples and then gradually introduces
complexity, allowing students to easily keep pace with the material.
The key strengths of this text are the clear and readable discussions
of concepts and the detailed demonstrations of concepts through illustrations and explanations. The many favorable responses to prior
editions from both students and instructors confirm our belief that
clear presentation and comprehensive illustrations are essential to
learning the sophisticated topics in an advanced accounting course.
Contents
Chapter 1: Intercorporate Acquisitions and Investments in Other
Entities
Chapter 2: Reporting Intercorporate Interests
Chapter 3: The Reporting Entity and Consolidated Financial Statements
Chapter 4: Consolidation of Wholly Owned Subsidiaries
Chapter 5: Consolidation of Less-Than-Wholly-Owen Subsidiaries
Chapter 6: Intercompany Transfers Noncurrent Assets
Chapter 7: Intercompany Inventory Transactions
Chapter 8: Intercompany Indebtedness
Chapter 9: Consolidation Ownership Issues
Chapter 10: Additional Consolidation Reporting Issues
Chapter 11: Multinational Accounting: Foreign Currency Transactions
and Financial Instruments
Chapter 12: Multinational Accounting: Translation of Foreign Entity
Statements
Chapter 13: Segment and Interim Reporting
Chapter 14: SEC Reporting
Chapter 15: Partnerships: Formation, Operation, and Changes in
Membership
Chapter 16: Partnerships: Liquidation
Chapter 17: Governmental Entities: Introduction and General Fund
Accounting
40
CONTENTS
1 The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments
2 Consolidation of Financial Information
3 Consolidations: Subsequent to the Date of the Acquisition
4 Consolidated Financial Statements and Outside Ownership
5 Consolidated Financial Statements: Intercompany Asset Transactions
6 Variable Interest Entities, Intercompany Debt, Consolidated Cash
Flows, and Other Issues
7 Consolidated Financial Statements: Ownership Patterns and
Income Taxes
8 Segment and Interim Reporting
9 Foreign Currency Transactions and Hedging Foreign Exchange Risk
10 Translation of Foreign Currency Financial Statements
11 Worldwide Accounting Diversity and International Standards
12 Financial Reporting and the Securities and Exchange Commission
13 Accounting for Legal Reorganizations and Liquidations
14 Partnerships: Formation and Operations
15 Partnerships: Termination and Liquidation
16 Accounting for State and Local Governments (Part I)
17 Accounting for State and Local Governments (Part II)
18 Accounting and Reporting for Private Not-for-Profit Organizations
19 Accounting for Estates and Trusts
Accounting
FUNDAMENTALS OF ADVANCED
ACCOUNTING
4th Edition
By Joe Ben Hoyle, University of Richmond, Thomas Schaefer, University
of Notre Dame and Timothy Doupnik, University of South Carolina
2011 (April 2010) / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780078136634
Fundamentals of Advanced Accounting, 4/e is ideal for those schools
wanting to cover 12 chapters in their advanced accounting course.
This brief yet concise text allows students to think critically about accounting, just as they will do preparing for the CPA exam. With this
text, students gain a well-balanced appreciation of the Accounting
profession. The text continues to show the development of financial
reporting as a product of intense and considered debate that continues today and into the future as it originates from Hoyle’s big text
Advanced Accounting. The writing style of the three previous editions
has been highly praised. Students easily comprehend chapter concepts because of the conversational tone used throughout the book.
The authors have made every effort to ensure that the writing style
remains engaging, lively, and consistent which has made Hoyle the
market leading franchise in the Advanced Accounting market. The
Fourth Edition includes an increase integration of IFRS as well as
the updated accounting standards.
CONTENTS
1 The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments
2 Consolidation of Financial Information
3 Consolidations: Subsequent to the Date of the Acquisition
4 Consolidated Financial Statements and Outside Ownership
5 Consolidated Financial Statements: Intercompany Asset Transactions
6 Variable Interest Entities, Intercompany Debt, Consolidated Cash
Flows, and Other Issues
7 Foreign Currency Transactions and Hedging Foreign Exchange Risk
8 Translation of Foreign Currency Financial Statements
9 Partnerships: Formation and Operations
10 Partnerships: Termination and Liquidation
11 Accounting for State and Local Governments (Part I)
12 Accounting for State and Local Governments (Part II)
NEW
*9780071312912*
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
2nd Edition
By Ng Eng Juan
2011 (August 2010) / 592 pages
ISBN: 9780071312912
Consolidated Financial Statements (Singapore) is a comprehensive
guide to the preparation of consolidated financial statements in Singapore. It discusses consolidated financial statements in the context
of the Singapore statutes and the Financial Reporting Standards
(FRS) issued by the Accounting Standards Council that are effective as at 1 July 2009. In this second edition, the book has been
updated for the new requirements of two new FRS, namely FRS 27
(2009) Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements and FRS
103 (2009) Business Combinations. The chapter arrangement in this
second edition is the same as that in the first edition, except for the
inclusion of the sections on Joint Ventures in Chapters 6 and 7. This
book is written based on many years of teaching, research and practical experience. It adopts a professional approach and is presented
in a step-by-step, easy-to-understand style. It contains more than 80
illustrative examples and numerous problems for self-study.
Topics Covered
Consolidated balance sheets (also referred to as consolidated
statements of financial position), consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity
and consolidated statement of cash flows
Changes in shareholding interests
Complex group structure
Investment in associates
Investment in joint ventures
Foreign subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
Consolidation theory
Merger accounting
CONTENTS
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the First Edition
About the Author
Table of Statutes, Accounting Institutions and Accounting Standards
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 What Are Consolidated Financial Statements?
1.2 Who Has to Present Consolidated Financial Statements?
1.3 Consolidation Procedures
1.4 Usefulness and Limitations of Consolidated Financial Statements
1.5 Approaches Adopted in This Book
Chapter 2 Consolidation at the Date of Acquisition
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Combination of Accounts
2.3 Fair Value Adjustments
2.4 Goodwill on Consolidation
2.5 Non-controlling Interest
2.6 Summary
Problems for Self-study 46
Chapter 3 Consolidation Subsequent to the Date of Acquisition
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 5
3.3 Pre-acquisition and Post-acquisition Reserves
3.4 Intragroup Account Balances
3.5 Unrealized Intragroup Profits and Losses
3.6 Intragroup Dividend
3.7 Other Consolidation Adjustments
3.8 New Rules for Non-Controlling Interest
3.9 Summary
Problems for Self-study
Chapter 4 Changes in Shareholding Interest and Other Specific
Issues
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Changes in Shareholding Interest
4.3 Other Specific Issues
4.4 Summary
Chapter 5 Complex Group Structure
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Father-son-grandson Structure
5.3 Connecting Affiliation Structure
5.4 Cross Holdings
5.5 Summary
Chapter 6 Associates and Joint Ventures
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Associate: Definition
6.3 Equity Accounting: Basic Principles
6.4 Difference between Cost and Underlying Net Assets
6.5 Transactions between Parent and Associate
6.6 Impairment Loss
6.7 Changes in Shareholding Interest
41
Accounting
6.8 Indirect Shareholding
6.9 Joint Ventures
6.10 Summary
Chapter 7 Foreign Subsidiaries, Associates and Joint Ventures
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Translation Process
7.3 Foreign Subsidiary
7.4 Foreign Associate
7.5 Foreign Joint Ventures
7.6 Summary
Chapter 8 Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Non-controlling interest
8.3 Associates
8.4 Acquisition of Subsidiary
8.5 Disposal of Subsidiary
8.6 Foreign Subsidiary and Associate
8.7 A Comprehensive Illustration
8.8 Summary
Appendix 8A: Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 9 Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Requirements of FRS 1
9.3 Consolidation Issues
9.4 Summary
Chapter 10 Further Issues
10.1 Introduction
10.2 Consolidation Theories
10.3 Pooling of Interests (Merger) Method
10.4 Summary
Index
Competencies Focuses on the requirements of accounting standards within the IAS and IFRS reporting framework and provides
in-depth coverage of how to apply them to complex settings.
Rigorous and comprehensive illustrations, explanations and
problem sets aimed at achieving high standards of professional
competencies demanded by accountancy bodies worldwide.
Analytical checks to allow for self-auditing of answers.
Contents
1 Economic Perspectives of Risk Reporting
2 Group Reporting I: Concepts and Context
3 Group Reporting II: Application of the Purchase Method under
IFRS 3
4 Group Reporting III: Consolidation under IAS 27
5 Group Reporting IV: Equity Accounting under IAS 28
6 Group Reporting V: Special Issues
7 Accounting for the Effect of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
8 Financial Instruments: Classification, Recognition and Measurement
9 Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging
10 Accounting for Taxes on Income
11 Earnings per Share
12 Share-based Payment
MODERN ADVANCED ACCOUNTING
10th Edition
By E. John Larsen, University of Southern California
2006 / 880 pages
ISBN: 9780073211596 (with OLC with Premium Content Card)
ISBN: 9780071244596 [IE with OLC and Premium Card]
www.mhhe.com/larsen10e
CONTENTS
ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
Updated Edition
By Pearl Tan and Peter Lee
2009 (March 2009) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780071269339
This book covers advanced level topics in financial reporting within the
International Accounting Standards (IAS) and International Financial
Reporting Standards (IFRS) reporting framework. While the book is
aimed at advanced level accounting degree students in tertiary institutions, it is a useful primer for practitioners who wish to reinforce their
knowledge of rapidly changing accounting standards. (Note: There
is a new section on permissible reclassification of financial assets.
In the wake of the global financial crisis, the IASB in October 2008
permitted limited reclassifications from fair value through profit or loss
to align IAS 39 with US GAAP).
Features
Inclusion of the most recent amendments to existing standards
including the revised IFRS 3 (2008) and revised IAS 27 (2008).
Coverage of complex topics: business combinations, consolidation, equity accounting, translation of foreign transactions and foreign
operations, financial instruments, share-based payments, earnings
per share, deferred taxation and risk reporting disclosures.
Application of the three “Cs” of sound accounting pedagogy:
Concepts Principles-based to enhance students’ conceptual understanding of the underlying rationale of accounting requirements.
Context Emphasizes the importance of understanding the economics of and motivations for the specific transactions that are
the subject of accounting rules.
42
Chapter One. Ethical Issues in Advanced Accounting
Chapter Two. Partnerships: Organization and Operation
Chapter Three. Partnership Liquidation and Incorporation; Joint
Ventures
Chapter Four. Accounting for Branches; Combined Financial Statements
Chapter Five. Business Combinations
Chapter Six. Consolidated Financial Statements: On Date of Business Combination
Chapter Seven. Consolidated Financial Statements: Subsequent to
Date of Business Combination
Chapter Eight. Consolidated Financial Statements: Intercompany
Transactions
Chapter Nine. Consolidated Financial Statements: Income Taxes,
Cash Flows, and Installment Acquisitions
Chapter Ten. Consolidated Financial Statements: Special Programs
Chapter Eleven. International Accounting Standards; Accounting for
Foreign Currency Transactions
Chapter Twelve. Translation of Foreign Currency Financial Statements
Chapter Thirteen. Reporting for Components; Interim Reports; Reporting for SEC
Chapter Fourteen. Bankruptcy: Liquidation and Reorganization
Chapter Fifteen. Estates and Trusts
Chapter Sixteen. Nonprofit Organizations
Chapter Seventeen. Governmental Entities: General Fund
Chapter Eighteen. Governmental Entities: Other Governmental Funds
and Account Groups
Chapter Nineteen. Governmental Entities: Proprietary Funds, Fiduciary Funds, and Comprehensive Annual Financial Report
Accounting
ACCOUNTING FOR DERIVATIVES AND
HEDGING
By Mark Trombley, University of Arizona
2003 / 240 pages
ISBN: 9780072440447 ISBN: 9780071199209 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/trombley
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Hedging.
2. Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging.
3. Interest Rate Swaps.
4. Interest Rate Futures and Options.
5. Foreign Currency Derivatives and Hedging.
6. Additional Topics.
Auditing
NEW
*9780078025440*
AUDITING & ASSURANCE
SERVICES
5th Edition
By Timothy J Louwers, James Madison University, Robert J Ramsay, University of KentuckyLexington, David Sinason, Northern Illinois
University and Jerry R Strawser, Texas A&M
University-College Station
2013 (January 2012) / 896 pages
ISBN: 9780078025440
ISBN: 9780071318143 [IE]
NEW
*9780077520151*
AUDITING & ASSURANCE
SERVICES
8th Edition
By William F Messier, Georgia State University
and Steven M Glover, Douglas F Prawitt of
Brigham Young University-Provo
The authors believe students are best served by acquiring a strong
understanding of the basic concepts that underlie the audit process
and how to apply those concepts to various audit and assurance
services. The primary purpose for an auditing text is not to serve as
a reference manual but to facilitate student learning, and this text
is written accordingly. The text is accessible to students through
straightforward writing and the use of engaging, relevant real-world
examples, illustrations, and analogies. The text explicitly encourages
students to think through fundamental concepts and to avoid trying
to learn auditing through rote memorization. Students are prompted
by the text to “stop and think,” at important points in the text, in order
to help them apply the principles covered. The text continues to
take a systematic approach to the audit process by first introducing
the three underlying concepts: audit risk, materiality, and evidence.
This is followed by a discussion of audit planning, the assessment
of control risk, and a discussion of the nature, timing, and extent of
evidence necessary to reach the appropriate level of detection risk.
These concepts are then applied to each major business process and
related account balances using a risk-based approach. In covering
these important concepts and their applications, the book focuses
on critical judgments and decision-making processes followed by
auditors. Much of auditing practice involves the application of auditor
judgment. If a student understands these basic concepts and how to
apply them to an audit engagement, he or she will be more effective
in today’s dynamic audit environment.
Contents
Part 1 Introduction to Assurance and Financial Statement Auditing
Chapter 1 An Introduction to Assurance and Financial Statement
Auditing
Chapter 2 The Financial Statement Auditing Environment
Part 2 Audit Planning and Basic Auditing Concepts
Chapter 3 Audit Planning, Types of Audit Tests, and Materiality
Chapter 4 Risk Assessment
Chapter 5 Evidence and Documentation
Part 3 Understanding and Auditing Internal Control
Chapter 6 Internal Control in a Financial Statement Audit
Chapter 7 Auditing Internal Control over Financial Reporting
Part 4 Statistical and Nonstatistical Sampling Tools for Auditing
Chapter 8 Audit Sampling: An Overview and Application to Tests of
Controls
Chapter 9 Audit Sampling: An Application to Substantive Tests of
Account Balances
Part 5 Auditing Business Processes
Chapter 10 Auditing the Revenue Process
Chapter 11 Auditing the Purchasing Process
Chapter 12 Auditing the Human Resource Management Process
Chapter 13 Auditing the Inventory Management Process
Chapter 14 Auditing the Financing/Investing Process: Prepaid Expenses, Intangible Assets, and Property, Plant, and Equipment
Chapter 15 Auditing the Financing/Investing Process: Long-Term
Liabilities, Stockholders’ Equity, and Income Statement Accounts
Chapter 16 Auditing the Financing/Investing Process: Cash and
Investments
Part 6 Completing the Audit and Reporting Responsiblities
Chapter 17 Completing the Audit Engagement
Chapter 18 Reports on Audited Financial Statements
Part 7 Professional Responsibilities
Chapter 19 Professsional Conduct, Independence, and Quality Control
Chapter 20 Legal Liability
Part 8 Assurance, Attestation, and Internal Auditing Services
Chapter 21 Assurance, Attestation, amd Internal Auditing Services
Professional Judgement Module (avaliable online on the text website
www.mhhe.com/messier8e)
Index
2012 (September 2011)
ISBN: 9780077520151 (with ACL Software CD)
www.mhhe.com/messier8e
43
Accounting
NEW
*9780073404004*
AUDITING AND ASSURANCE
SERVICES
An Applied Approach
By Iris Stuart, California State University-Fullerton
ISBN: 9780073404004
ISBN: 9780071317160 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/stuart1e
Stuart’s Auditing and Assurance Services: An Applied Approach is a
concise, easy-to-read auditing text that trains students of today for the
business world that they will face tomorrow. Using a fresh approach
that introduces auditing application prior to auditing theory, students
will encounter auditing in practice first, become more engaged in
the subject matter, and consequently feel more readily prepared to
understand the more challenging theoretical concepts. Stuart further
engages students by highlighting real-world accounting scandals and
by including the most up-to-date standards, including international
coverage.
Most chapters begin with an overview to set the stage. All chapters
end with a takeaway summary of key points. Stuart’s writing style is
conversational and easy to read.
Exhibits
Many exhibits are highlighted throughout the text to call attention to
key points.
Contents
Chapter 1 What Is Auditing?
Chapter 2 The Audit Planning Process: Understanding the Risk of
Material Misstatement
Chapter 3 Internal Controls
Appendix A: Information Systems Auditing
Chapter 4 Auditing the Revenue Business Process
Appendix A: BCS Private Ltd.
Appendix B: BCS Private Ltd.
Chapter 5 Audit Evidence and the Auditor’s Responsibility for Fraud
Detection
Chapter 6 Auditing the Acquisition and Expenditure Business Process
Chapter 7 Auditing the Inventory Business Process
Chapter 8 Audit Sampling: Tests of Internal Controls
Chapter 9 Audit Sampling: Substantive Tests of Details
Chapter 10 Cash and Investment Business Processes
Chapter 11 Long-Term Debt and Owner’s Equity Business Process
Chapter 12 Completing the Audit
Chapter 13 Audit Reports
Chapter 14 The Auditing Profession
GLOSSARY
Features
Unique Topical Organization
Most auditing books are organized with the first half covering theory
and the second half covering how to audit an accounting cycle.
Stuart, however, introduces the applications of auditing before the
theoretical details and, in doing so, this text helps to retain student
interest, understanding, and motivation in a traditionally dry and difficult subject area.
Non-Traditional Treatment of Sampling Chapters
The concepts of sampling, sampling and non-sampling risk, and
statistical and non-statistical sampling have been retained, but the
sampling plans for internal control testing and substantive testing have
been written to expose students to sampling issues that they actually
will face in an audit. To further enhance this element, standardized
worksheets and written examples collaborated on with the “Big Four”
CPA firms have been utilized to give students the most accurate realworld experiences possible.
High Quality End-of-Chapter Assignment Material
The end-of-chapter assignment material includes Review Questions,
Multiple Choice Questions from CPA Examinations, Discussion
Questions and Research Problems, Real-World Auditing Problems,
and Internet Assignments, all tied to the respective chapter’s key
learning objectives.
Current and Comprehensive Standards
Stuart begins each chapter by noting the relevant standards from
the following sets: auditing standards for private companies, auditing
standards for public companies, and international standards.
“Did You Know?” Features
This pedagogical feature highlights real-world accounting scandals
to further engage students in ethical dilemmas and connect theory
to practice. After each source document, Stuart asks the students
a relevant critical thinking question. The feature is integrated within
the text so that students do not assume it is unimportant and skips it.
Chapter Overview and Chapter Takeaways
44
NEW
*9780077486273*
PRINCIPLES OF AUDITING
AND OTHER ASSURANCE
SERVICES
18th Edition
By Ray Whittington, DePaul University/McGowan Center, Kurt Pany, Arizona State UniversityTempe
2012 (March 2011) / 864 pages
ISBN: 9780077486273 (with ACL Software CD)
ISBN: 9780071317139 [IE with ACL Software CD]
www.mhhe.com/whittington18e
Whittington/Pany is our market leader in the auditing discipline. While
most textbooks use a cycles approach, Whittington/Pany enlists a
balance sheet approach – making it particularly straightforward and
user-friendly in addressing the auditing profession’s risk-based approach for financial statement audits as well as for integrated audits of
financial statements and internal control. The 18th edition covers the
latest auditing standards to meet the needs of the current marketplace.
The authors are well connected – both Ray Whittington and Kurt Pany
served as members of the Audit Standards Board, and Whittington
recently completed his term as President of the Auditing Section of
the American Accounting Association.
New to this edition
The 18th edition has been thoroughly revised to reflect two very
major changes in auditing:
1) The AICPA’s “clarity project” which has resulted in complete revi-
Accounting
sion and recodification of the Auditing Standards Board’s standards
(1) to make standards easier to read, understand, and apply, and
(2) to converge those standards with the International Standards of
Auditing to the extent considered desirable. Almost all outstanding
Statements on Auditing Standard were revised, with an effective date
for audits of periods ending after December 15, 2012.
2) Modification of the CPA exam’s Auditing and Attestation section
content, including elimination of 2 “long” simulations on each exam
and replacement with 6-7 shorter, completely objective form simulations.
Modifications to Reflect Changes in the Auditing Standards:
The broad scope of the clarity project has resulted in changes to
each chapter--some relatively minor, but others very major. Among
the most major clarity project changes are:
Chapter 2: Professional Standards This chapter is rewritten to
reflect the Auditing Standards Board’s elimination of the longstanding “ten generally accepted auditing standards”--that is, the three
general standards, three field work standards, and the four reporting
standards. For purposes of AICPA professional standard coverage
the chapter now discusses in detail the new Principles Underlying
an Audit Conducted in Accordance with Generally Accepted Auditing
Standards that replaced the ten standards. Yet, because the PCAOB
standards continue to be structured about the ten standards, those
standards remain in place for public company audits and are also
discussed in the chapter. In addition, coverage includes presentation
of the new “standard” audit report and modified reports. An appendix
has been added to this chapter to compare major differences between
international and US standards.
Chapter 17: Auditors’ Reports. Changes in AICPA terminology
reflected here better align U.S. GAAS with international standards.
For example, an unqualified report is now an unmodified report; an
explanatory paragraph is now an emphasis of matter, an other matter
paragraph or a basis for modification paragraph; an audit involving
other auditors is now a group audit. But there have also been many
other changes, including changes in the standard audit report’s
wording and changes in requirements in a number of areas in which
a report other than “standard” is issued.
Chapter 19: Additional Assurance Services: Historical financial
Information. The clarity standards, following the international standard
approach, use the term “financial reporting framework” to represent
the standards used to prepare historical financial information. In
essence the “financial reporting framework” becomes the “suitable
criteria” for historical financial information. This results in a number
of changes relating to this chapter, including elimination of “special
reports” and replacement with “special purpose financial reporting
frameworks.”
of every chapter now include other objective format questions. A
number of these are “simulation” questions that meet the new criteria
for CPA exam inclusion. Others are brief, and yet consistent with the
new simulation approach. In addition, every chapter of the instructor’s
test bank now includes one or more other objective format questions.
The clarity modifications presented force the CPA exam to update its questions to reflect new terminology and requirements. We
have revised the text and instructor test bank questions to reflect
these changes.
Connect Accounting and Connect Plus Accounting – new to this
edition! Includes end-of-chapter, study guide, and test bank material.
Contents
1. The Role of the Public Accountant in the American Economy
2. Professional Standards
Appendix A International and U.S. Standards Comparison
3. Professional Ethics
4. Legal Liability of CPAs
5. Audit Evidence and Documentation
6. Planning the Audit; Linking Audit Procedures to Risk
Appendix A Selected Internet Addresses
Appendix B Examples of Fraud Risk Factors
Appendix C Illustrative Audit Case
7. Internal Control
Appendix A Antifraud Programs and Control Measures
8. Consideration of Internal Control in an Information Technology
Environment
9. Audit Sampling
Appendix A Probability-Proportion-to-Size Sampling
Appendix B Audit Risk
10. Cash and Financial Investments
11. Accounts Receivable, Notes Receivable, and Revenue
Appendix A Illustrative Audit Case
Appendix B Illustrative Audit Case
12. Inventories and Cost of Goods Sold
13. Property, Plant, and Equipment: Depreciation and Depletion
14. Accounts Payable and Other Liabilities
Appendix A Illustrative Audit Cases
15. Debt and Equity Capital
16. Auditing Operations and Completing the Audit
17. Auditors’ Report
18. Integrated Audits of Public Companies
19. Additional Assurance Services: Historical Financial Information
20. Additional Assurance Services: Other Information
21. Internal, Operational, and Compliance Auditing
In addition, two other key changes include:
Chapter 19: Additional Assurance Services: Historical financial
Information. In addition to the Chapter 19 clarity changes, modification
of compilation and review standards are reflected in the chapter. This
area is of particular importance to students who plan to take the CPA
exam as the new content specification outline shows that the degree
of coverage of this area is significant.
Chapter 20: Additional Assurance Services: Other Information is
rewritten to reflect the fact that the nature of these other services is
evolving as at this point some services seem to have gained a degree
of market acceptance (e.g., SysTrust, PrimePlus/Elder Care) while
others have not (e.g., WebTrust). Additional new products such as
providing assurance relating to XBRL are discussed.
Modifications to reflect CPA Exam Question Format Changes:
The CPA exam’s coverage of shorter simulations has resulted in
the replacement of the “long” simulations in the text with a variety of
shorter objective questions. We entitle them “other objective format
questions” in that they are “objective,” yet in general not structured
completely as multiple choice questions. The questions in the back
45
Accounting
AUDITING & ASSURANCE SERVICES
4th Edition
By Timothy J Louwers, James Madison University, Robert J Ramsay,
University of Kentucky-Lexington, David Sinason, Northern Illinois University and Jerry R Strawser, Texas A&M University-College Station
2011 (January 2010) / 864 pages
ISBN: 9780077396572 (with ACL Software)
ISBN: 9780071326025 [IE with ACL Software]
www.mhhe.com/louwers4e
The fourth edition of Auditing & Assurance Services is the most upto-date auditing text on the market. All chapters and modules in the
fourth edition have been revised to incorporate professional standards
through SAS 116, AS7, international standards of auditing (ISAs), and
unnumbered standards adopted through July 2009. New terminology
from the AICPA’s Clarity Project has been incorporated throughout
the book. In addition, all chapters include new problems, Kaplan
CPA Review simulations, and comprehensive case questions. Fraud
awareness, a thorough understanding of internal controls, and the
ability to use technology effectively are the hallmarks of a successful
auditor in business today. With Auditing & Assurance Services, 4th
edition , students are prepared to take on auditing’s latest challenges.
As a leader in fraud coverage, it is accompanied by the Apollo Shoes
Case, the only standalone FRAUD audit case on the market (available
online on the book’s OLC). The text is also designed to provide flexibility for instructors; the twelve chapters focus on the auditing process
while the eight modules provide additional topics that can be taught
at the instructor’s discretion without interrupting the flow of the text.
Contents
Part I: The Contemporary Auditing Environment
Chapter 1: Auditing and Assurance Services
Chapter 2: Professional Standards
Chapter 3: Management Fraud and Audit Risk
Part II: The Financial Statement Audit
Chapter 4: Engagement Planning
Chapter 5: Risk Assessment: Internal Control Evaluation
Chapter 6: Employee Fraud and the audit of Cash
Appendix 6A Internal Control Questionnaires
Appendix 6B Audit Plan Questionnaires
Chapter 7: Revenue and Collection Cycle
Fraud Cases: Extended Audit Procedures (SAS 99)
Appendix 7B Audit Plan
Chapter 8: Acquisition and Expenditure Cycle
Fraud Case(s): Extended Audit Procedures (SAS 99)
Appendix 8B Audit Plans
Appendix 8B The Payroll Cycle
Chapter 9: Production Cycle
Fraud Case: Extended Audit Procedures (SAS 99)
Appendix 9B Audit Plans
Chapter 10: Finance and Investment Cycle
Fraud Case: Extended Audit Procedures (SAS 99)
Appendix 10B Substantive Audit Plans
Chapter 11: Completing the Audit
Chapter 12: Reports on Audited Financial Statements
Part III: Other Topics
Module A: Other Public Accounting Services
Module B: Professional Ethics
Module C: Legal Liability
Module D: Internal, Governmental, and Fraud Audits
Module E: Overview of Sampling
Module F: Attribute Sampling
Module G: Variables Sampling
Module H: Information Systems Auditing
Comprehensive Cases
Andersen: An Obstruction of Justice?
46
PTL Club—The Harbinger of Things to Come?
GM: Running on Empty?
Unhealthy Accounting at HealthSouth
KPMG: How Many Firms?
Something Went Sour at Parmalat
GE: How Much Are Auditors Paid?
Saytam Computer Services, Ltd.—India’s Enron
ETHICAL OBLIGATIONS AND DECISIONMAKING IN ACCOUNTING
Text and Cases, 2nd Edition
By Steven M Mintz, Claremont McKenna College and Roselyn Morris,
Texas State University-San Marcos
2011 (October 2010) / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780078025280
www.mhhe.com/mintz2e
The overriding philosophy of this text is that the ethical obligations
of accountants and auditors are best understood in the context of
professional responsibilities including one’s role in the corporate
governance system, the requirements of financial reporting, the audit
function, obligations to prevent and detect fraud, and legal liabilities.
Ethical Obligations and Decision Making in Accounting was written
to guide accountants past a scandal filled age. Our book is entirely
devoted to helping students cultivate the ethical commitment needed
to ensure that their work meets the highest standards of integrity,
independence, and objectivity. Ethical Obligations and Decision Making in Accounting is designed to provide the instructor with the best
flexibility and pedagogical effectiveness of any book on the market.
To that end, it includes numerous features designed to make both
learning and teaching easier.
Contents
Chapter 1 – Ethical Reasoning: Implications for Accounting
Chapter 2 – Accountants’ Ethical Decision Process and Professional
Judgment
Chapter 3 – Corporate Governance and Ethical Management
Chapter 4 – AICPA Code of Professional Conduct
Chapter 5 – Audit Responsibilities and Accounting Fraud
Chapter 6 – Legal and Regulatory Obligations in an Ethical Framework
Chapter 7 – Earnings Management and the Quality of Financial
Reporting
Chapter 8 – International Financial Reporting: Ethics and Corporate
Governance Considerations
Major Cases
AUDITING AFTER SARBANES-OXLEY
3rd Edition
By Jay C Thibodeau, Bentley College and Deborah Freier
2011 (March 2010) / 288 pages
ISBN: 9780078110818
www.mhhe.com/thibodeau3e
The approach used by Thibodeau and Freier emphasizes the substantial benefits of using real-life case examples in helping to impart
knowledge related to the practice of auditing. This type of approach
has long been acknowledged as a superior manner in which to teach.
Since the authors present the concepts of auditing using actual
corporate contexts, they seek to provided students with a real-life
appreciation of these issues and clearly demonstrate the value of the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the post-Sarbanes technical audit
guidance. The Third Edition has been updated to reflect all of the
major changes happening in today’s society with actual companies
such as Enron, WorldCom, Qwest, Sunbeam, that have become
synonymous with the capital markets’ crisis in confidence. With 45
different short cases, instructors can assign 8 to 9 different cases for
each of four different semesters.
Accounting
Contents
Section 1 Fraud Cases: Violations of Accounting Principles
Case 1.1 Waste Management: The Matching Principle
Case 1.2 WorldCom: The Revenue Recognition Principle
Case 1.3 Qwest: The Full Disclosure Principle
Case 1.4 Sunbeam: The Revenue Recognition Principle
Case 1.5 Waste Management: The Definition of an Asset
Case 1.6 Enron: The Revenue Recognition Principle
Case 1.7 WorldCom: The Matching Principle
Case 1.8 The Fund of Funds: The Conservatism Constraint
Case 1.9 Qwest: The Revenue Recognition Principle
Case 1.10 The Baptist Foundation of Arizona: The Conservatism
Constraint
Case 1.11 WorldCom: The Definition of an Asset
Section 2 Ethics and Professional Responsibility Cases
Case 2.1 Enron: Independence
Case 2.2 Waste Management: Due Care
Case 2.3 WorldCom: Professional Responsibility
Case 2.4 Enron: Quality Assurance
Case 2.5 Sunbeam: Due Care
Case 2.6 The Fund of Funds: Independence
Case 2.7 Bernard L. Madoff Investment and Securities: A Focus on
Auditors’ Legal Liability and Due Care
Case 2.8 Enron: Audit Documentation
Section 3 Fraud and Inherent Risk Assessment Cases
Case 3.1 Enron: Understanding the Client’s Business and Industry
Case 3.2 The Baptist Foundation of Arizona: Related Party Transactions
Case 3.3 WorldCom: Significant Business Acquisitions
Case 3.4 Sunbeam: Incentives and Pressure to Commit Fraud
Case 3.5 Qwest: Understanding the Client’s Business and Industry
Case 3.6 The Fund of Funds: Related Party Transactions
Case 3.7 Waste Management: Understanding the Client’s Business
and Industry
Section 4 Internal Control Systems: Entity-Level Control Cases
Case 4.1 Enron: The Control Environment
Case 4.2 Waste Management: General Computing Controls
Case 4.3 The Baptist Foundation of Arizona: The Whistleblower
Hotline
Case 4.4 WorldCom: The Internal Audit Function
Case 4.5 Waste Management: Top-Side Adjusting Journal Entries
Section 5 Internal Control Systems: Control Activity
Case 5.1 The Fund of Funds: Valuation of Investments
Case 5.2 Enron: Presentation and Disclosure of Special-Purpose
Entities
Case 5.3 Sunbeam: Completeness of the Restructuring Reserve
Case 5.4 Qwest: Occurrence of Revenue
Case 5.5 The Baptist Foundation of Arizona: Presentation and Disclosure of Related Parties
Case 5.6 Waste Management: Valuation of Fixed Assets
Case 5.7 Qwest: Occurrence of Revenue
Appendix Company Cases
Case A.1 Enron
Case A.2 Waste Management
Case A.3 WorldCom
Case A.4 Sunbeam
Case A.5 Qwest
Case A.6 The Baptist Foundation of Arizona
Case A.7 The Fund of Funds
UK Adaptation
AUDITING & ASSURANCE SERVICES
2nd Edition
By Aasmund Eilifsen, Norwegian Sch of Economics & Business Administration, William F Messier, University of Nevada Las Vegas, Steven M
Glover and Douglas F Prawitt of Brigham Young University-Provo
2009 / 720 pages
ISBN: 9780077122508
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/eilifsen
Auditing & Assurance Services, Second International Edition combines a genuine international perspective and relevant international
regulatory requirements with a conceptual and systematic approach
to auditing. This fully up-to-date textbook provides students with the
most current concepts of auditing and professional requirements.
Contents
PART I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL STATEMENT AUDITING
Chapter 1: An Introduction to Assurance and Financial Statement
Auditing
Chapter 2: The Financial Statement Auditing Environment
PART II BASIC AUDITING CONCEPTS: RISK ASSESSMENT, MATERIALITY, AND EVIDENCE
Chapter 3: Risk Assessment and Materiality
Chapter 4: Audit Evidence and Audit Documentation
PART III PLANNING THE AUDIT AND INTERNAL CONTROL
Chapter 5: Audit Planning and Types of Audit Tests
Chapter 6: Internal Control in a Financial Statement Audit
Chapter 7: Auditing Internal Control over Financial Reporting
PART IV STATISTICAL AND NON-STATISTICAL SAMPLING TOOLS
FOR AUDITING
Chapter 8: Audit Sampling: An Overview and Application to Tests of
Controls
Chapter 9: Audit Sampling: An Application to Substantive Tests of
Account Balances
PART V AUDITING BUSINESS PROCESSES
Chapter 10: Auditing the Revenue Process
Chapter 11: Auditing the Purchasing Process
Chapter 12: Auditing the Human Resource Management Process
Chapter 13: Auditing the Inventory Management Process
Chapter 14: Auditing Financing Process: Prepaid Expenses and
Property, Plant and Equipment
Chapter 15: Auditing Financing Process: Long Term Liabilities, Stockholders’ Equity and Income Statement Accounts
Chapter 16: Auditing Financing Process :Cash and Investments
PART VI COMPLETING THE AUDIT AND REPORTING RESPONSIBILITIES
Chapter 17: Completing the Engagement
Chapter 18: Reports on Audited Financial Statements
PART VII PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES
Chapter 19: Professional Ethics, Independence and Quality Control
PART VIII ASSURANCE, RELATED SERVICES AND INTERNAL
AUDITING SERVICES
Chapter 20: Assurance, Related Services and Internal Auditing
47
Accounting
AUDITING AND ASSURANCE SERVICES IN
AUSTRALIA
4th Edition
By Grant Gay, Monash University and Roger Simnett, University of New
South Wales
2009
ISBN: 9780070286740
www.mhhe.com/au/gay4e
Auditing & Assurance Services takes a business risk approach -the
standard in audit practice that has been incorporated into both national and international auditing standards over the past five years.
Students are provided with a solid theoretical grounding in all aspects
of auditing, as well as insight into current challenges of the profession.
With a reputation built over several editions for timely, comprehensive
and accurate incorporation of auditing standards this edition continues the trend. The 4e is current with the revised Australian Auditing
Standards arising from the Clarity Project and enforceable from 1
January 2010. Instructors can have confidence that students have
the advantage of being exposed to the framework that auditing firms
will be operating in from 2010.
Ethics and the International Standards for the Professional Practice
of Internal Auditing) and the Strongly Recommended Guidance (such
as the Position Papers, Practice Advisories and Practice Guides).
The book is a joint effort of academicians from Universiti Teknologi
MARA, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Universiti Malaysia Trengganu and
practitioners in internal auditing. The authors recognize that there is
a need for more local and affordable books on internal auditing. In
this regard, the authors hope that their concerted efforts in writing
this book would contribute to promoting the significance of internal
auditing and also encourage continuous professional development in
this area. The authors also feel that they should share their knowledge
and experience on internal auditing to meet the motto of The Institute
of Internal Auditors, “Progress Through Sharing”.
Auditing Practice Cases Contents
Part 1 The Auditing And Assurance Services Profession
Ch 1. Assurance & auditing: an overview
Ch 2. The structure of the profession
Ch 3. Ethics, independence and corporate governance
Ch 4. The legal liability of auditors
Part 2 Planning And Risk
Ch 5. Overview of elements of the financial report audit
process
Ch 6. Planning, understanding the entity and evaluating
business risk
Ch 7. Assessing specific business risks and materiality
Ch 8. Understanding and assessing internal control
Part 3 Tests Of Control And Tests Of Details
Ch 9. Tests of controls
Ch 10. Substantive tests of transactions and balances
Ch 11. Audit sampling
Part 4 Completion And Communication
Ch 12. Completion and review
Ch 13. The auditor’s reporting obligations
Part 5 Other Assurance Services
Ch 14. Internal auditing
Ch 15. Audit and assurance services in the public sector
Ch 16. Other assurance services and advanced topics
PEACH BLOSSOM COLOGNE COMPANY
4th Edition
By Jack W. Paul, Lehigh University
ISBN: 9780073276595 (with CD)
ISBN: 9780071259828 [IE with CD]
Contents
I. General Instructions and Preparations.
II. Permanent File Materials.
1. History and Background.
2. Organizational Structure.
3. Internal Control.
4. Chart of Accounts.
5. Minutes of Board of Directors’ Meetings.
III. Problem Assignments.
Assignment #1: Planning the Integrated Audit. Assignment #2: Cash.
Assignment #3: Accounts Receivable and Credit Sales. Assignment #4: Inventory and Purchases. Assignment #5: Property, Plant,
and Equipment (Fixed Assets). Assignment #6: Accounts Payable
Processing and Unrecorded Liabilities. Assignment #7: Notes Payable
and Accrued Interest. Assignment #8: Completing the Audit.
IV. Current Year’s Working Trial Balance.
V. Prior Year’s Working Papers.
PRINCIPLES AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES
IN INTERNAL AUDITING
By Puan Sri Datin Dr Mary Lee, Dr Hasnah Haji Haron, Dr Ishak Ismail,
Dr Mohd. Hassan Che Haat, Norlela Zaini, Tong Seuk Ying, Lok Char
Lee and Mohd, Farook Nasar
2009 (June 2009) / 356 pages
ISBN: 9789833850679
This book provides readers with an overview of the latest developments and various contemporary and contentious issues in internal
auditing. It gives a good understanding on the role and responsibilities
of an internal auditor as one of the governance partners and valueadders in an organization. It highlights the importance of the internal
auditing function in risk management, controls and governance. With
the latest amendments issued under Para 15.18 of Bursa Malaysia’s
(Amended) Listing Requirements on 31 January, 2008, mandating
internal audit function for all public-listed companies, there is a need
for greater understanding of the internal audit function as one of the
means of safeguarding shareholders’ interests. This book also incorporates the new IIA’s International Professional Practices Framework
(IPPF) which includes the Mandatory Guidance (such as the Code of
48
Accounting
APPLE BLOSSOM COLOGNE COMPANY:
AUDIT CASE
5th Edition
By Jack Paul, Lehigh University
2003
ISBN: 9780072844504 (with CD-ROM)
ISBN: 9780071244886 [IE with CD-ROM]
Chapter 9) Absorption cost system
Chapter 10) Criticisms of absorption cost systems: Incentives to
overproduce
Chapter 11) Criticisms of absorption cost systems: Inaccurate product
costs
Chapter 12) Standard costs: Direct labor and materials
Chapter 13) Overhead and marketing variances
Chapter 14) Management accounting in a changing environment
www.mhhe.com/appleblossom
CONTENTS
1) Audit Planning and Integration of the Accounting Process
2) Accounts Receivable and Credit Sales
3) Cash
4) Inventory and Purchases
5) Prepaid Expenses
6) Investments in Securities
7) Property, Plant, and Equipment
8) Accounts Payable Processing and Unrecorded Liabilities
9) Payroll Processing and Accrued Liabilities
10) Notes Payable and Accrued Interest
11) Capital Stock and Retained Earnings
12) Completing the Audit
Advanced Managerial Accounting
Undergraduate Taxation
NEW
*9780078025488*
PRINCIPLES OF TAXATION FOR BUSINESS
AND INVESTMENT PLANNING
2013 Edition, 16th Edition
By Sally Jones, University of Virginia and Shelley C Rhoades-Catanach,
Villanova University
2013 (April 2012) / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780078025488
NEW
*9780077434045*
TAXATION OF BUSINESS ENtities
accounting for decision-making and
control
7th Edition
By Jerold Zimmerman, University of Roch
2011 (January 2010) / 608 pages
ISBN: 9780078136726
ISBN: 9780071289641 [IE]
By Brian Spilker, Brigham Young Univesity, Benjamin C Ayers, University of Georgia, John Robinson, University of Texas at Austin, Edmund
Outslay, Michigan State University, Ronald G Worsham and John A
Barrick of Brigham Young university and Constance Weaver, Texas A&M
University
2013 (April 2012) / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780077434045
www.mhhe.com/zimmerman7e
Accounting for Decision Making and Control provides students and
managers with an understanding appreciation of the strengths and
limitations of an organization’s accounting system. This book provides
a framework for thinking about accounting systems and a basis for
analyzing proposed changes to these systems. The Seventh Edition
demonstrates that managerial accounting is an integral part of the
firm’s organizational architecture, not just an isolated set of computational topics. The purpose of this text is to provide students and
managers with an understanding and appreciation of the strengths
and limitations of an organization’s accounting system, thereby allowing them to be more intelligent users of these systems. The main purpose proposed by the author remains in tact for the Seventh Edition.
Contents
Chapter 1) Introduction
Chapter 2) The nature of costs
Chapter 3) Opportunity cost of capital and capital budgeting
Chapter 4) Organizational architecture
Chapter 5) Responsibility accounting and transfer pricing
Chapter 6) Budgeting
Chapter 7) Cost allocation: Theory
Chapter 8) Cost allocation: Practices
NEW
*9780077434113*
McGraw-Hill’s TAXATION OF
INDIVIDUALS
University
2013 (April 2012) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780077434113
49
Accounting
NEW
*9780078025464*
individuals and BUSINESS ENtities
University
2013 (April 2012) / 1216 pages
ISBN: 9780078025464
NEW
*9780078025471*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
TAXATION
By Ana M Cruz, Miami-Dade College, Mike
Deschamps, Miracosta College, Frederick
Niswander, East Carolina University, Debra
Prendergast, Northwestern Business College,
Dan Schisler, East Carolina University and
Jinhee Trone, Santa Ana College
ISBN: 9780078025471
ISBN: 9780077599058 (with Taxation Software)
This book is designed to not only expose beginning tax students to tax
law, but to also teach the practical intricacies involved in preparation
of a tax return. Emphasizing a hands-on approach to tax education,
every concept introduced in the text includes meaningful exercises
that allow students to reinforce what they are learning. Actual tax forms
are included within the text, with real-world data inserted into actual
tax forms to demonstrate applied skills. A copy of the individual tax
return preparation software TaxACT is also a part of the text package,
providing yet another tool to bridge the gap between understanding
and practical application of tax law.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Taxation, the Income Tax Formula, and
Form 1040EZ
Chapter 2: Expanded Tax Formula, Forms 1040 and 1040A, and
Basic Concepts
Chapter 3: Gross Income: Inclusions and Exclusions
Chapter 4: Adjustments for Adjusted Gross Income
Chapter 5: Itemized Deductions
Chapter 6: Self-Employed Business Income
Chapter 7: Capital Gains and Other Sales of Property
Chapter 8: Rental Property, Royalties, Income from Flow Through
Entities
Chapter 9: Tax Credits
Chapter 10: Payroll Taxes
Chapter 11: Retirement and Other Tax-Deferred Plans and Annuities:
Contributions and Distributions
Chapter 12: Special Property Transactions
Chapter 13: At-Risk/Passive Activity Loss Rules and the Individual
Alternative Minimum Tax
Chapter 14: Partnership Taxation
Chapter 15: Corporate Taxation
Appendix A: amended returns
Appendix B: comprehensive tax return problems
Appendix C: concept check answers
Appendix D: tax table
Appendix E: blank tax forms
Index
50
PRINCIPLES OF TAXATION FOR BUSINESS
AND INVESTMENT PLANNING
By Sally Jones, University of Virginia and Shelley C Rhoades-Catanach,
Villanova University
2012 (April 2011) / 640 pages
ISBN: 9780078110948
www.mhhe.com/sjones2012
Principles of Taxation for Business and Investment Planning, by Jones
and Rhoades-Catanach, is a different approach to the study of taxation
than the traditional tax return preparation approach. This book teaches
students to recognize the role taxes play in business and investment
decisions. In addition, the book presents the general role of taxation
and its implications across all taxpaying entities before discussing
the details relevant to specific entities. This approach allows students
to really grasp the fundamental concepts that are the foundation for
specific tax rules. The benefit is that the students will understand
the framework of the tax system, even though specific tax rules and
regulations change from year to year. Unlike traditional introductory
texts, Principles of Taxation for Business and Investment Planning
downplays the technical detail that makes the study of taxation such
a nightmare for business students. This text attempts to convince
students that an understanding of taxation is not only relevant but
critical to their success in the business world.
New to this edition
This text’s coverage of new tax regulations is updated yearly to
reflect the latest changes in tax law.
Updated real world examples reinforce and illustrate key concepts
Contents
Part 1 Exploring the Tax Environment
Ch. 1 Taxes and Taxing Jurisdictions
Ch. 2 Tax Policy Issues: Standards for a Good Tax
Part 2 Fundamentals of Tax Planning
Ch. 3 Taxes as Transaction Costs
Ch. 4 Maxims of Income Tax Planning
Ch. 5 Tax Research
Part 3 The Measurement of Taxable Income
Ch. 6 Taxable Income From Business Operations
Ch. 7 Property Acquisitions and Cost Recovery Deductions
Appendix 7-A Midquarter Convention Tables
Ch. 8 Property Dispositions
Ch. 9 Nontaxable Exchanges
Part 4 The Taxation of Business Income
Ch. 10 Sole Proprietorships, Partnerships, LLCs, and S Corporations
Ch. 11 The Corporate Taxpayer
Appendix 11-A Schedule M-3 for Reconciling Book and Taxable
Income
Ch. 12 The Choice of Business Entity
Ch. 13 Jurisdictional Issues in Business Taxation
Part 5 The Individual Taxpayer
Ch. 14 The Individual Tax Formula
Ch. 15 Compensation and Retirement Planning
Ch. 16 Investment and Personal Financial Planning
Appendix 16-A Comprehensive Schedule D Problem
Ch. 17 Tax Consequences of Personal Activities
Appendix 17-A Social Security Worksheet
Part 6 The Tax Compliance Process
Ch. 18 The Tax Compliance Process
Accounting
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of
Individuals
2012 Edition, 3rd Edition
University
2012 (April 2011) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780077328368
www.mhhe.com/spilkerindividuals2012
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation Series continues to provide a unique, innovative, and engaging learning experience for students studying
taxation. The breadth of the topical coverage, the storyline approach
to presenting the material, the emphasis on the tax and nontax
consequences of multiple parties involved in transactions, and the
integration of financial and tax accounting topics make this book ideal
for the modern tax curriculum. With over 250 schools adopting the 2nd
edition, McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities
resonates with instructors who were in need of a bold and innovative approach to teaching tax. 280 professors have contributed 250
book reviews, in addition to 17 focus groups and symposia. These
instructors were impressed on the book’s organization, pedagogy,
and unique features that are a testament to the grassroots nature of
this book’s development.
New to this edition
New Ethics Boxes: New Ethics boxes were added to each chapter. These vignettes present a taxpayer facing an ethical question
related to the material covered in the chapter. Students are encouraged to consider the many ethical questions raised by taxation law;
these boxes are designed to start a conversation in the classroom
about ethics in tax.
Algorithmic Problems: Connect Accounting for Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities now includes algorithmic problems.
The book has been completely updated for all new tax law, rate
changes, and 2010 tax forms. The book is current through March
2011. Other updates beyond March can be found on the book’s Online
Learning Center, www.mhhe.com/spilker2012.
Relevant content changes have been integrated throughout the
text. These notable changes include:
All tax forms have been updated for the latest available tax form
as of January 2011.
TaxACT for Business Entities: We will now offer both TaxACT’s
Individual tax prep software, and their Entities bundle, which includes
forms 1065, 1120 and 1120S as add-on products. This bundle combines TaxACT’s 2010 Preparer’s 1040 with the 2010 Preparer’s Business 3-Pack to offer preparer solutions for personal and business use.
Contents
Part I: Intro to Taxation
1. An Introduction to Tax
2. Tax Compliance, the IRS, and Tax Authorities
3. Tax Planning Strategies and Related Limitations
Part II: Basic Individual Taxation
4. Individual Tax Overview
5. Gross Income and Exclusions
6. Individual Deductions
7. Individual Income Tax Computation and Tax Credits
Part III: Business and Investment–Related Transactions
8. Business Income, Deductions, and Accounting Methods
9. Property Acquisition and Cost Recovery
10. Property Dispositions
11. Investments
Part IV: Specialized Topics
12. Compensation
13. Retirement Savings and Deferred Compensation
14. Tax Consequences of Home Ownership
Appendix A: Tax Forms
Appendix B: Tax Terms Glossary
Appendix C: Comprehensive Tax Return Problems
Appendix D: Code Indices
Appendix E: Table of Cases Cited
TAXATION OF BUSINESS ENtities
University
2012 (May 2011) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780077328412
www.mhhe.com/spilkerentities2012
integration of financial and tax accounting topics make this book
ideal for the modern tax curriculum. With over 250 schools adopting
the 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business
Entities resonates with instructors who were in need of a bold and
innovative approach to teaching tax. 280 professors have contributed
250 book reviews, in addition to 17 focus groups and symposia. These
New to this edition
changes, and 2010 tax forms. The book is current through March
as of January 2011.
Contents
Part I: Business and Investment–Related Transactions
Part II: Entity Overview and Taxation of C Corporations
4. Entities Overview
5. Corporate Operations
6. FAS 109: Accounting for Income Taxes
7. Corporate Taxation: Nonliquidating Distributions
8. Corporate Taxation: Formation, Reorganization, and Liquidation
Part III: Taxation of Flow-Through Entities
9. Forming and Operating Partnerships
10. Dispositions of Partnership Interests and Partnership Distributions
11. S Corporations
Part IV: Multijurisdictional Taxation and Transfer Taxes
12. State and Local Taxes
51
Accounting
13. The U.S. Taxation of Multinational Transactions
14. Transfer Taxes and Wealth Planning
individuals and BUSINESS ENtities
University
2012 (April 2011) / 1264 pages
ISBN: 9780078111068
www.mhhe.com/spilkercomp2012
integration of financial and tax accounting topics make this book ideal
for the modern tax curriculum. With over 250 schools adopting the 2nd
edition, McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities
resonates with instructors who were in need of a bold and innovative approach to teaching tax. 280 professors have contributed 250
book reviews, in addition to 17 focus groups and symposia. These
New to this edition
5. Gross Income and Exclusions
6. Individual Deductions
7. Individual Income Tax Computation and Tax Credits
Part III: Business and Investment–Related Transactions
11. Investments
Part IV: Specialized Topics
12. Compensation
13. Retirement Savings and Deferred Compensation
14. Tax Consequences of Home Ownership
Part V: Entity Overview and Taxation of C Corporations
15. Entities Overview
16. Corporate Operations
17. FASB ASC Topic 740: Income Taxes
18. Corporate Taxation: Nonliquidating Distributions
19. Corporate Taxation: Formation, Reorganization, and Liquidation
Part VI: Taxation of Flow-Through Entities
20. Forming and Operating Partnerships
21. Dispositions of Partnership Interests and Partnership Distributions
22. S Corporations
Part VII: Multijurisdictional Taxation and Transfer Taxes
23. State and Local Taxes
24. The U.S. Taxation of Multinational Transactions
25. Transfer Taxes and Wealth Planning
Appendix E: Table of Cases Cited
NEW
*9780071078764*
TAXATION IN SINGAPORE
By Simon Poh
changes, and 2010tax forms. The book is current through March
as of January 2011.
Better Examples: The examples used throughout the chapter
relate directly to the storyline presented at the beginning of each
chapter, so students become familiar with one fact set and learn how
to apply those facts to different scenarios. In addition to providing
in-context examples, we provide “What-If” scenarios within many
examples to illustrate how variations in the facts might or might not
change the answers.
Contents
Part I: Intro to Taxation
1. An Introduction to Tax
2. Tax Compliance, the IRS, and Tax Authorities
3. Tax Planning Strategies and Related Limitations
Part II: Basic Individual Taxation
4. Individual Tax Overview
52
2011 (August 2010) / 424 pages
ISBN: 9780071078764
This book is intended for candidates taking professional examinations
in Singapore taxation, as well as full-time undergraduate students
taking Singapore income tax courses in local universities and other
tertiary institutions. Lecturers may adopt it as the main text of a onesemester course on basic taxation in Singapore. It is also suitable
for those who have little or no knowledge in Singapore taxation, as
it attempts to explain the tax laws in simple language. The depth of
coverage is sufficient to enable readers to build a strong foundation
in Singapore taxation, including preparation of both corporate and
individual tax computations.
Features
Detailed coverage of main tax topics, including capital allowances, tax deductions and taxation of foreign income, non-residents
and companies
Clear learning objectives set out at the beginning of each chapter
In-depth review questions at the end of each chapter to test the
readers’ grasp of Singapore taxation
Accounting
Up-to-date information on tax laws, regulations and practice to
equip readers with sufficient knowledge on tax compliance and basic
tax planning topics and concepts
Inclusion of extracts of the Singapore Income Tax Act and the
Goods and Services Tax Act as a convenient and easy reference to
readers, which are often referred to in practice and in examinations
Contents
Preface
About the Author
1. Introduction to Singapore Tax
2. Concept of Income
3. Tax Deductions
4. Capital Allowances
5. Taxation of Companies
6. Taxation of Individuals
7. Taxation of Partnerships
8. Taxation of Non-residents
9. Taxation of Foreign Income
10. Goods and Services Tax
Extracts of Income Tax Act
Part I, Section 2: Interpretation
Part III, Section 10: Charge of income tax
Part IV, Section 13: Exempt income
Part V, Section 14: Deductions allowed
Part V, Section 15: Deductions not allowed
Part VI, Sections 16-24: Capital allowances
Part X, Section 39: Relief and deduction for resident individual and
Hindu joint family
Part XII, Section 45: Withholding of tax in respect of interest paid to
non-resident persons
Sixth Schedule, Sections 19(2) and 106(3): Number of years of
working life of asset
Index
Governmental / Non Profit
NEW
*9780078025457*
ESSENTIALS OF
accounting for
governmental and
not-for-profit
organizations
11th Edition
mental activities are recorded using the modified accrual basis. The
fund-basis statements are then used as input in the preparation of
government-wide statements. The preparation of government-wide
statements is presented in an Excel worksheet. This approach has
two advantages: (1) it is the approach most commonly applied in
practice, and (2) it is an approach familiar to students who have
studied the process of consolidation in their advanced accounting
classes. State and local government reporting is illustrated using an
ongoing example integrated throughout Chapters 3 through 8 and
13. This edition incorporates all of the FASB, GASB, GAO and AICPA
pronouncements passed since the last edition.
New to this edition
New Continuous Homework Problem: Students gain a comprehensive overview of the financial reporting process for state and local
governments with a new continuous homework problem.
Updated References: Descriptions and references have been
updated to reflect FASB and GASB codification conventions for consistency with current professional literature. Students are introduced
to the structure of the codifications.
Summaries of Academic Research: Financial information on
not-for-profit organizations is becoming increasingly available through
stimulating research by academics. The 10th edition of this text provides a brief discussion of published research in the nonprofit area
for the purpose of developing student awareness of the major issues
and findings from this important economic sector.
Updated Presentation of Budgetary Accounting: The presentation of budgetary accounts, including encumbrances, is simplified
to reduce student confusion associated with GASB Statement No.
54 –Fund Balance Reporting.
Most Up-to-Date Reporting Requirements: Updated for new IRS
form 990 reporting requirements to reflect current law.
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to Accounting and Financial Reporting for
Governmental and Not-for-Profit Organizations
Chapter 2: Overview of Financial Reporting for State and Local
Governments
Chapter 3: Modified Accrual Accounting: Including the Role of Fund
Balances and Budgetary Authority
Chapter 4: Accounting for General and Special Revenue Funds
Chapter 5: Accounting for Other Governmental Fund Types: Capital
Projects, Debt Service, and Permanent
Chapter 6: Proprietary Funds
Chapter 7: Fiduciary (Trust) Funds
Chapter 8: Government-Wide Statements, Fixed Assets, Long-Term
Debt
Chapter 9: Accounting for Special-Purpose Entities, Including Public
Colleges and Universities
Chapter 10: Accounting for Private Not-for-Profit Organizations
Chapter 11: College and University Accounting—Private Institutions
Chapter 12: Accounting for Hospitals and Other Health-Care Providers
Chapter 13: Auditing, Tax Exempt Entities, and Evaluating Performance
Chapter 14: Financial Reporting by the Federal Government
By Paul A Copley, James Madison University
ISBN: 9780078025457
www.mhhe.com/copley11e
Copley’s Essentials of Accounting for Governmental and Not-forProfit Organizations, 11e is best suited for those professors whose
objective is to provide more concise coverage than what is available
in larger texts. The main focus of this text is on the preparation of
external financial statements which is a challenge for governmental
reporting. The approach in this edition is similar to that used in practice. Specifically, day to day events are recorded at the fund level
using the basis of accounting for fund financial statements. Govern-
53
Accounting
NEW
*9780078110931*
ACCOUNTING FOR GOVERNMENTAL AND
NONPROFIT ENTITIES
16th Edition
By Jacqueline Reck, University of South Florida--Tampa, Suzanne
Lowensohn, Colorado State University and Earl Wilson, University of
Missouri-Columbia
2013 (January 2012) / 784 pages
ISBN: 9780078110931
www.mhhe.com/reck16e
Accounting for Governmental and Nonprofit Entities provides users
with extensive, accurate, and up-to-date coverage of accounting and
financial reporting for government and not-for-profit organizations, in
addition to information on governmental auditing and performance
measurement. The textbook uses a unique dual-track approach to
teaching governmental accounting and features two independent
computerized government practice sets to enhance student learning.
Chapter 7: Accounting for the Business-Type Activities of State and
Local Governments
Chapter 8: Accounting for Fiduciary Activities—Agency and Trust
Funds
Chapter 9: Financial Reporting of State and Local Governments
Part Two: Accountability for Public Funds
Chapter 10: Analysis of Governmental Financial Performance
Chapter 11: Auditing of Governmental and Not-for-Profit Organizations
Chapter 12: Budgeting and Performance Measurement
Part Three: Not-for-Profit Organizations and the Federal Government
Chapter 13: Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organizations
Chapter 14: Not-for-Profit Organizations—Regulatory, Taxation, and
Performance Issues
Chapter 15: Accounting for Colleges and Universities
Chapter 16: Accounting for Health Care Organizations
Chapter 17: Accounting and Reporting for the Federal Government
Glossary
Governmental and Not-for-Profit Organizations
Index
New to this edition
Suzanne Lowensohn of Colorado State University joins the
author team, bringing with her a strong teaching and research background in government and not-for-profit accounting.
The text has been thoroughly revised to incorporate fund balance
classification and fund definition requirements of GASB Statement 54,
as well as the reporting changes related to GASB Statement (Statement Number coming soon), providing up-to-date changes affecting
governments and accounting professionals.
The sixteenth edition has adopted the comprehensive annual
financial report of the City of Jacksonville, an early implementer of
GASB Statement 54, providing a real-world example of the impact
of the new GASB standard throughout the text.
Accounting Theory
NEW
*9780077126735*
theory
The City of Smithville/Bingham Computerized Cumulative Problem has been revised and updated
2nd Edition
to incorporate standards changes and improve program functionality, providing students with
By Craig Deegan, RMIT University-Melbourne
and Jeffrey Unermna, Manchester Business
a hands-on-experience in preparing accounting entries and
financial statements. In addition,
a reduced-coverage City of Smithville Computerized Cumulative
Problem has been added
to provide a learning tool for those instructors who do not have
time to cover the complete
Smithville problem.
As with all prior editions, the sixteenth edition reflects the latest
authoritative guidance from GASB, FASB, FASAB, GAO, and AICPA
applicable to government and not-for-profit organizations, providing
accurate and up-to-date knowledge about government and not-forprofit accounting and reporting, an important feature for those intending to take the CPA exam.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Accounting and Financial Reporting for
Governmental and Not-for-Profit Entities
Part One: State and Local Governments
Chapter 2: Principles of Accounting and Financial Reporting for State
and Local Governments
Chapter 3: Governmental Operating Statement Accounts; Budgetary
Accounting
Chapter 4: Accounting for Governmental Operating Activities—Illustrative Transactions and Financial Statements
Chapter 5: Accounting for General Capital Assets and Capital Projects
Chapter 6: Accounting for General Long-term Liabilities and Debt
Service
54
2011 (March 2011) / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780077126735
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk.textbooks/deegan
Financial Accounting Theory, Second European Edition provides
a complete grounding in the subject from a European perspective.
Underpinned by research and applied through real-life examples it’s
the ideal text for anyone studying the theories of financial accounting.
New to this edition
Updated coverage - all topics have been thoroughly updated and
recent debates added including extended discussion of the upcoming
area of social and environmental accounting
New and updated real life examples - real life exhibits have been
updated to showcase the issues considered in a real world context
New research developments - all the latest research in the field
has been added and integrated into the text to provide a contemporary
and rigorous account of the subject
Contents
1. Introduction to financial accounting theory
2. The financial reporting environment
3. The regulation of financial accounting
4. International Accounting
Accounting
5. Normative theories of accounting 1: The case of accounting for
changing prices
6. Normative theories of accounting 2: the case of conceptual framework projects
7. Positive Accounting Theory
8. Unregulated corporate reporting decisions: Considerations of
systems oriented theories
9. Extended systems of accounting: The incorporation of social and
environmental factors within external reporting
10. Reactions of capital markets to financial reporting
11. Reactions of individuals to financial reporting: an examination of
behavioural research
12. Critical Perspectives of Accounting
International Accounting
NEW
*9780078110955*
INTERNATIONAL
ACCOUNTING
3rd Edition
By Timothy Doupnik, University of South Carolina and Hector Perera, Massey University
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING THEORY
3rd Edition
By Craig Deegan, University of Southern Queensland
2009
ISBN: 9780070277267
www.mhhe.com/au/deegantheory3e
Presenting accounting theory as a vibrant, relevant topic in a changing
world, this text has established itself as the market leader in Australia
and New Zealand. The third edition retains core strengths that appeal
both to academics and students; critical evaluation, a writing style that
is easy to read and understand, and a balanced discussion of different
theories of accounting to stimulate student interest. Contemporary
examples and questions have been included and other content (such
as the topic of international accounting) extensively updated. With
twelve chapters that are arranged in a logical sequence, this text is
ideally suited for one-semester subjects. It is also an ideal text for
those undertaking further research at post graduate levels; comprehensive internal referencing guides point the reader to undertake
further reading or investigate aspects at a deeper level.
Contents
1 Introduction to financial accounting theory
2 The financial reporting environment
3 The regulation of financial accounting
4 International accounting
5 Normative theories of accounting: the case of accounting for
changing prices
6 Normative theories of accounting: the case of conceptual framework projects
7 Positive Accounting Theory
8 Unregulated corporate reporting decisions: considerations of
systems-oriented theories
9 Extended systems of accounting: the incorporation of social and
environmental factors within external reporting
10 Reactions of capital markets to financial reporting
11 Reactions of individuals to financial reporting: an examination of
behavioural research
12 Critical perspectives of accounting
Index
2012 (April 2011) / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780078110955
ISBN: 9780071086318 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/doupnik3e
The Third Edition of International Accounting provides an overview of
the broadly defined area of international accounting, but also focuses
on the accounting issues related to international business activities and foreign operations. This edition also includes substantially
updated coverage of the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). The
unique benefits of this textbook include its up-to-date coverage of
relevant material, extensive numerical examples provided in most
chapters, two chapters devoted to the application of International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), and coverage of nontraditional
but important topics such as strategic accounting issues of multinational companies, international corporate governance, and corporate
social responsibility reporting.
New to this edition
IFRS: Two chapters on International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), including numerical examples demonstrating major
differences between IFRS and U.S. GAAP and their implications for
financial statements.
Recent Developments: Detailed discussion on the most recent
developments in the area of international harmonization/convergence
of financial reporting standards.
Financial Reporting Issues: Numerous excerpts from recent
annual reports to demonstrate differences in financial reporting practices across countries and to demonstrate financial reporting issues
especially relevant for multinational corporations.
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to International Accounting
Chapter 2: Worldwide Accounting Diversity
Chapter 3: International Convergence of Financial Reporting
Chapter 4: International Financial Reporting Standards: Part I
Chapter 5: International Financial Reporting Standards: Part II
Chapter 6: Comparative Accounting
Chapter 7: Foreign Currency Transactions and Hedging Foreign
Exchange Risk
Chapter 8: Translation of Foreign Currency Financial Statements
Chapter 9: Additional Financial Reporting Issues
Chapter 10: Analysis of Foreign Financial Statements
Chapter 11: International Taxation
Chapter 12: International Transfer Pricing
Chapter 13: Strategic Accounting Issues in Multinational Corporations
Chapter 14: Comparative International Auditing and Corporate
Governance
55
Accounting
Chapter 15: International Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting
NEW
NEW
*9780078025310*
FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS AND
SECURITY VALUATION
5th Edition
By Stephen Penman, Columbia University-Business School
2013 (March 2012) / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780078025310
ISBN: 9780071326407 [IE]
This book describes valuation as an exercise in financial statement
analysis. Students learn to view a firm through its financial statements
and to carry out the appropriate financial statement analysis to value
the firm’s debt and equity. The book takes an activist approach to investing, showing how the analyst challenges the current market price
of a share by analyzing the fundamentals. With a careful assessment
of accounting quality, accounting comes to life as it is integrated with
the modern theory of finance to develop practical analysis and valuation tools for active investing.
CONTENTS
List of Cases
List of Accounting Clinics
1 Introduction to Investing and Valuation
2 Introduction to the Financial Statements
Part One Financial Statements and Valuation
3 How Financial Statements Are Used in Valuation
4 Cash Accounting, Accrual Accounting, and Discounted Cash Flow
Valuation
5 Accrual Accounting and Valuation: Pricing Book Values
6 Accrual Accounting and Valuation: Pricing Earnings
Part Two The Analysis of Financial Statements
7 Viewing the Business Through the Financial Statements
8 The Analysis of the Statement of Shareholders’ Equity
9 The Analysis of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement
10 The Analysis of the Cash Flow Statement
11 The Analysis of Profitability
12 The Analysis of Growth and Sustainable Earnings
Part Three Forecasting and Valuation Analysis
13 The Value of Operations and the Evaluation of Enterprise Priceto-Book Ratios and Price-Earnings Ratios
14 Anchoring on the Financial Statements: Simple Forecasting and
Simple Valuation
15 Full-Information Forecasting, Valuation, and Business Strategy
Analysis
Part Four Accounting Analysis and Valuation
16 Creating Accounting Value and Economic Value
17 Analysis of the Quality of Financial Statements
Part Five The Analysis of Risk and Return
18 The Analysis of Equity Risk and Return
19 The Analysis of Credit Risk and Return
Appendix A Summary of Formulas
Index
56
*9780078110863*
FINANCIAL REPORTING AND
ANALYSIS
Financial Statement Analysis
5th Edition
By Lawrence Revsine, Northwestern University,
Daniel W Collins and Bruce Johnson of University of Iowa-Iowa City and Fred Mittelstaedt,
University of Notre Dame
2012 (January 2011) / 1120 pages
ISBN: 9780078110863
www.mhhe.com/revsine5e
Financial Reporting & Analysis (FR&A) by Revsine/Collins/Johnson/
Mittelstaedt emphasizes both the process of financial reporting and
the analysis of financial statements. This book employs a true “user”
perspective by discussing the contracting and decision implications of
accounting and this helps readers understand why accounting choices
matter and to whom. Revsine, Collins, Johnson, and Mittelstaedt train
their readers to be good financial detectives, able to read, use, and
interpret the statements and-most importantly understand how and
why managers can utilize the flexibility in GAAP to manipulate the
numbers for their own purposes. Significantly, the new edition emphasizes the differences and similarities between GAAP and IFRS,
which is a critical component of this course.
New to this edition
New Global Vantage Point sections have been added to most
chapters that
identify key differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRS
discuss financial statement excerpts of companies that follow
IFRS
summarize proposed new accounting standards issued by the
FASB and/or the IASB as part of their convergence project
References to both the FASB Accounting Standards Codification
TM and the underlying pre-Codification U.S. GAAP literature have
been added
All FASB and IASB standards, exposure drafts, and discussion
papers released through October 2010 have been covered
Discussion of the 2008 global financial crisis and how it affected
accounting measurements is included
New or updated company examples are incorporated throughout
the book
New and revised end-of-chapter materials including exercises,
problems, and cases tied to Global Vantage Points or to proposed
new FASB and IASB standards have been added
Contents
Chapter 1 The Economic and Institutional Setting for Financial
Reporting
Chapter 2 Accrual Accounting and Income Determination
Chapter 3 Additional Topics in Income Determination
Chapter 4 Structure of the Balance Sheet and Statement of Cash
Flows
Chapter 5 Essentials of Financial Statement Analysis
Chapter 6 The Role of Financial Information in Valuation and Credit
Risk Assessment
Chapter 7 The Role of Financial Information in Contracting
Chapter 8 Receivables
Chapter 9 Inventories
Chapter 10 Long-Lived Assets
Chapter 11 Financial Instruments as Liabilities
Accounting
Chapter 12 Financial Reporting for Leases
Chapter 13 Income Tax Reporting
Chapter 14 Pensions and Postretirement Benefits
Chapter 15 Financial Reporting for Owners’ Equity
Chapter 16 Intercorporate Equity Investments
Appendix Time Value of Money
Index
EQUITY VALUATION AND ANALYSIS
2nd Edition
By Russell Lundholm and Richard Sloan of University of Michigan--Ann
Arbor
2007 (August 2006) / 336 pages
ISBN: 9780077219857 (with eVal CD and Pass Code Card)
ISBN: 9780071260558 [IE]
Contents
FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
10th Edition
K R Subramanyan, University of Southern California and John J Wild,
University of Wisconsin Madison
2009 (May 2008) / 784 pages
ISBN: 9780073379432
ISBN: 9780071263924 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/subramanyam10e
Financial Statement Analysis, 10e, emphasizes effective business
analysis and decision making by analysts, investors, managers, and
other stakeholders of the company. It continues to set the standard in
showing students the keys to effective financial statement analysis.
The textbook is set up in a three part framework which makes this
textbook one of the best selling books in the market. It begins with an
overview (chapters 1-2), followed by accounting analysis (chapters
3-6) and then financial analysis (chapters 7-12). The book presents a
balanced view of analysis, including both equity and credit analysis,
and both cash-based and earnings-based valuation models. The tenth
edition is aimed at accounting and finance classes, and the professional audience – as it shows the relevance of financial statement
analysis to all business decision makers. The authors:
1. Use numerous and timely “real world” examples and cases
2. Draw heavily on actual excerpts from financial reports and footnotes
3. Focus on analysis and interpretation of financial reports and their
footnotes
4. Illustrate debt and equity valuation that uses results of financial
statement analysis
Part One
1. Introduction
2. Information Collection
3. Understanding the Business
4. Accounting Analysis
5. Financial Ratio Analysis
6. Cash Flow Analysis
7. Structured Forecasting
8. Forecasting Details
9. The Cost of Capital
10. Valuation
11. Valuation Ratios
12. Some Complications
Part Two
1. AOL Time Warner Merger
2. The Valuation of Amazon.com in June 2001
3. Turnaround at Bally Total Fitness
4. Boston Chicken, Inc.
5. Four Valuation Models-One Value
6. EnCom Corporation
7. GAAP versus the Street: Three Cases of Conflicting Quarterly
Earnings Announcements
8. The Home Depot, Inc.
9. Evaluation Intel’s Earnings Torpedo
10. Interpreting Margin and Turnover Ratios
11. Netflix, Inc. 12. Overstock.com
13. Pre-Paid Legal Services
14. Determinants of Valuation Ratios: The Restaurant Industry in 2003
15. Forecasting for the Love Boat: Royal Caribbean Cruises in 1998
16. Can Salton Swing?
17. A Tale of Two Movie Theaters
Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D
Index
5. Apply a concise and succinct writing style to make the material
accessible
Contents
Part One: Introduction and Overview
Chapter 1: Overview of Financial Statement Analysis
Chapter 2: Financial Reporting and Analysis
Part Two: Accounting Analysis
Chapter 3: Analyzing Financing Activities
Chapter 4: Analyzing Investing Activities
Chpater 5: Analyzing Investing Activities: Special Topics
Chpater 6: Analyzing Operating Activities
Part Three: Financial Analysis
Chapter 7: Cash Flow Analysis
Chpater 8: Return on Invested Capital
Chapter 9: Prospective analysis
Chapter 10: Credit Analysis
Chapter 11: Equity Analysis and Valuation
Comprehensive Case: Applying Financial Statement Analysis
57
Accounting
Survey of Accounting
NEW
*9780078110856*
SURVEY OF ACCOUNTING
3rd Edition
By Thomas P Edmonds, University of Alabama
at Birmingham, Philip R Olds, Virginia Commonwealth University, Frances M McNair,
Mississippi State University and Bor-Yi Tsay,
University of Alabama at Birmingham
Chapter 3 Accounting for Merchandising Businesses
Chapter 4 Internal Controls, Accounting for Cash, and Ethics
Chapter 5 Accounting for Receivables and Inventory Cost Flow
Chapter 7 Accounting for Liabilities
Chapter 8 Proprietorships, Partnerships, and Corporations
Chapter 10 An Introduction to Managerial Accounting
analysis
Chapter 12 Cost Accumulation, Tracing and Allocation
Chapter 13 Relevant Information for Special Decisions
Chapter 16 Planning for Capital Investments
Appendix B Portion of the Form 10-K for Target Corporation
Appendix C The Double-Entry Accounting System
2012 (January 2011) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780078110856
ISBN: 9780071315050 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/edmondssurvey3e
Survey of Accounting, 3rd edition, is designed to cover both financial
and managerial accounting in a single 16-week course, presenting
the material in a style easy for non-accounting majors to grasp. It
incorporates the same pedagogical innovations that have made Edmonds’ financial and managerial titles such fast-growing successes in
the marketplace, including his unique Horizontal Financial Statements
Model and a multiple accounting cycle approach that demonstrates
the impact of related events over a series of accounting cycles.
New to this edition
Reorganized the content to more closely follow a traditional balance sheet sequencing approach: the first three chapters introduce
the accounting cycle for service and merchandising businesses.
Thereafter, topics are presented in the order they normally appear
in a balance sheet: accounting for assets, accounting for liabilities,
and accounting for equity.
Topics associated with corporate governance moved from
Chapter 2 to Chapter 4.
Chapter 4 now includes coverage of Accounting for Cash, Internal
Controls, and Ethics.
Accounting for Inventory Cost Flow was moved from Chapter
4 into Chapter 5.
Chapter 5 now includes Accounting for Receivables and Inventory Cost Flow.
Consolidated coverage of Financial Ratios into a single Chapter
(Chapter 9).
Added basic coverage of auditing practices in Chapter 4.
Added coverage of bond discounts and premiums in Chapter 7.
Coverage of manufacturing costs flow through raw materials,
work-in-process, and finished goods inventory is in Chapter 10.
The Analyze, Think, Communicate sections now include a business application case, a group assignment, a research assignment,
a writing assignment, and an ethics case in each chapter.
Contents
Chapter 1 An Introduction to Accounting
Chapter 2 Understanding the Accounting Cycle
58
ACCOUNTING
What the Numbers Mean, 9th Edition
By David Marshall, Millikin University, Wayne William McManus,
International College of the Cayman Islands and Daniel Viele, Webster
University
2011 (January 2010) / 784 pages
ISBN: 9780073527062
ISBN: 9780071221023 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/marshall9e
Accounting has become known as the language of business. This new
edition is written to meet the needs of those students who will not be
accountants but who do need to understand accounting to learn the
key language that embarks us in the business world. Marshall, the
leading text in the Survey market, takes readers through the basics:
what accounting information is, what it means, and how it is used. In
using this text, students examine financial statements and discover
what they do and do not communicate. This enables them to gain
the crucial decision-making and problem-solving skills they need in
order to succeed in a professional environment. The new edition still
has a strong focus on Return on Investment while updated content
is integrated throughout.
Contents
Chapter 1. Accounting—Present and Past
Part 1 Financial Accounting
Chapter 2. Financial Statements and Accounting Concepts/Principles
Chapter 3. Fundamental Interpretations Made From Financial Statement Data
Chapter 4. The Bookkeeping Process and Transaction Analysis
Chapter 5. Accounting for and Presentation of Current Assets
Chapter 6. Accounting for and Presentation of Property, Plant and
Equipment, and other Noncurrent Assets
Chapter 7. Accounting for and Presentation of Liabilities
Chapter 8. Accounting for and Presentation of Owners’ Equity
Chapter 9. The Income Statement and the Statement of Cash Flows
Chapter 10. Corporate Governance, Explanatory Notes and Other
Disclosures
Chapter 11. Financial Statement Analysis
Part 2 Managerial Accounting
Chapter 12. Managerial Accounting and Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Chapter 13. Cost Accounting and Reporting
Chapter 14. Cost Planning
Chapter 15. Cost Control
Chapter 16. Costs for Decision Making
Epilogue: Accounting—The Future
Accounting
MBA Managerial
Aust Adaptation
ACCOUNTING: WHAT THE NUMBERS MEAN
Revised 2nd Edition
By Marshall (US Author), Jean McCartney, University of Western Sydney,
Dianne Van Rhyn, Murdoch University, Wayne McManus (US Author) and
Daniel Viele (US Author)
2009
ISBN: 9780070997394
www.mhhe.com/au/marshall2r
Winner: Best Tertiary title (Adaptation) - Australian Publishing Awards
2008. The judges particularly praised the book as follows: “the wraparound jacket is a really good feature with identification of the needs
of students. The learning objectives are graded and the chapters are
well structured. Everything is tied into the learning objectives and is
graded accordingly”.
This accessible introduction to accounting retains a practical balance
between accounting theory and practice. Taking a transaction analysis
approach Accounting: What The Numbers Mean is ideally suited for
the one–semester introductory accounting unit. These courses are
typically taken by non-accounting majors, as well as postgraduate
and MBA students. The strengths of the first edition - such as the
clarity of the pedagogy and writing style - have been maintained. To
aid learning, chapters have been streamlined and greater coverage
of ratio analysis included, whilst debits and credits material has been
retained in the appendix.
Contents
Part 1: Financial Accounting
1. Financial accounting
2. Financial statements and accounting concepts/principles
3. The accounting process
4. Accounting for and presentation of current assets
5. Accounting for and presentation of property, plant, and equipment,
and other non-current assets
6. Accounting for and presentation of liabilities
7. Owners’ equity
8. The income statement and the cash flow statement
9. Governance and other information
10. Fundamental interpretations
11. Financial statement analysis
Part 2: Management Accounting
12. Management accounting, cost-volume-profit relationships and
short-term decision making
13. Cost accounting and reporting systems
14. Cost analysis for planning and control
Appendices
Appendix 1. CFK Annual report for the year ended 30 June 2006
Appendix 2. From transaction analysis to debits and credits
Appendix 3. Solutions to ‘What does it mean?’, ‘So what do you think?’
and Multiple-choice Questions
Glossary
Index
ACCOUNTING FOR DECISION-MAKING AND
CONTROL
7th Edition
By Jerold Zimmerman, University of Rochester
2011 (January 2010) / 720 pages
ISBN: 9780078136726
ISBN: 9780071289641 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/zimmerman7e
Accounting for Decision Making and Control provides students and
managers with an understanding appreciation of the strengths and
limitations of an organization’s accounting system. This book provides
a framework for thinking about accounting systems and a basis for
analyzing proposed changes to these systems. The Seventh Edition
demonstrates that managerial accounting is an integral part of the
firm’s organizational architecture, not just an isolated set of computational topics. The purpose of this text is to provide students and
managers with an understanding and appreciation of the strengths and
limitations of an organization’s accounting system, thereby allowing
them to be more intelligent users of these systems. The main purpose
proposed by the author remains in tact for the Seventh Edition.
Contents
Chapter 1) Introduction
Chapter 2) The nature of costs
Chapter 3) Opportunity cost of capital and capital budgeting
Chapter 4) Organizational architecture
Chapter 5) Responsibility accounting and transfer pricing
Chapter 6) Budgeting
Chapter 7) Cost allocation: Theory
Chapter 8) Cost allocation: Practices
Chapter 9) Absorption cost system
Chapter 10) Criticisms of absorption cost systems: Incentives to
overproduce
Chapter 11) Criticisms of absorption cost systems: Inaccurate product
costs
Chapter 12) Standard costs: Direct labor and materials
Chapter 13) Overhead and marketing variances
Chapter 14) Management accounting in a changing environment
59
Accounting
MBA Principles
ACCOUNTING
Corporate Financial Reporting
NEW
Texts and Cases, 13th Edition
By Robert Anthony and David Hawkins of Harvard Business School, Kenneth Merchant, University of Southern California
2011 (May 2010) / 944 pages
ISBN: 9780073379593
ISBN: 9780071289092 [IE]
Contents
Part One: Financial Accounting
1. The Nature and Purpose of Accounting
2. Basic Accounting Concepts: The Balance Sheet
3. Basic Accounting Concepts: The Income Statement
4. Accounting Records and Systems
5. Revenue and Monetary Assets
6. Cost of Sales and Inventories
7. Long-Lived Nonmonetary Assets and Their Amortization
8. Sources of Capital: Debt
9. Sources of Capital: Owners’ Equity
10. Other Items That Affect Net Income and Owners’ Equity
11. The Statement of Cash Flows
12. Acquisitions and Consolidated Statements
14. Understanding Financial Statements
Part Two: Management Accounting
15. The Nature of Management Accounting
16. The Behavior of Costs
17. Full Costs and Their Uses
18. Additional Aspects of Product Costing Systems
19. Standard Costs, Variable Costing Systems, Quality Costs, and
Joint Costs
20. Production Cost Variance Analyses
21. Other Variance Analysis
22. Control: The Management Control Environment
23. Control: The Management Control Process
24. Strategic Planning and Budgeting
25. Reporting and Evaluation
26. Short-Run Alternative Choice Decisions
27. Longer-Run Decisions: Capital Budgeting
28. Management Accounting System Design
*9780078110863*
FINANCIAL REPORTING AND
ANALYSIS
5th Edition
By Lawrence Revsine, Northwestern University,
Daniel W Collins and Bruce Johnson of University of Iowa-Iowa City and Fred Mittelstaedt,
University of Notre Dame
www.mhhe.com/anthony13e
Accounting: Text & Cases is a product of lifelong dedication to the
discipline of accounting. Covering both financial and managerial accounting as well as broader managerial issues, the book incorporates
a breadth of experience that is sure to enrich your course and your
students. The approximately 109 cases that make up most of the end
of chapter material are combination of classic Harvard style cases and
extended problems, with 12 complete new cases added to the 13th
edition. The text is covered as two parts. Part 1 deals with chapters
1 -14 which cover financial accounting, while part 2 covers Chapters
15-28 which in essence is associated with management accounting.
The tale end of part 2 also focuses on broader issues of control and
corporate strategy. Both parts have been updated to reflect the current changes relevant to Accounting.
2012 (January 2011) / 1120 pages
ISBN: 9780078110863
www.mhhe.com/revsine5e
Financial Reporting & Analysis (FR&A) by Revsine/Collins/Johnson/
Mittelstaedt emphasizes both the process of financial reporting and
the analysis of financial statements. This book employs a true “user”
perspective by discussing the contracting and decision implications of
accounting and this helps readers understand why accounting choices
matter and to whom. Revsine, Collins, Johnson, and Mittelstaedt train
their readers to be good financial detectives, able to read, use, and
interpret the statements and-most importantly understand how and
why managers can utilize the flexibility in GAAP to manipulate the
numbers for their own purposes. Significantly, the new edition emphasizes the differences and similarities between GAAP and IFRS,
which is a critical component of this course.
New to this edition
New Global Vantage Point sections have been added to most
chapters that
identify key differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRS
discuss financial statement excerpts of companies that follow
IFRS
summarize proposed new accounting standards issued by the
FASB and/or the IASB as part of their convergence project
References to both the FASB Accounting Standards Codification
TM and the underlying pre-Codification U.S. GAAP literature have
been added
All FASB and IASB standards, exposure drafts, and discussion
papers released through October 2010 have been covered
Discussion of the 2008 global financial crisis and how it affected
accounting measurements is included
New or updated company examples are incorporated throughout
the book
New and revised end-of-chapter materials including exercises,
problems, and cases tied to Global Vantage Points or to proposed
new FASB and IASB standards have been added
Contents
Chapter 1 The Economic and Institutional Setting for Financial
Reporting
Chapter 2 Accrual Accounting and Income Determination
Chapter 3 Additional Topics in Income Determination
Chapter 4 Structure of the Balance Sheet and Statement of Cash
Flows
Chapter 5 Essentials of Financial Statement Analysis
60
Accounting
Chapter 6 The Role of Financial Information in Valuation and Credit
Risk Assessment
Chapter 7 The Role of Financial Information in Contracting
Chapter 8 Receivables
Chapter 9 Inventories
Chapter 10 Long-Lived Assets
Chapter 11 Financial Instruments as Liabilities
Chapter 12 Financial Reporting for Leases
Chapter 13 Income Tax Reporting
Chapter 14 Pensions and Postretirement Benefits
Chapter 15 Financial Reporting for Owners’ Equity
Chapter 16 Intercorporate Equity Investments
Appendix Time Value of Money
Index
Other Accounting
NEW
*9780078136665*
FORENSIC ACCOUNTINg
and fraud examination
2nd Edition
By William Hopwood, George Richard Young
and Jay Leiner of Florida Atlantic UniversityBoca Raton
Management Control
2012 (April 2011) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780078136665
ISBN: 9780071289320 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hopwood2e
MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS
12th Edition
By Robert N Anthony, Harvard Business School and Vijay Govindarajan,
Dartmouth College
2007 (May 2006) / 784 pages
ISBN: 9780073100890 ISBN: 9780071254106 [IE]
Contents
Ch. 1 The Nature of Management Control Systems.
Part 1 The Management Control Environment.
Ch. 2 Understanding Strategy.
Ch. 3 Understanding Behavior in Organizations.
Ch. 4 Responsibility Centers: Revenue and Expense Centers.
Ch. 5 Profit Centers.
Ch. 6 Transfer Pricing.
Ch. 7 Measuring and Controlling Assets Employed.
Part 2 The Management Control Process.
Ch. 8 Strategic Planning.
Ch. 9 Budget Preparation.
Ch. 10 Analyzing Financial Performance Reports.
Ch. 11 Performance Measurement.
Ch. 12 Management Compensation.
Part 3 Variations in Management Control.
Ch. 13 Controls for Differentiated Strategies.
Ch. 14 Service Organizations.
Ch. 15 Multinational Organizations. Ch. 16 Management Control of
Projects
Grounded firmly in real-world practice, Forensic Accounting provides
the most comprehensive view of fraud investigation on the market.
Where other books focus almost entirely on auditing and financial reporting, Hopwood, Young, and Leiner include a vast range of civil and
criminal accounting fraud and related activities, from false business
valuations and employer fraud to information security and counterterrorism. The author team provide experience in fraud investigation
that lends the book real-world perspective unmatched by any other.
New to this edition
Coverage of the criminal justice system as it relates to accounting
is extensive, touching on areas such as forensic science, organized
crime, litigation support, and expert testimony.
In light of a general increase in the demand for fraud investigation
services, the second edition adds 5 new chapters relating to fraud
investigation processes.
A major distinction of the second edition is that it follows a
process-oriented approach. Flow charts are present throughout Part
II (Chapters 5-12) to graphically illustrate the sequence of steps followed in fraud investigations.
Contents
Part One: Introduction to Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
1. Introduction to Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination
2. The Forensic Accounting Legal Environment
3. Fundamentals 1: Accounting Information Systems
4. Fundamentals 2: The Auditing Environment
Part Two: Fraud Examination Theory, Practice, and Methods
5. Fraud Prevention and Risk Management
6. Fraud Detection
7. The Fraud Investigation and Engagement Processes
8. The Evidence Collection Process
9. Fraud Examination Evidence I: Physical, Documentary, and Observational Evidence
10. Fraud Examination Evidence II: Interview and Interrogation
Methods
11. Fraud Examination III: Forensic Science and Computer Forensics
12. The Fraud Report, Litigation, and the Recovery Process
Part Three: Occupational and Organizational Fraud
13. Employee, Vendor, and Other Frauds against the Organization
14. Financial Statement Fraud
15. Fraud and SOX Compliance
Part Four: Specialized Fraud Areas
61
Accounting
16. Tax Fraud
17. Bankruptcy, Divorce, Identity Theft, and Loan and Insurance Fraud
18. Organized Crime, Counterterrorism, and Antimoney-Laundering
Part Five: Other Forensic Accounting Services
19. Business Valuation
20. Dispute Resolution Services
ETHICAL OBLIGATIONS AND DECISIONMAKING IN ACCOUNTING
Text and Cases, 2nd Edition
By Steven M Mintz, Claremont McKenna College and Roselyn Morris,
Texas State University-San Marcos
2011 (October 2010) / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780078025280
www.mhhe.com/mintz2e
The overriding philosophy of this text is that the ethical obligations
of accountants and auditors are best understood in the context of
professional responsibilities including one’s role in the corporate
governance system, the requirements of financial reporting, the audit
function, obligations to prevent and detect fraud, and legal liabilities.
Ethical Obligations and Decision Making in Accounting was written
to guide accountants past a scandal filled age. Our book is entirely
devoted to helping students cultivate the ethical commitment needed
to ensure that their work meets the highest standards of integrity,
independence, and objectivity. Ethical Obligations and Decision Making in Accounting is designed to provide the instructor with the best
flexibility and pedagogical effectiveness of any book on the market.
To that end, it includes numerous features designed to make both
learning and teaching easier.
Contents
Chapter 1 – Ethical Reasoning: Implications for Accounting
Chapter 2 – Accountants’ Ethical Decision Process and Professional
Judgment
Chapter 3 – Corporate Governance and Ethical Management
Chapter 4 – AICPA Code of Professional Conduct
Chapter 5 – Audit Responsibilities and Accounting Fraud
Chapter 6 – Legal and Regulatory Obligations in an Ethical Framework
Chapter 7 – Earnings Management and the Quality of Financial
Reporting
Chapter 8 – International Financial Reporting: Ethics and Corporate
Governance Considerations
Major Cases
ACCOUNTING AND BOOKKEEPING
Principles and Practice
By Association of Accounting Technicians AAT and David Willis
ISBN: 9780071013932 (with Workbook)
www.mhhe.com/au/bookkeeping
Accounting and Bookkeeping Principles and Practice provides a
complete course for Certificate IV Financial Services (Bookkeeping)
in the FNS10 Financial Services Training Package. It covers all the
main requirements of the Tax Practitioners Board to enable registration
as a provider of BAS services in Australia. This text is also a useful
resource for students of a wide range of introductory accounting
courses. Featuring a student-friendly writing style and a wealth of
exercises, this is the perfect text for VET-level bookkeeping students.
Contents
Introduction BSBFIA401A
Source documents and Goods and Services Tax (GST) BSBFIA401A,
FNSBKPG402A, FNSBKPG404A
62
Cash & credit journals BSBFIA401A
General journal entries BSBFIA401A
Postings to ledger accounts and the trial balance BSBFIA401A
Accounting for debtors and creditors, accruals and subsidiary ledgers
FSACCT302A, FNSBKPG403A
Trial tests No. 1 and No. 2
Prepare Business Activity Statements for GST and Income Tax instalments FNSBKPG404A
Controls over cash and a petty cash system FNSBKPG402A
Bank reconciliations FNSBKPG404A
Establish and maintain a manual payroll system FNSBKPG405A
Maintain inventory records FNSACCT405A
Register of Property and maintaining asset records BSBFIA401A
Establish and maintain an accrual accounting system, including balance adjustments BSBFIA401A
Worksheets, the Revenue Statement and the Balance Sheet BSBFIA401A
Trial tests
AND ACCOUNTING
4th Edition
By Joel J Lerner, Sulivan County Community College and Rajul Gokarn
ISBN: 9780071635363
Contents
6. Computer Application: Peachtree Complete® Software Introduction
8. The Cash Journal
15. Payroll
17. The Partnership
18. The Corporation
63
Bank Management..............................................................................................95
Behavioral Finance..............................................................................................97
Business Finance................................................................................................83
Cases in Corporate Finance................................................................................87
Derivatives / Futures & Options...........................................................................91
Finance for the Non-Financial Managers..........................................................101
Financial Institutions and Markets.......................................................................93
Financial Institutions Management......................................................................93
Financial Planning...............................................................................................97
Financial System...............................................................................................103
International Financial Management...................................................................96
Investments - Graduate.......................................................................................87
Investments - Supplementary..............................................................................86
Investments - Textbooks......................................................................................83
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Graduate......................................................79
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Supplements................................................77
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Textbooks.....................................................65
Mathematics of Finance....................................................................................102
Money and Capital Markets.................................................................................89
Personal Finance................................................................................................98
Portfolio Management.........................................................................................90
Professional References...................................................................................106
Real Estate Finance / Investment.....................................................................106
Real Estate Principles, Analysis & Management...............................................105
Risk Management.............................................................................................102
Upper Division Insurance..................................................................................105
New Titles
2013
Author
ISBN
Page
Bank Management & Financial Services, 9e
Rose
9780078034671
95
Ross9780077479459
65
Ross
9780078034633
66
Personal Finance
Walker
9780073530659
98
2012
Author
ISBN Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 7e
Brealey
9780078034640
67
Cornett
9780073530673
68
M: Finance
Cornett
9780073382241
69
Eun
9780078034657
96
Fundamentals of Cororate Finance, 5e [UK Adaptation]
Firer
9780077134525
71
Higgins
9780078034688
71, 101
Hirt
9780078034626
83
Jordan
9780073530710
83
Personal Finance, 10e
Kapoor
9780073530697
99
Saunders
9780078034664
93
2011
Author
ISBN Financial Mathematics for Actuaries [Asian Pub]
Chan
9780071288934
102
Managing Your Personal Finance [Asian Pub]
Chan
9780071078863
100
Hillier
9780077129422
72
Hillier
9780077125257
73
Khan
9780071067850
73, 80
Futures and Options [Asian Pub]
Parameswaran
9780071313643
91
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: An Asian Perspective [Asian Pub]
Ross
9780071088022
74
Sasidharan
9780071078016
90
Shashikant
9780071333481
85
Page
64
Page
Finance, Insurance & Real Estate
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Textbooks
NEW
*9780077479459*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
CORPORATE FINANCE
Alternate Edition, 10th Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass institute of Tech,
Randolph W Westerfield, University of Southern
California and Bradford D Jordan, University of
Kentucky-Lexington
2013 (January 2012) / 992 pages
ISBN: 9780077479459 (Alternate Edition)
The best-selling Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (FCF) has three
basic themes that are the central focus of the book:
1) An emphasis on intuition—the authors separate and explain the
principles at work on a common sense, intuitive level before launching into any specifics.
2) A unified valuation approach—net present value (NPV) is treated
as the basic concept underlying corporate finance.
3) A managerial focus—the authors emphasize the role of the financial
manager as decision maker, and they stress the need for managerial
input and judgment.
NEW! Interactive Applications stimulate critical thinking and reinforce key concepts, and students receive immediate feedback and
can track their progress in their own report. Students will be asked
to “click and drag” specific choices to make decisions, categorize,
or put in a time sequence, and then are asked multiple-choice questions to confirm understanding of the key concepts of the activity.
assigned problems
learning objective.
Connect Plus Finance. This packaging option combines all the
great features of Connect Finance, along with access to an online
version of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 10e, so that students
can easily refer back to the text for review and guidance. This media
rich e-book links directly to tutorials and online resources.
Excel Master for Fundamentals of Corporate Finance. This supplement, free to students and delivered from the text’s website, goes
far beyond existing spreadsheet tutorials. It expertly demonstrates to
students how to use the most powerful tools in Excel to do professional
quality financial analysis. Excel Master is fully integrated with the
textbook such that every suitable topic in the text is covered in depth.
The result is that students end up learning corporate finance and
spreadsheet techniques at the same time. New to this edition, icons
in the sidebar identify concepts and skills covered in this program.
The Tenth Edition continues the tradition of excellence that has earned
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance its status as market leader. Every
chapter has been updated to provide the most current examples that
reflect corporate finance in today’s world. The supplements package
has been updated and improved, and with the enhanced Connect
Finance and Excel Master, student and instructor support has never
been stronger.
Self Quiz and Study end-of-chapter feature. This new end-ofchapter feature gives students a quick overview of what resources
are available in McGraw-Hill Connect’s Self Quiz and Study program.
Students get a glimpse of practice questions, the additional assets
available to help students study and master the content, and the address to log on for more practice. This can be a great way to engage
your Connect-using students in Corporate Finance!
New to this edition
Updated Topic Coverage:
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance offers a number of powerful
tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so you
can spend more time teaching. Students can engage with their
coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning process
more accessible and efficient. In short, Connect Finance facilitates
student learning and optimizes your time and energies, enabling you
to focus on course content, teaching, and student learning. Connect
for Ross/Westerfield/Jordan has been expanded with new learning
Chapter 3 – defines enterprise value (EV) and discusses the widely
used EV-EBITDA ratio, and includes new end of chapter questions
on industry-specific ratios and EV-EBITDA ratio
Chapter 8 – a new section illustrates using PE and price/sales ratios
for equity valuation. More than ten new end-of-chapter problems
reflect this new content.
Chapter 23 - new material on enterprise risk management (ERM)
and the use of insurance as an RM tool.
See book preface for a complete list of changes
improvement.
Questions mapped to AACSB skill areas, Bloom’s Taxonomy levels,
and difficulty level enable you to run reports that assess specific
learning outcomes.
CONTENTS
Part One: Overview of Corporate Finance
Chapter 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance
Chapter 2: Financial Statements, Taxes, and Cash Flow
Part Two: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
Chapter 3: Working with Financial Statements
Chapter 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Growth
Part Three: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Chapter 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money
Chapter 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
Chapter 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
Chapter 8: Stock Valuation
Part Four: Capital Budgeting
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment
Criteria
65
Chapter 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation
Part Five: Risk and Return
Chapter 12: Some Lessons from Capital Market History
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line
Part Six: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
Chapter 14: Cost of Capital
Chapter 15: Raising Capital
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy
Chapter 17: Dividends and Payout Policy
Part Seven: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
Chapter 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning
Chapter 19: Cash and Liquidity Management
Chapter 20: Credit and Inventory Management
Part Eight: Topics in Corporate Finance
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance
Chapter 22: Behavioral Finance: Implications for Financial Management
Chapter 23: Enterprise Risk Management
Chapter 24: Options and Corporate Finance
Chapter 25: Option Valuation
Chapter 26: Mergers and Acquisitions
Chapter 27: Leasing
NEW
*9780078034633*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
CORPORATE FINANCE
Standard Edition, 10th Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass institute of Tech,
Randolph W Westerfield, University of Southern
California and Bradford D Jordan, University of
Kentucky-Lexington
2013 (January 2012) / 800 pages
ISBN: 9780078034633 (Standard Edition)
www.mhhe.com/rwjfund10e
The best-selling Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (FCF) has three
basic themes that are the central focus of the book:
1) An emphasis on intuition—the authors separate and explain the
principles at work on a common sense, intuitive level before launching into any specifics.
more accessible and efficient. In short, Connect Finance facilitates
student learning and optimizes your time and energies, enabling you
to focus on course content, teaching, and student learning. Connect
for Ross/Westerfield/Jordan has been expanded with new learning
improvement.
learning outcomes.
NEW! Interactive Applications stimulate critical thinking and reinforce key concepts, and students receive immediate feedback and
can track their progress in their own report. Students will be asked
to “click and drag” specific choices to make decisions, categorize,
or put in a time sequence, and then are asked multiple-choice questions to confirm understanding of the key concepts of the activity.
assigned problems
learning objective.
version of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 10e, so that students
can easily refer back to the text for review and guidance. This media
rich e-book links directly to tutorials and online resources.
input and judgment.
Excel Master for Fundamentals of Corporate Finance. This supplement, free to students and delivered from the text’s website, goes
far beyond existing spreadsheet tutorials. It expertly demonstrates to
students how to use the most powerful tools in Excel to do professional
quality financial analysis. Excel Master is fully integrated with the
textbook such that every suitable topic in the text is covered in depth.
The result is that students end up learning corporate finance and
spreadsheet techniques at the same time. New to this edition, icons
in the sidebar identify concepts and skills covered in this program.
The Tenth Edition continues the tradition of excellence that has earned
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance its status as market leader. Every
chapter has been updated to provide the most current examples that
reflect corporate finance in today’s world. The supplements package
has been updated and improved, and with the enhanced Connect
Finance and Excel Master, student and instructor support has never
been stronger.
Self Quiz and Study end-of-chapter feature. This new end-ofchapter feature gives students a quick overview of what resources
are available in McGraw-Hill Connect’s Self Quiz and Study program.
Students get a glimpse of practice questions, the additional assets
available to help students study and master the content, and the address to log on for more practice. This can be a great way to engage
your Connect-using students in Corporate Finance!
New to this edition
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance offers a number of powerful
tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so you
can spend more time teaching. Students can engage with their
coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning process
Chapter 3 – defines enterprise value (EV) and discusses the widely
used EV-EBITDA ratio, and includes new end of chapter questions
on industry-specific ratios and EV-EBITDA ratio
Chapter 8 – a new section illustrates using PE and price/sales ratios
for equity valuation. More than ten new end-of-chapter problems
2) A unified valuation approach—net present value (NPV) is treated
as the basic concept underlying corporate finance.
66
reflect this new content.
Chapter 23 - new material on enterprise risk management (ERM)
and the use of insurance as an RM tool.
See book preface for a complete list of changes
CONTENTS
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment
Criteria
NEW
*9780078034640*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
CORPORATE FINANCE
7th Edition
By Richard A Brealey, London Business School,
Stewart C Myers, Mass Institute of Tech and
Alan J Marcus, Boston College
ISBN: 9780078034640
ISBN: 9780071314749 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/bmm7e
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, by Brealey, Myers and Marcus,
provides students with a solid framework of theory and application to
use well after they complete the course. This author team is known
for their outstanding research, teaching efforts, and world-renowned
finance textbooks, so it’s no surprise that they provide clear exposition
of difficult material without sacrificing up-to-date, technically correct
treatments. The seventh edition has been fully updated to reflect
recent events and is now available with Connect Finance!
New to this edition
McGraw-Hill Connect Finance
Connect Finance offers a number of powerful tools and features to
make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time
teaching. Students can engage with their coursework anytime and
anywhere, making the learning process more accessible and efficient.
In short, Connect Finance facilitates student learning and optimizes
your time and energies, enabling you to focus on course content,
teaching, and student learning.
improvement.
learning outcomes.
learning objective.
Guided Examples offer online student tutorials at the problem level.
They present a similar problem using either formulas, calculator, or
Excel, next to the homework problem to help students understand
how to move forward.
Prep Courses, comprised of animated tutorial modules with quiz
questions, cover the subjects of Statistics, Math, Accounting,
and Economics, and are intended to make sure students are up
to speed on these key concepts before exposing them to more
complex subjects.
version of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, linked to additional
study features, so that students can easily refer back to the text for
review and guidance.
To reflect the increased attention on agency theory and behavioral
finance, the material on efficient markets in Chapter 7 (Valuing
Stocks) now includes a section on price bubbles as well as a discussion of behavioral biases. Other topics that receive increased
emphasis include company valuation, real options, and stock
repurchases.
There are plenty of references in this edition to the crisis of 20072009 and its impact on financial managers, and there are also
many less dramatic examples of recent changes in the financial
landscape. For example, Chapter 3 (Accounting and Finance)
includes a discussion of SOX, of mark-to-market accounting, and
of recent developments in international accounting standards.
All statistics have been updated when appropriate, including
measures of EVA, data on security ownership, bond yields, and
dividend and repurchase payouts.
Improved Flow:
• Chapter 4 emphasizes how financial ratios are used in measuring
the value management has added to a firm. This context prevents
the chapter from becoming a tedious list of ratios. This introduction
prevents the chapter from becoming a tedious list of ratios.
The discussion of the internal rate of return and its pitfalls in
Chapter 8 (Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria) has
been reworked to make the discussion of IRR flow more easily.
Spreadsheet Solutions Boxes demonstrate how students may
use Microsoft Excel to perform useful financial calculations demonstrate how students may use Microsoft Excel to perform useful
financial calculations. Questions have been added at the end of
each box so students can perform their own similar analysis to make
67
sure they understand the concept. Students who need assistance
in using Microsoft Excel can refer to the student side of the Online
Learning Center that contains a detailed Excel tutorial with spreadsheet templates.
NEW
Contents
Part One Introduction
1 Goals and Governance of the Firm
2 Financial Markets and Institutions
3 Accounting and Finance
4 Measuring Corporate Performance
Part Two Value
5 The Time Value of Money
6 Valuing Bonds
7 Valuing Stocks
8 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
9 Using Discounted Cash-Flow Analysis to Make Investment Decisions
10 Project Analysis
Part Three Risk
11 Introduction to Risk, Return, and the Opportunity Cost of Capital
12 Risk, Return, and Capital Budgeting
13 The Weighted-Average Cost of Capital and Company Valuation
Part Four Financing
14 Introduction to Corporate Financing
15 How Corporations Raise Venture Capital and Issue Securities
Part Five Debt and Payout Policy
16 Debt Policy
17 Payout Policy
Part Six Financial Analysis and Planning
18 Long-Term Financial Planning
19 Short-Term Financial Planning
20 Working Capital Management
Part Seven Special Topics
21 Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Control
22 International Financial Management
23 Options
24 Risk Management
Part Eight Conclusion
25 What We Do and Do Not Know about Finance
Appendix A
Appendix B
Glossary
Credits
Global Index
Index
68
*9780073530673*
FINANCE: APPLICATIONS
AND THEORY
2nd Edition
By Marcia Millon Cornett, Boston University,
Troy Adair, Wilkes University and John Nofsinger, Washington State Univesity-Pullman
2012 (October 2011) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780073530673
ISBN: 9780071314862 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/can2e
It’s About Time! Finally, there’s a corporate finance book that incorporates the newest technology to facilitate the learning process, saving
time for instructors and students. The Second Edition continues to
provide the core topics for the course, highlighting personal examples
just as instructors do during their class. New to this edition are unique
Quick Response (QR) codes that enable students with smartphones
to instantly access online help or explore topics further without ever
leaving their page in the book. With Connect PlusTM Finance, students can take self-graded practice quizzes, homework assignments,
or tests, making the learning process more accessible and efficient. An
integrated, printable eBook is also included in the package, allowing
for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Isn’t it time to get the
most out of a corporate finance text?
New to this edition
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance for Cornett/Adair/Nofsinger has
been expanded and improved. Connect Finance offers a number of
powerful tools and features to make managing assignments easier,
so you can spend more time teaching. Students can engage with their
coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning process more
accessible and efficient. In short, Connect Finance facilitates student
learning and optimizes your time and energies, enabling you to focus
on course content, teaching, and student learning.
improvement.
learning outcomes.
Guided Examples offer online student tutorials at the problem
level. They present a similar problem using formulas, calculator, or
learning objective.
Prep Courses, comprised of animated tutorial modules with quiz
questions, cover the subjects of Statistics, Math, Accounting,
and Economics, and are intended to make sure students are up
to speed on these key concepts before exposing them to more
complex subjects.
version of Finance, 2e, so that students can easily refer back to the
text for review and guidance. This media rich e-book links directly to
tutorials and online resources.
Chapter Reorganization: Based on feedback from users and
reviewers, the authors revised the Second Edition to follow instructors’
teaching strategy even more closely.
Understanding Financial Markets and Institutions has been moved
from Chapter 8 to Chapter 6, to now precede the discussion of
stocks and bonds.
Addressing Working Capital Policies and Managing Short-Term
Assets and Liabilities (previously Chapter 17) has been moved
adjacent to Chapter 13, Weighing Net Present Value and Other
Capital Budgeting Criteria, for better tie-in with previous discussions
of cash flows and capital budgeting techniques.
Financial Planning and Forecasting, previously a Web chapter, has
been moved to the book as Chapter 15.
Assessing Long-Term Debt, Equity, and Capital Structure (previously Chapter 14) has been moved adjacent to Financial Planning
and Forecasting to build on the idea of altering capital structure in
light of previous discussions of forecasting.
Part VI: Capital Budgeting
Chapter 11: Calculating the Cost of Capital
Chapter 12: Estimating Cash Flows on Capital Budgeting Projects
Chapter 13: Weighing Net Present Value and Other Capital Budgeting Criteria
Part VII: Capital Structure Issues
Chapter 14: Addressing Working Capital and Managing Short-Term
Assets and Liabilities
Chapter 15: Financial Planning and Forecasting
Chapter 16: Assessing Long-term Debt, Equity, and Capital Structure
Chapter 17: Sharing Firm Wealth: Dividends, Share Repurchases
and Other Payouts
Chapter 18: Issuing Capital and the Investment Banking Process
Part VIII: Other Topics in Finance
Chapter 19: Considering International Aspects of Corporate Finance
Chapter 20: Managing Mergers and Acquisitions and Financial
Distress
NEW
New to the Second Edition, Quick Response (QR) codes enable
students with smartphones to go directly to the Guided Example from
the actual page in the book.
Viewpoints Extended expands on the popular Viewpoints feature
from 1e (see retained features below), and leverages a variety of
media to provide an alternate look at each personal application raised.
Word forms of selected formulas have been added before the
number form to provide an intuitive bridge for a variety of learning
styles.
Numbered examples have been cross-referenced to similar endof-chapter problems so students can easily model their homework.
More than half of the numbers in the end-of-chapter problems
have been updated to provide variety and limit the transfer of answers
from previous classes.
Every chapter has been revised and updated to reflect the latest
data and ideas in Corporate Finance. A detailed chapter by chapter
change list is available by request.
Contents
Part I: Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction to Financial Management
Part II: Financial Statements
Chapter 2: Reviewing Financial Statements
Chapter 3: Analyzing Financial Statements
Part III: Valuing of Future Cash Flows
Chapter 4: Time Value of Money 1: Analyzing Single Cash Flows
Chapter 5: Time Value of Money 2: Analyzing Annuity Cash Flows
Part IV: Valuing of Bonds and Stocks
Chapter 6 Understanding Financial Markets and Institutions
Chapter 7 Valuing Bonds
Chapter 8 Valuing Stocks
Part V: Risk and Return
Chapter 9: Characterizing Risk and Return
Chapter 10: Estimating Risk and Return
*9780073382241*
M: FINANCE
Guided Examples provide online tutorials in short video format
for each numbered Example in the book. There are five tutorials per
Example:
One that talks through how to solve the example in the book;
One that talks through a similar example and stops at decision
points where students choose the next step;
Two that show how to solve the problem using two different financial calculators;
One that shows how to solve the problem in Excel.
By Marcia Millon Cornett, Boston University,
Troy Adair, Wilkes University and John Nofsinger, Washington State Univesity-Pullman
2012 (January 2011) / 368 pages
ISBN: 9780073382241
ISBN: 9780077506056 (with Connect Plus)
www.mhhe.com/canM
M: Finance is a market-driven corporate finance book with the latest
in teaching and learning tools – all at an affordable price! With M:
Finance , students receive a cost-effective, easy to read, focused text
complete with study resources (both print and online) to help them
review for tests and apply chapter concepts. Professors receive a text
that contains all the pertinent information--yet in a more condensed
format that is easier to cover. In addition, online gradable assignments
are provided to utilize the power of the web, making projects more fun
for students and automatically grade materials to support instructors.
Features
Connect Finance offers a number of powerful tools and features
to make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more
time teaching. Students can engage with their coursework anytime
and anywhere, making the learning process more accessible and
efficient. In short, Connect Finance facilitates student learning and
optimizes your time and energies, enabling you to focus on course
content, teaching, and student learning.
improvement.
learning outcomes.
69
learning objective.
Guided Examples offer online student tutorials at the problem level.
They present a similar problem using either formulas, calculator, or
version of M: Finance, linked to additional study features, so that
students can easily refer back to the text for review and guidance.
Student friendly design: M: Finance was written and designed
with today’s student reader in mind.
The layout and design provides the visual stimulation they’ve
come to expect.
The content was written to focus on the key concepts only.
Pop-up quotes, marginal key terms/definitions, and callouts that
feature interesting and important facts are used throughout the
chapters to capture students’ attention.
The examples provided have been selected for greater student
appeal.
The book’s framework reflects the way instructors today teach
the course, emphasizing three themes:
Finance is about Solving Problems and Decision-Making
Finance can be taught using the Personal Perspective
Finance is about connecting Core Concepts
Solving Problems and Decision-Making:
Interactive Examples: Online tutorials in short video format for each
numbered Example in the book.
There are five tutorials per Example:
One that talks through how to solve the example in the book;
One that talks through a similar example and stops at decision
points and students choose the next step;
Two that show how to solve the problem using two different financial calculators;
One that shows how to solve the problem in Excel.
Interactive Examples can be found on the text website at www.
mhhe.com/canm and within Connect Finance. Additionally, students can use their web-enabled, camera smartphone to “click” on
the QR codes they see throughout the book to bring them directly
to the appropriate video! They’re also available within Connect to
help students solve the problems.
End of Chapter Problems: A large quantity of end-of-chapter
problems are organized so that every odd-numbered problem is
mirrored by a similar even-numbered problem. This gives instructors two different sets of similar problems to assign to different
sections or work in class.
“Math Coach” boxes: coach students in avoiding the most commonly-made mistakes in a particular problem.
Called-out examples detail the solution to a key problem or concept
in the chapter.
Calculator Keystrokes are included in the margin next to these
examples if applicable, showing a quick snapshot of how to solve
the problem. This feature can easily be skipped if calculators are
not used for this class.
Self-Test Problems with Solutions are are available on the text
Website so students can test themselves before diving into the
homework.
AnIntegrated Mini-Case is available for each chapter on the text
Website, combining the concepts learned into a more integrative
problem to help students understand how everything ties together.
Formula Review Cards for key chapters are perforated to create
convenient study tools for students or can be used as exam “cheat
sheets,” if the instructor chooses
Personal Perspective:
The “Viewpoints” feature: at the beginning of each chapter illustrates a business perspective of the upcoming topics and is mirrored by a personal perspective. This immediately sets a context
for the chapter and allows instructors to take class discussion in
70
either direction. The Viewpoints Revisited feature in the book’s
appendix provides a possible answer to the scenario and connects
the students back to the original goals of the chapter.
Select called-out Examples throughout the book will have a
personal perspective to continue the theme throughout the book.
Some end-of-chapter problems will also have personal perspectives, so students will be able to solve problems in both business
and personal contexts.
Connecting Core Concepts:
Learning Goals begin each chapter and are tied to end-of-chapter
problems. This helps the student follow the building of concepts,
and also helps instructors develop their class and assign readings
and homework based on these goals. The Test Bank is also labeled
with Learning Goals.
Finance at Work boxes highlight current events and hot topics
noted in the news, and include a Want to Know More? feature with
suggested words to use for searching the Internet for updates.
These are great for use during class for discussion or outside of
class as homework assignments.
Time Out! boxes are featured at the end of each section and test
students’ understanding of key terms and core concepts. Answers
to the Time Out! questions appear on the text Website.
Tables and Figures illustrate the material visually to help students
apply what they are learning and connecting concepts both within
and across chapters.
Questions are featured at the end of each chapter, and can be used
for discussion in-class to review chapter concepts or as homework.
The “Research It!” feature is found on the text website and is an
assignable project that requires students to research the web for
data and other information to answer the questions.
Minicases can also be found on the book Website.
Contents
1. Introduction to Financial Management
2. Reviewing Financial Statements
3. Analyzing Financial Statements
4. Time Value of Money 1: Analyzing Single Cash Flows
5. Time Value of Money 2: Analyzing Annuity Cash Flows
6. Valuing Bonds
7. Valuing Stocks
8. Understanding Financial Markets and Institutions
9. Characterizing Risk and Return
10. Estimating Risk and Return
11. Calculating the Cost of Capital
12. Estimating Cash Flows on Capital Budgeting Projects
13. Weighing Net Present value and Other Capital Budgeting Criteria
14. Addressing Working Capital Policies and Managing Short-Term
Assets and Liabilities
UK Adaptation
NEW
*9780077134525*
fundamentals of corporate finance
NEW
5th Edition
*9780078034688*
ANALYSIS FOR FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
By Collin Firer, University of Cape Town, Stephen A. Ross, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Randolph W. Westerfield, University of Southern
California and Bradford D. Jordan, University of Kentucky
2012 (June 2012)
ISBN: 9780077134525
10th Edition
By Robert Higgins, University of Washington
This South African edition of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance
provides a modern, unified treatment of South African corporate
financial management. The managerial focus prepares students for
the pragmatic decision making and judgement needed as a Financial
Manager, including guidance on avoiding possible pitfalls.
ISBN: 9780078034688
ISBN: 9780071086486 [IE]
NEW TO THIS EDITION
www.mhhe.com/higgins10e
New chapter on Behavioural Finance introduces students to
the cutting-edge study of the reasoning errors that can lead to poor
decisions – and how to avoid them.
Analysis for Financial Management, 10e presents standard techniques
and modern developments in a practical and intuitive manner with an
emphasis on the managerial applications of financial analysis. It is
intended for non-financial managers and business students interested
in the practice of financial management.
Thoroughly updated to include the impact of the Companies Act
and current IFRS terminology.
Use of colour in the page design – engaging presentation.
A mini case in every chapter, several of which are based on
S&S Air, supporting an integrated understanding of corporate finance
CONTENTS
Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
Chapter 2: Financial Statements, Taxes and Cash Flow
Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Chapter 8: Share Valuation
Part 4: Capital Budgeting
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
Part 5: Risk and Return
Chapter 13: Return, Risk and the Security Market Line
Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy
Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
Chapter 19: Current Asset Management
Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
Chapter 21: Behavioural Finance
Chapter 22: Risk Management: An Introduction to Financial Engineering
Chapter 25: Leasing
Appendix A Mathematical Tables
Appendix B Key Equations
Appendix C Answers to End-of-Chapter Problems
New to this edition
Discussion of relevant aspects of the recent financial crisis,
with emphasis on the possible roles played by the efficient market
hypothesis, fair value accounting, and the financial rating agencies
in precipitating the crisis.
The examination of Kraft Foods Corporation’s $23 billion hostile
takeover of British confectioner Cadbury Plc, including the role played
by activist investor Nelson Peltz.
Expanded coverage of real options analysis, including decision
trees.
An update of the empirical evidence on corporate restructuring
and shareholder value creation.
The use of Sensient Technologies Corporation (SXT), the world’s
largest food and beverage color company, as an extended example
throughout the book.
Fresh examples throughout the text, including new company examples and updated data to keep the text at the forefront of currency.
Contents
Part I: Assessing the Financial Health of the Firm
Chapter 1: Interpreting Financial Statements
Chapter 2: Evaluating Financial PerformanceAppendix: International
Differences in Financial Structure
Part II: Planning Future Financial Performance
Chapter 3: Financial Forecasting
Chapter 4: Managing Growth
Part III: Financing Operations
Chapter 5: Financial Instruments and Markets
Appendix: Using Financial Instruments to Manage Risks
Chapter 6: The Financing Decision
Appendix: The Irrelevance Proposition
Part IV: Evaluating Investment Opportunities
Chapter 7: Discounted Cash Flow Techniques
Appendix: Mutually Exclusive Alternatives and Capital Rationing
Chapter 8: Risk Analysis in Investment Decisions
Appendix: Asset Beta and Adjusted Present Value
Chapter 9: Business Valuation and Corporate Restructuring
Appendix: The Venture Capital Method of Valuation
Appendix A: Present Value of $1
Appendix B: Present Value of an Annuity of $1
Glossary
Suggested Answers to Odd-Numbered End-of-Chapter Problems
71
Global edition
FOUNDATIONS OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT WITH TIME VALUE OF
MONEY CARD
UK Adaptation
NEW
By Stanley B Block, Texas Christian University, Geoffrey A Hirt, DePaul
University and Bartley Danielson, North Carolina State University
2011 (October 2010) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780077454432
ISBN: 9780071220644 [GE] - Pub April 2011
Contents
Part 1. Introduction
1. The Goals and Functions of Financial Management
Part 2. Financial Analysis and Planning
2. Review of Accounting
3. Financial Analysis
4. Financial Forecasting
5. Operating and Financial Leverage
Part 3. Working Capital Management
6. Working Capital and the Financing Decision
7. Current Asset Management
8. Sources of Short-Term Financing
Part 4. The Capital Budgeting Process
9. The Time Value of Money
10. Valuation and Rates of Return
11. Cost of Capital
12. The Capital Budgeting Decision
13. Risk and Capital Budgeting
Part 5. Long-Term Financing
14. Capital Markets
15. Investment Banking: Public and Private Placement
16. Long-Term Debt and Lease Financing
17. Common and Preferred Stock Financing
18. Dividend Policy and Retained Earnings
19. Convertibles, Warrants and Derivatives
Part 6. Expanding the Perspective of Corporate Finance
20. External Growth through Mergers
21. International Financial Management
72
*9780077129422*
financial markets and
corporate stragegy
14th Edition
Foundations of Financial Management has built a loyal following due
to its strong real-world emphasis, clear writing style, and step-bystep explanations that simplify difficult concepts. The text focuses
on the “nuts and bolts” of finance with clear and thorough treatment
of concepts and applications. In addition to completing the textbook
revisions, Block, Hirt, and Danielsen also revise all end of chapter
problems and complete the solutions themselves. The authors know
what works and what doesn’t work for students, and they have consistently maintained a high quality textbook that is responsive to the
demands of the marketplace.
2nd Edition
By David Hillier, University of Strathclyde, Mark
Grinblatt, University of California-Los Agneles
and Sheridan Titman, University of Texas at
Austin
ISBN: 9780077129422
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/hillier
The second European edition of Financial Markets and Corporate
Strategy provides comprehensive coverage of financial markets and
corporate finance, brought to life by real world examples, cases and
insights. Placed in a truly international context, this new and updated
edition takes an academic and practical view-point to guide students
through the challenges of studying and practicing finance. Aimed
specifically at an international audience, this edition boasts hundreds
of references to new and relevant non-US research papers from top
finance journals. Whilst retaining the well respected structure of the
successful US text, Professor David Hillier has also made a number
of additions which include:
Fully updated research, data and examples in every chapter.
Coverage of the global financial crisis, the impact it made on the
financial markets and the lessons being learnt by the finance
industry.
A stronger emphasis on corporate governance and agency theory.
Updates on accounting standards, bankruptcy laws, tax rules and
tax systems.
Contents
Part I. Financial Markets and Financial Instruments
1. Raising Capital
2. Debt Financing
3. Equity Financing
Part II. Valuing Financial Assets
4. Portfolio Tools
5. Mean-Variance Analysis and the Capital Asset Pricing Model
6. Factor Models and the Arbitrage Pricing Theory
7. Pricing Derivatives
8. Options
Part III. Valuing Real Assets
9. Discounting and Valuation
10. Investing in Risk-Free Projects
11. Investing in Risky Projects
12. Allocating Capital and Corporate Strategy
13. Corporate Taxes and the Impact of Financing On Real Asset
Valuation
Part IV. Capital Financial Structure
14. How Taxes Affect Financing Choices
15. How Taxes Affect Dividends and Share Repurchases
16. Bankruptcy Costs and Debt Holder-Equity Holder Conflicts
17. Capital Structure and Corporate Strategy
Part V. Incentives, Information, and Corporate Control
18. How Managerial Incentives Affects Financial Decisions
19. The Information Conveyed by Financial Decisions
20. Mergers and Acquisitions
Part VI. Risk Management
21. Risk Management and Corporate Strategy
22. The Practice of Hedging
23. Interest Rate Risk Management
NEW
*9780077125257*
NEW
Text, Problems and Cases,
6th Edition
By David Hillier, University of Strathclyde and
Iain Clacher, Leeds University
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/hillier
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 1st European Edition, brings
to life the modern-day core principles of corporate finance using a
problem solving approach. The book is an adaptation of the highly successful Fundamentals of Corporate Finance text by Ross, Westerfield
and Jordan and is aimed specifically at an international audience.
Features
More relevant coverage of regulatory frameworks, international
corporations and organizations.
A wealth of new examples and cases looking at corporate finance in action at well-known international companies such as BMW,
Google, Lloyds TSB, McDonalds, Louis Vuitton, Ryanair, Nokia and
many more.
Numerous opportunities to test your knowledge with Concept
Questions, Chapter Review and Self Test Problems, Concept Review
and Critical Thinking Questions, and Questions and Problems.
Contents
Chapter 2: Corporate Governance
Chapter 3: Financial Analysis and Planning
Part Two: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Chapter 4: Introduction To Valuation: The Time Value Of Money
Chapter 6: Bond Valuation
Chapter 7: Equity Valuation
Part Three: Capital Budgeting
Part Four: Risk and Return
Part Five: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
Part Six: Topics in Corporate Finance
Chapter 17: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
Chapter 19: Behavioral Finance
Chapter 20: Financial Risk Management
Chapter 22: Mergers & Acquisitions
*9780071067850*
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
FUNDAMENTALS OF
CORPORATE FINANCE
2011 (January 2011) / 752 pages
ISBN: 9780077125257
By M Y Khan, University of Delhi and PK Jain,
Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi
ISBN: 9780071067850
This new edition of Financial Management continues to emphasise on
the theories, concepts, and techniques that aid in corporate decision
making, Apart from updating the chapters with recent developments
in the subject, it presents to the readers several new cases and
examples, along with new-age tools like ‘excel’ for problem solving.
Contents
1. Financial Management – An Overview
3. Risk and Return
4. Valuation of Bonds and Shares
5. Cash-flow Statement
7. Volume-Cost-Profit Analysis
8. Budgeting and Profit Planning
9. Capital Budgeting I: Principles and Techniques
10. Capital Budgeting II: Additional Aspects
11. Concept and Measurement of Cost of Capital
12. Analysis of Risk and Uncertainty
13. Working Capital Management – An Overview
14. Management of Cash and Marketable Securities
15. Receivables Management
16. Inventory Management
17. Working Capital Management
18. Operating, Financial and Combined Leverage
19. Capital Structure, Cost of Capital and Valuation
20. Designing Capital Structure
21. Capital Markets
22. Equity / Ordinary Shares
23. Term Loans, Debentures/Bonds and Securitisation
24. Hybrid Financing / Instruments
25. Lease Financing and Hire-purchase Finance
26. Venture Capital Financing
27. Option Valuation
28. Derivatives: Managing Financial Risks
29. Corporate Governance
30. Dividend and Valuation
31. Determinants of Dividend Policy
33. Corporate Restructuring
34. Foreign Exchange Markets and Dealings
35. Foreign Exchange Exposure and Risk Management
73
Global edition
essentials of corporate finance
7th Edition
By Stephen A. Ross, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Randolph W.
Westerfield, University of Southern California and Bradford D Jordan,
University of Kentucky--Lexington
ISBN: 9780073382463
ISBN: 9780071314367 [GE with Connect]
www.mhhe.com/rwj
Essentials of Corporate Finance, 7th edition by Ross, Westerfield,
and Jordan is written to convey the most important concepts and principles of corporate finance at a level that is approachable for a wide
audience. The authors retain their modern approach to finance, but
have distilled the subject down to the essential topics in 18 chapters.
They believe that understanding the “why” is just as important, if not
more so, than understanding the “how,” especially in an introductory
course. Three basic themes emerge as their central focus:
1. An emphasis on intuition—separate and explain the principles
at work on a common sense, intuitive level before launching into
specifics. Underlying ideas are discussed first in general terms, then
followed by specific examples that illustrate in more concrete terms
how a financial manager might proceed in a given situation.
2. A unified valuation approach—Net Present Value is treated as the
basic concept underlying corporate finance. Every subject the authors
cover is firmly rooted in valuation, and care is taken to explain how
decisions have valuation effects.
Asian Adaptation
NEW
*9780071088022*
FUNDAMENTALS OF CORPORATE FINANCE
An Asian Perspective
By Stephen Ross, Randolph Westerfield, Bradford Jordan, Ruth Tan (National University of Singapore) and Joseph Lim (Singapore Management)
2011 (August 2011)
ISBN: 9780071088022
An Asian Adaptation
The best selling Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (FCF) is written
with one strongly held principle—that corporate finance should be
developed and taught in terms of a few integrated, powerful ideas.
As such, there are three basic themes that are the central focus of
the book:
1) An emphasis on intuition—underlying ideas are discussed in general terms and then by way of examples that illustrate in more concrete
terms how a financial manager might proceed in a given situation.
2) A unified valuation approach—net present value (NVP) is treated
as the basic concept underlying corporate finance. Every subject
covered is firmly rooted in valuation, and care is taken to explain how
particular decisions have valuation effects.
input and judgment.
3. A managerial focus—Students learn that financial management
concerns management. The role of financial manager as decision
maker is emphasized and they stress the need for managerial input
and judgment.
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: An Asian Perspective is an adaptation of Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 9th Edition, by Ross,
Westerfield and Jordan. This Asian edition continues the tradition of
excellence that has earned Fundamentals of Corporate Finance its
status as market leader. It aims to meet the significant gap for a book
with Asian examples and internationalized Asian content.
Contents
CONTENTS
Part I. Overview of Financial Management
Ch. 1 Introduction to Financial Management
Part 2. Understanding Financial Statements and Cash Flow
Ch. 2 Financial Statements, Taxes, and Cash Flow
Ch. 3 Working with Financial Statements
Part 3. Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Ch. 4 Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money
Ch. 5 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
Part 4. Valuing Stocks and Bonds
Ch. 6 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
Ch. 7 Equity Markets and Stock Valuation
Part 5. Capital Budgeting
Ch. 8 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
Ch. 9 Making Capital Investment Decisions
Part 6. Risk and Return
Ch. 10 Some Lessons from Capital Market History
Ch. 11 Risk and Return
Part 7. Long-Term Financing
Ch. 12 Cost of Capital
Ch. 13 Leverage and Capital Structure
Ch. 14 Dividends and Dividend Policy
Ch. 15 Raising Capital
Part 8. Short-Term Financial Management
Ch. 16 Short-Term Financial Planning
Ch. 17 Working Capital Management
Part 9. Topics in Business Finance
Ch. 18 International Aspects of Financial Management
Appendix A. Mathematical Tables
Appendix B. Key Equations
Appendix C. Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems
Appendix D. Using the HP-10B and TI BA II Plus Financial Calculators
PART 1 Overview of Corporate Finance
1 Introduction to Corporate Finance
2 Financial Statements, Taxes, and Cash Flow
PART 2 Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
3 Working with Financial Statements
4 Long-Term Financial Planning and Growth
PART 3 Valuation of Future Cash Flows
5 Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money
6 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
7 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
8 Stock Valuation
PART 4 Capital Budgeting
9 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
10 Making Capital Investment Decisions
11 Project Analysis and Evaluation
PART 5 Risk and Return
12 Some Lessons from Capital Market History
13 Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line
PART 6 Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14 Cost of Capital
15 Raising Capital
16 Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy
17 Dividends and Payout Policy
PART 7 Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18 Short-Term Finance and Planning
19 Cash and Liquidity Management
20 Credit and Inventory Management
PART 8 Topics in Corporate Finance
21 International Corporate Finance
22 Behavioral Finance: Implications for Financial Management
23 Risk Management: An Introduction to Financial Engineering
24 Options and Corporate Finance
25 Option Valuation
74
26 Mergers and Acquisitions
27 Leasing
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT FOR
BEGINNERS
3rd Edition
FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
5th Edition
By Pasanna Chandra
2010 (April 2010) / 592 pages
ISBN: 9780070700796
www.mhhe.com/chandraffm5e
This book discusses the fundamental principles and techniques
of financial management. Designed for the first course in financial
management, it is aimed at students of B.Com, BBM, M.Com, ICSI,
ICWAI, ICAI and MBA programmes.The chapter on ‘Basics of Capital
Budgeting’ has been expanded and structured into two chapters, viz.,
‘Techniques of Capital Budgeting’ and ‘Project Cash Flows’.Eleven
new sections have been added on the following topics: ‘Fundamental
Principle of Finance,’ ‘Regulatory Framework,’ ‘Profits versus Cash
Flow,’ ‘Standardised Financial Statement,’ ‘Additional Funding Needs,’
‘Sustainable Growth Rate,’ Checklist for Capital Structure Decision,’
‘Debt Market,’ ‘Money Market,’ ‘Portfolio Restructuring,’ and ‘Multinational Corporations,’
Contents
Part I: Overview and Financial Environment
1. Financial Management: An Overview
2. The Financial System
Part II: Financial Analysis and Planning
3. Financial Statements, Taxes, and Cash Flow
5. Funds Flow Analysis
6. Break-Even Analysis and Leverages
7. Financial Planning and Forecasting
Part III: Fundamental Valuation Concepts
9. Valuation of Securities
10. Risk and Return
Part IV: Capital Budgeting
11. Techniques of Capital Budgeting
12. Project Cash Flows
13. Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting
14. The Cost Of Capital
Part V: Capital Structre and Dividend Policies
15. Capital Structure and Cost of Capital
16. Planning the Capital Structure
17. Dividend Policy and Share Valuation
18. Dividend Policy: Practical Aspects
Part VI: Long-Term Financing
19. Sources of Long-Term Finance
20. Raising Long-Term Finance
21. Securities Market
Part VII: Working Capital Management
22. Working Capital Policy
23. Cash Management
24. Credit Management
26. Working Capital Financing
Part VIII: Special Topics
27. Leasing, Hire Purchase and Project Finance
28. Mergers, Acquisitions, and Restructuring
By Rodziah Abd Samad, Rohani Abdul Wahab and Shelia Christabel
2010 (June 2010) / 460 pages
ISBN: 9789675771002
Financial Management for Beginners has been written for students of
Business and Accountancy. The book is written for both newcomers
to finance as well as students with a prior knowledge of the subject.
Some prior knowledge of economics, statistics and accounting will
be helpful. Student learning is aided by learning objectives at the
beginning of each chapter, concept questions in each chapter, true
or false, multiple choice, self-test questions and problems at the end
of each chapter. It is specifically structured for use in the classroom
and as a selfstudy text. Key answers for a number of questions are
included. The book is composed of narrative explanations with worked
examples and diagrams, as well as relevant formulae which are easy
to follow. This book consists of 12 chapters, beginning with an introduction to financial management, followed by evaluation of financial
performance, Financial Training and Forecasting, working capital
management, management of current liability, – management of current assets, time value of money, risk and return, capital budgeting,
cost of capital, analysis and impact of leverage, and ending with dividend policy. The aim of this text is to provide a foundation in financial
management for students, to help them in their future career. The text
is relevant to students pursuing diploma and undergraduate courses
in Business and Accountancy and also professional courses such as
those offered by Malaysian Institute of Certified Public Accountants,
Chartered Association of Certified Accountants, Chartered Institute
of Management Accountants and Institute of Chartered Secretaries
and Administrators.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Financial Management
2. Evaluation of Financial Performance
3. Financial Planning and Forecasting
4. Management of Working Capital
5. Management of Current Assets
6. Management of Current Liabilities
8. Risk and Return
9. Capital Budgeting
10. Cost of Capital
11. Analysis and Impact of Leverage
12. The Dividend Decision
Appendix
Suggested Solutions
Glossary
Bibliography and Further Reading
Index
75
Aust Adaptation
ESSENTIALS OF CORPORATE FINANCE
2nd Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass Institute of Tech, Rowan Trayler and Ron G Bird
of University of Technology Sydney, Randolph W Westerfield, University
of Souhtern California and Bradford D Jordan, University of KentuckyLexington
2010 (November 2010)
ISBN: 9780070284975
www.mhhe.com/au/ross_ess2e
This is the second Australian and New Zealand edition of Essentials
of Corporate Finance(Ross, Westerfield and Jordan, US) adapted by
local authors Rowan Trayler (UTS) and Ron Bird (UTS). Trayler and
Bird have created a successful and engaging text for students in single
semester courses, balancing theory with real-world regional stories
and examples and concisely covering essential financial principles
and concepts. Essentials of Corporate Finance is part of a suite of
Ross products and has an emphasis on applications and relevancy
to business within a 18 chapter structure. The text aims to make core
introductory finance topics accessible and relevant through the use of
real-life, regional examples. Perhaps the most exciting development
for the new edition is that Essentials of Corporate Finance now comes
with Connect Plus. This is a new, unique and powerful tool for lecturers
and students which includes an integrated ebook, assignment and
quiz builder, pre-built assignments and algorithmic testbank questions
Contents
Part 1. Overview of Financial Management
Chapter 1: Introduction to Financial Management
Part 2. Understanding Financial Statements and Cash Flow
Chapter 2: Financial Statements, Taxes and Cash Flow
Part 3. Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Part 4. Valuing Stocks and Bonds
Chapter 6: Interest Rates, Bill and Bond Valuation
Chapter 7: Equity Markets and Share Valuation
Part 5. Capital Budgeting
Part 6. Risk and Return
Chaper 10: Some Chapters From Capital Market History
Chapter 11: Risk and Return
Part 7. Long Term Financing
Chapter 13: Leverage and Capital Structure
Part 8. Short-Term Financial Management
Chapter 16: Short-Term Financial Planning
Chapter 17: Working Capital Management
Appendix A: Mathematical Tables
Appendix B: Key Equations
Glossary
Index
76
Aust Adaptation
5th Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass Institute of Tech, Mark Christensen, Queensland
University of Technology, Michael Drew, QIC Consulting Firm/Griffith
University, Spencer Thompson, Queensland University of Technology,
Randolph W Westerfield, University of Southern California and Bradford
D Jordan, University of Kentucky-Lexington
2010 (December 2010)
ISBN: 9780070284951
www.mhhe.com/au/ross5e
Joining Australian author Mark Christensen in writing this edition is
Mike Drew, Griffith University, who has brought his extensive teaching
and industry experience to the text and has helped to create a considerably updated and revised text that continues to capitalise on the rich
pedagogy and thorough treatment of the topic by the US Ross team.
In addition to illustrating pertinent concepts and presenting up-to-date
coverage, Fundamentals of Corporate Finance 5e strives to present
the material in a way that makes it accessible and relevant and easy
to understand. To meet the varied needs of its intended audience,
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance 5e is rich in valuable learning
tools. The text is relaxed and approachable in tone and the authors
continue to convey their considerable enthusiasm for the subject.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Overview of corporate finance
Ch. 1 Introduction to corporate finance
Ch. 2 Financial statements, taxes and cash flow
Part 2 Financial statements and long-term financial planning
Ch. 3 Working with financial statements
Ch. 4 Long-term financial planning and corporate growth
Part 3 Valuation of future cash flows
Ch. 5 First principles of valuation: the time value of money
Ch. 6 Valuing shares and bonds
Part 4 Capital budgeting
Ch. 7 Net present value and other investment criteria
Ch. 8 Making capital investment decisions
Ch. 9 Project analysis and evaluation
Part 5 Risk and return
Ch. 10 Lessons from capital market history
Ch. 11 Return, risk and the security market line
Part 6 Current investment decisions
Ch. 12 Current investment decisions
Ch. 13 Working capital management
Ch. 14 Australian financial markets and liquidity management
Part 7 Long-term financing
Ch. 15 Capital markets and long-term financing
Ch. 16 Capital raising and the primary market
Part 8 Cost of capital and long-term financial policy
Ch. 17 Shareholder value and the cost of capital
Ch. 18 Rewarding shareholders: setting dividend policy
Ch. 19 Financial leverage and capital structure policy
Part 9 Special topics in corporate finance
Ch. 20 Derivative securities
Ch. 21 Mergers and takeovers
Ch. 22 International corporate finance
Ch. 23 Leasing 804 Appendix 1 Mathematical tables Glossary 839
Index 853
9th Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass institute of Tech, Randolph W Westerfield,
University of Southern California and Bradford D Jordan, University of
Kentucky-Lexington
ISBN: 9780073382395 (Standard Edition)
ISBN: 9780077246129 [Alternate Edition]
ISBN: 9780071088558 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/rwj
The best-selling Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (FCF) is written
with one strongly held principle– that corporate finance should be
developed and taught in terms of a few integrated, powerful ideas. As
such, there are three basic themes that are the central focus of the
book: 1) An emphasis on intuition—underlying ideas are discussed
in general terms and then by way of examples that illustrate in more
concrete terms how a financial manager might proceed in a given
situation. 2) A unified valuation approach—net present value (NPV)
is treated as the basic concept underlying corporate finance. Every
subject covered is firmly rooted in valuation, and care is taken to explain how particular decisions have valuation effects. 3) A managerial
focus—the authors emphasize the role of the financial manager as
decision maker, and they stress the need for managerial input and
judgment. The Ninth Edition continues the tradition of excellence
that has earned Fundamentals of Corporate Finance its status as
market leader. Every chapter has been updated to provide the most
current examples that reflect corporate finance in today’s world. The
supplements package has been updated and improved, and with
the new Excel Master online tool, student and instructor support has
never been stronger.
Contents
THEORY OF INTEREST
3rd Edition
By Stephen Kellison
ISBN: 9780073382449
ISBN: 9780071276276 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/kellison3e
The third edition of The Theory of Interest is significantly revised
and expanded from previous editions. The text covers the basic
mathematical theory of interest as traditionally developed. The book
is a thorough treatment of the mathematical theory and practical
applications of compound interest, or mathematics of finance. The
pedagogical approach of the second edition has been retained in the
third edition. The textbook narrative emphasizes both the importance
of conceptual understanding and the ability to apply the techniques
to practical problems. The third edition has considerable updates that
make this book relevant to students in this course area.
Contents
Chapter 1: The Measurement of Interest
Chapter 2: Solution of Problems in Interest
Chapter 3: Basic Annuities
Chapter 4: More General Annuities
Chapter 5: Amortization Schedules and Sinking Funds
Chapter 6: Bond and Other Securities
Chapter 7: Yield Rates
Chapter 8: Practical applications
Chapter 9: More advanced financial analysis
Chapter 10: The term structure of interest rates
Chapter 11: Duration, convexity and immunization
Chapter 12: Stochastic approaches to interest
Chapter 13: Options and other derivatives
APPENDIXES
Appendix A: Table numbering the days of the year
Appendix B: Illustrative mortgage loan amortization schedule
Appendix C: Basic mathematical review
Appendix D: Statistical background
Appendix E: Iteration methods
Answers to the exercises
Glossary of notation
Index
Managerial & Corporate Finance - Supplements
CASEBOOK TO ACCOMPANY
FOUNDATIONS OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
14th Edition
By Stanley Block, Texas Christian University
ISBN: 9780077316174
These 31 cases, written by Block/Hirt/Danielsen, are ideal for indepth analysis and facilitate an integrated understanding of the topics
presented in the book.
77
CASE STUDIES IN FINANCE
6th Edition
By Robert Bruner, University of VA-Charlottesville
2010 (January 2009) / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780073382456
ISBN: 9780071267526 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/bruner6e
Case Studies in Finance links managerial decisions to capital markets
and the expectations of investors. At the core of almost all of the cases
is a valuation task that requires students to look to financial markets
for guidance in resolving the case problem. The focus on value helps
managers understand the impact of the firm on the world around it.
These cases also invite students to apply modern information technology to the analysis of managerial decisions.
Case 37 Baker Adhesives
Case 38 Carrefour S.A.
Case 39 Primus Automation Division, 2002
Case 40 MoGen, Inc.
Part 8: Valuing the Enterprise: Acquisitions and Buyouts
Case 41 Methods of Valuation: Mergers and Acquisitions
Case 42 Arcadian Microarray Technologies, Inc.
Case 43 Yeats Valves and Controls
Case 44 Hershey Foods Corporation
Case 45 General Mills’ Acquisition of Pillsbury from Diageo PLC
Case 46 The Timken Company
Case 47 Matlin Patterson
Case 48 Hostile Takeovers: A Primer for the Decision Maker
Case 49 General Electric’s Proposed Acquisition of Honeywell
CONTENTS
Part 1: Setting Some Themes
Case 1 Warren E. Buffett, 2005
Case 2 Bill Miller and Value Trust
Case 3 Ben & Jerry’s Homemade
Case 4 The Battle for Value, 2004: FedEx Corp. vs. United Parcel
Service, Inc.
Part 2: Financial Analysis and Forecasting
Case 5 The Thoughtful Forecaster
Case 6 The Financial Detective, 2005
Case 7 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, Inc.
Case 8 The Body Shop International PLC 2001: An Introduction to
Financial Modeling
Case 9 Horniman Horticulture
Case 10 Kota Fibres, Ltd.
Case 11 Deutsche Brauerei
Case 12 Value Line Publishing: October 2002
Part 3: Estimating the Cost of Capital
Case 13 “Best Practices” in Estimating the Cost of Capital: Survey
and Synthesis”
Case 14 Nike, Inc.: Cost of Capital
Case 15 Teletech Corporation, 2005
Case 16 The Boeing 7E7
Part 4: Capital Budgeting and Resource Allocation
Case 17 The Investment Detective
Case 18 Worldwide Paper Company
Case 19 Target Corporation
Case 20 Aurora Textile Company
Case 21 Compass Records
Case 22 Victoria Chemicals plc (A): The Merseyside Project
Case 23 Victoria Chemicals plc (B): Merseyside and Rotterdam
Projects
Case 24 Euroland Foods S.A.
Case 25 Star River Electronics Ltd.
Part 5: Management of the Firm’s Equity: Dividends, Repurchases, Initial Offerings
Case 26 Gainesboro Machine Tools Corporation
Case 27 EMI
Case 28 JetBlue Airways IPO Valuation
Case 29 TRX, Inc.: Initial Public Offering
Case 30 Purinex, Inc.
Part 6: Management of the Corporate Capital Structure
Case 31 An Introduction to Debt Policy and Value
Case 32 Structuring Coprorate Financial Policy: Diagnosis of Problems and Evaluation of Strategies
Case 33 California Pizza Kitchen
Case 34 The Wm. Wrigley Jr. Company: Capital Structure, Valuation,
and Cost of Capital
Case 35 Deluxe Corporation
Case 36 Deutsche Bank Securities: Financing the Acquisition of
Consolidated Supply S.A.
Part 7: Analysis of Financing Tactics: Leases, Options, and
Foreign Currency
78
FINGAME 5.0 PARTICIPANT’S MANUAL
WITH REGISTRATION CODE
5th Edition
By Leroy D Brooks, John Carroll University
2008 (June 2007) / 170 pages
ISBN: 9780077219888
ISBN: 9780071275675 [IE]
Brooks’ FinGame Online 5.0 is a comprehensive multiple period
finance case/simulation. In the game, students control a hypothetical
company over numerous periods of operation. Students have control
of major financial and operating decisions of their company. Students
develop and enhance skills in financial management, financial accounting statement analysis, and general decision making. Internet
access by the instructor and student is required. Students use the FinGame Participant’s Manual for instructions to operate their company
on the McGraw-Hill/Irwin website. The Participant’s Manual includes
a password in order to access the website. The Instructor’s Manual
is very important and imperative to teaching from FinGame Online
5.0. FinGame Online can be found at www.mhhe.com/fingame5.
CONTENTS
Student Manual
Chapter 1Introduction
Chapter 2Initiation and Use on the Web
Chapter 3Establishing a Management Plan
Chapter 4The Company Environment and Rules
Chapter 5The Game and The Real World
AppendixFinancial Statement Construction
Instructor’s Manual
Welcome
Chapter 1Web Access and Operating Instructions
Chapter 2Use of the Game in a Course
Chapter 3The Company Environment and Rules
Appendix:FinGame Report Requirements
FINANCE AND INVESTMENTS USING THE
WALL STREET JOURNAL
By Peter Crabb, Northwest Nazarene University
2003 / 408 pages
ISBN: 9780071218856 [IE]
CONTENTS
PART I: INTRODUCTION.
1. Finance and Investments Using the Wall Street Journal.
PART II: MARKET ANALYSIS.
2. Economic Analysis.
3. Industry Analysis.
4. International Economics and Markets.
PART III: SECURITIES MARKETS AND ANALYSIS.
5. Time Value of Money.
6. Bond Valuations.
7. Stock Valuations.
8. Foreign Exchange.
PART IV: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS.
9. Financial Statement Analysis.
10. Technical Analysis.
PART V: DERIVATIVE SECURITIES.
11. Options.
12. Futures.
13. Index Futures and Options.
PART VI- PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT.
14. Risk Measurement.
15. Asset Allocation.
16. Benchmarking.
PART VII—CORPORATE FINANCING.
17. Cost of Capital.
18. Public Offering of Securities.
19. Dividend Policy.
20. Mergers and Acquisitions.
SCHAUM’S QUICK GUIDE TO BUSINESS
FINANCE
201 Decision-Making Tools for Business, Finance,
and Accounting Students
By Jae K. Shim, Ph.D., California State University, Stephen W. Hartman,
New York Institute of Technology and Joel Siegel, Ph.D., Queens College,
CUNY
1998 / 354 pages
ISBN: 9780070580312
For quick and authoritative answers to questions on business and
financial formulas and tools, this unique book is unequaled! It not only
clearly explains all major business and financial formulas, it shows
you how to apply them, step by step. Perfect for college and graduate
students in business, finance, marketing, operations, management,
and accounting, this comprehensive, portable guide gives you quick
access to all major financial and business formulas with explanations
you can grasp and use in seconds. You get explanations, examples,
and demonstrations of formulas for vertical analysis; net-cost method;
sales mix analysis; regression statistics; profit margin; sampling
formulas; discount cash flow analysis; weighted averages; cost of
capital; earnings per share; inventory turnover; and nearly 200 more.
This is the handiest tool available for mastering business formulas!
Managerial & Corporate
Finance - Graduate
Global edition
PRINCIPLES OF CORPORATE FINANCE
MANAGEMENT
3rd Edition
By Jae Shim, California State University and Joel Siegel, Queens College
2010 (August 2009) / 504 pages
ISBN: 9780071635318
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Management provides a succinct review
of all financial management concepts in topics such as financial forecasting, planning and budgeting, the management of working capital,
short-term financing, time value of money, risk, return, and valuation,
capital budgeting, and more.
Contents
1. Introduction
2. Analysis of Financial Statements and Cash Flow
3. Financial Forecasting, Planning, and Budgeting
4. The Management of Working Capital
5. Short-Term Financing
7. Risk, Return, and Valuation
8. Capital Budgeting (Including Leasing)
9. Capital Budgeting Under Risk
10. Cost of Capital
11. Leverage and Capital Structure
12. Dividend Policy
13. Term Loans and Leasing
14. Long-Term Debt
15. Preferred and Common Stock
10th Edition
By Richard A Brealey, London Business School, Stewart C Myers, Mass
Institute of Tech and Franklin Allen, University of Pennsylvania
2011 (February 2010) / 1088 pages
ISBN: 9780073530734 (NAI)
ISBN: 9780077356385 (+ S&P Market Insight)
ISBN: 9780071314176 [GE] - Pub Nov 2010
www.mhhe.com/bma
Principles of Corporate Finance is the worldwide leading text that
describes the theory and practice of corporate finance. Throughout the
book, the authors show how managers use financial theory to solve
practical problems and as a way to respond to change by showing
not just how, but why companies and management act as they do.
This text is a valued reference for thousands of practicing financial
managers. The Tenth Edition has been rewritten, refreshed, and fully
updated to reflect the recent financial crisis and is now accompanied
by Connect Finance, an exciting new homework management system.
Contents
Part One: Value
1- Goals and Governance of the Firm
2- How to Calculate Present Values
3- Valuing Bonds
4- The Value of Commons Stocks
5- Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
6- Making Investment Decisions with the Net Present Value Rule
Part Two: Risk
7- Introduction to Risk and Return
8- Portfolio Theory and the Capital Asset Pricing Model
9- Risk and the Cost of Capital
Part Three: Best Practice in Capital Budgeting
79
10- Project Analysis
11- Investment, Strategy, and Economic Rents
12- Agency Problems, Compensation, and the Performance Measurement
Part Four: Financing Decisions and Market Efficiency
13- Efficient Markets and Behavioral Finance
14- An Overview of Corporate Financing
15- How Corporations Issue Securities
Part Five: Payout Policy and Capital Structure
16- Payout Policy
17- Does Debt Policy Matter?
18- How Much Should a Corporation Borrow?
19- Financing and Valuation
Part Six: Options
20- Understanding Options
21- Valuing Options
22- Real Options
Part Seven: Debt Financing
23- Credit Risk and the Value of Corporate Debt
24- The Many Different Kinds of Debt
25- Leasing
Part Eight: Risk Management
26- Managing Risk
27- Managing International Risks
Part Nine: Financial Planning and Working Capital Management
28- Financial Analysis
29- Financial Planning
30- Working Capital Management
Part Ten: Mergers, Corporate Control, and Governance
31- Mergers
32- Corporate Restructuring
33- Governance and Corporate Control Around the World
Part Eleven: Conclusion
34- Conclusion: What We Do and Do Not Know About Finance
10: Project Analysis
Part Four: Financing Decisions and Market Efficiency
11: Efficient Markets and Behavioral Finance
Part Five: Payout Policy and Capital Structure
12: Payout Policy
13: Does Debt Policy Matter?
14: How Much Should a Corporation Borrow?
15: Financing and Valuation
Part Six: Options
16: Understanding Options
17: Valuing Options
Part Seven: Financial Planning and Working Capital Management
18: Financial Analysis
19: Financial Planning
Appendix
Glossary
Index
NEW
*9780071067850*
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Text and Problems, 6th Edition
By M Y Khan, Formerly Professor of FInance,
Dept of Financial Studies and P K Jain, Indian
Institute of Technology, Delhi
2011 (February 2011) / 1404 pages
ISBN: 9780071067850
PRINCIPLES OF CORPORATE FINANCE
Concise, 2nd Edition
By Richard A Brealey, London Business School, Stewart C Myers, Mass
Institute of Tech and Franklin Allen, University of Pennsylvania
2011 (April 2010) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780073530741
ISBN: 9780071289160 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/bma2e
Throughout Principles of Corporate Finance, Concise the authors
show how managers use financial theory to solve practical problems
and as a way of learning how to respond to change by showing not
just how but why companies and management act as they do. The
first ten chapters mirror the Principles text, covering the time value
of money, the valuation of bonds and stocks, and practical capital
budgeting decisions. The remaining chapters discuss market efficiency, payout policy, and capital structure, option valuation, and
financial planning and analysis. The text is modular, so that Parts
can be introduced in an alternative order.
Contents
Part One: Value
1: Goals and Governance of the Firm
2: How to Calculate Present Values
3: Valuing Bonds
4: The Value of Common Stocks
5: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
6: Making Investment Decisions with the Net Present Value Rule
Part Two: Risk
7: Introduction to Risk and Return
8: Portfolio Theory and the Capital Asset Pricing Model
9: Risk and the Cost of Capital
Part Three: Best Practices in Capital Budgeting
80
This new edition of Financial Management continues to emphasise on
the theories, concepts, and techniques that aid in corporate decision
making, Apart from updating the chapters with recent developments
in the subject, it presents to the readers several new cases and
examples, along with new-age tools like ‘excel’ for problem solving.
New to this edition
Analytical Approach and Decisional Focus
Managerial decision-making perspective
Procedural Orientation, Practice Discussion and Cases
Financial Tables and Bibliography
Contents
1. Financial Management – An Overview
3. Risk and Return
4. Valuation of Bonds and Shares
5. Cash-flow Statement
7. Volume-Cost-Profit Analysis
8. Budgeting and Profit Planning
9. Capital Budgeting I: Principles and Techniques
10. Capital Budgeting II: Additional Aspects
11. Concept and Measurement of Cost of Capital
12. Analysis of Risk and Uncertainty
13. Working Capital Management – An Overview
14. Management of Cash and Marketable Securities
15. Receivables Management
17. Working Capital Management
18. Operating, Financial and Combined Leverage
19. Capital Structure, Cost of Capital and Valuation
20. Designing Capital Structure
21. Capital Markets
22. Equity / Ordinary Shares
23. Term Loans, Debentures/Bonds and Securitisation
24. Hybrid Financing / Instruments
25. Lease Financing and Hire-purchase Finance
26. Venture Capital Financing
28. Derivatives: Managing Financial Risks
29. Corporate Governance
30. Dividend and Valuation
31. Determinants of Dividend Policy
33. Corporate Restructuring
34. Foreign Exchange Markets and Dealings
35. Foreign Exchange Exposure and Risk Management
Global edition
CORPORATE FINANCE
Core Principles and Applications, 3rd Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass Institute of Tech, Randolph W Westerfield, University of Southern California, Jeffrey Jaffe, University of Pennsylvania
and Bradford D Jordan, University of Kentucky-Lexington
2011 (October 2010) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780073530680
ISBN: 9780071221160 [GE] - Pub April 2011
ISBN: 9780077905200 (plus Connect)
ISBN: 9780077971304 (plus Connect Access Card)
www.mhhe.com/rwjj
Corporate Finance: Core Principles and Applications, 3rd edition, by
Ross, Westerfield, Jaffe and Jordan was written to convey the most
important corporate finance concepts and applications at a level
that is approachable to the widest possible audience. The concise
format, managerial context and design, and student-friendly writing
style are key attributes to this text. RWJJ Core Principles strikes a
balance by introducing and covering the essentials, while leaving
more specialized topics to follow-up courses. This text distills the
subject of corporate finance down to its core, while also maintaining
a decidedly modern approach. The well-respected author team is
known for the clear, accessible presentation of material that makes
this text an excellent teaching tool.
Contents
Part I Overview
1 Introduction to Corporate Finance
2 Financial Statements and Cash Flow
3 Financial Statements Analysis and Long-Term Planning
Part II Valuation and Capital Budgeting
4 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
5 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
6 Stock Valuation
7 Net Present Value and Other Investment Rules
8 Making Capital Investment Decisions
9 Risk Analysis, Real Options, and Capital Budgeting
Part III Risk and Return
10 Risk and Return Lessons from Market History
11 Return and Risk: The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM)
12 Risk, Cost of Capital, and Capital Budgeting
Part IV Capital Structure and Dividend Policy
13 Corporate Financing Decisions and Efficient Capital Markets
14 Capital Structure: Basic Concepts
15 Capital Structure: Limits to the Use of Debt
16 Dividends and Other Payouts
Part V Special Topics
17 Options and Corporate Finance
18 Short-Term Finance and Planning
19 Mergers and Acquisitions
20 International Corporate Finance
CORPORATE FINANCE WITH S&P CARD
9th Edition
By Stephen A Ross, Mass Institute of Tech, Randolp W Westerfield and
Jeffrey Jaffe, University of Pennsylvania
2010 (October 2009)
ISBN: 9780077337629
ISBN: 9780071313070 [IE without S&P]
www.mhhe.com/rwj
Corporate Finance, by Ross, Westerfield, and Jaffe emphasizes
the modern fundamentals of the theory of finance, while providing contemporary examples to make the theory come to life. The
authors aim to present corporate finance as the working of a small
number of integrated and powerful intuitions, rather than a collection
of unrelated topics. They develop the central concepts of modern
finance: arbitrage, net present value, efficient markets, agency theory,
options, and the trade-off between risk and return, and use them to
explain corporate finance with a balance of theory and application.
The well-respected author team is known for their clear, accessible
presentation of material that makes this text an excellent teaching
tool. The ninth edition has been fully updated to reflect the recent
financial crisis and is now accompanied by Connect, an exciting new
homework management system.
Contents
Part I--Overview
Chapter 2: Financial Statements and Cash Flow
Chapter 3: Financial Statements Analysis and Long-Term Planning
Part II--Valuation and Capital Budgeting
Chapter 5: Net Present Value and Other Investment Rules
Chapter 7: Risk Analysis, Real Options, and Capital Budgeting
Chapter 9: How to Value Stocks
Part III--Risk
Chapter 10: Risk and Return: Lessons from Market History
Chapter 11: Return and Risk: The Capital Asset Pricing Model
Chapter 12: An Alternative View of Risk and Return: The Arbitrage
Pricing Theory
Chapter 13: Risk, Cost of Capital, and Capital Budgeting
Part IV: Capital Structure and Dividend Policy
Chapter 14: Efficient Capital Markets and Behavioral Challenges
Chapter 15 : Long-Term Financing: An Introduction
Chapter 16: Capital Structure: Basic Concepts
Chapter 17: Capital Structure: Limits to the Use of Debt
Chapter 18: Valuation and Capital Budgeting for the Levered Firm
Chapter 19: Dividends and Other Payouts
Part V: Long-Term Financing
Chapter 20: Issuing Securities to the Public
Chapter 21: Leasing
Part VI: Options, Futures, and Corporate Finance
Chapter 23: Options and Corporate Finance: Extensions and Applications
Chapter 24: Warrants and Convertibles
Chapter 25: Derivatives and Hedging Risk
Part VII: Short-Term Finance
Chapter 27: Cash Management
Part VIII: Special Topics
Chapter 30: Financial Distress
81
Appendix A. Interest Rate Mathematics
Appendix B. Mathematical Tables
BEHAVIORAL CORPORATE FINANCE
By Hersh Shefrin
ISBN: 9780072848656
ISBN: 9780071257367 [IE]
Business Finance
www.mhhe.com/shefrin
Contents
1- Behavioral Foundations
2- Valuation
3- Capital Budgeting
4- Perceptions About Risk and Return
5- Inefficient Markets and Corporate Decisions
6- Capital Structure
7- Dividend Policy
8- Agency Conflicts and Corporate Governance
9- Group Process
10- Mergers and Acquisitions
11- Application of Real-Option Techniques to Capital Budgeting and
Capital Structure (on the website only)
BUSINESS FINANCE
10th Edition
By Graham Peirson and Rob Brown of Monash University, Steve Easton,
University of Newcastle and Peter Howard, Monash University, Clayton
and Sean Pinder, University of Melbourne
2010 (August 2010)
ISBN: 9780070144675
ISBN: 9780071012911 (Revised with Connect Plus)
www.mhhe.com/au/peirson10e
FINANCIAL MARKETS AND CORPORATE
STRATEGY
2nd Edition
By Mark Grinblatt, UCLA and Sheridan Titman, University of Texas at
Austin
2002 / 864 pages
ISBN: 9780071088510 [IE]
ISBN: 9780071236867 [IE - Printed in 2 Colors]
www.mhhe.com/grinblatt
CONTENTS
Part I. Financial Markets and Financial Instruments
1.Raising Capital
2. Debt Financing
3. Equity Financing
Part II. Valuing Financial Assets
4. The Mathematics and Statistics of Portfolios
5. Mean-Variance Analysis and the Capital Asset Pricing Model
6. Factor Models and the Arbitrage Pricing Theory
7. Pricing Derivatives
8. Options
Part III. Valuing Real Assets
9. Discounting and Valuation
10. Investing in Risk-less Projects
11. Investing in Risky Projects
12. Allocating Capital and Corporate Strategy
13. Corporate Taxes and the Impact of Financing On Real Asset
Valuation
Part IV. Capital Structure
14. How Taxes Affect Financing Choices
15. How Taxes Affect Dividends and Share Repurchases
16. Bankruptcy Costs and Debt Holder-Equity Holder Conflicts
17. Capital Structure and Corporate Strategy
Part V. Incentives, Information, and Corporate Control
18. How Managerial Incentives Affects Financial Decisions
19. The Information Conveyed by Financial Decisions
20. Mergers and Acquisitions
Part VI. Risk Management
21. Risk Management and Corporate Strategy
22. The Practice of Hedging
23. Interest Rate Risk Management
82
Now in its landmark tenth edition, Business Finance is the authoritative
Australian business finance text. Written by the same highly regarded
author team, this edition has been extensively updated and revised
to ensure that it continues to meet the needs of today’s students. Updated statistics, numerous real-life examples and information on new
regulatory changes and market developments have been integrated
throughout. Quality, proven content and a trusted pedagogy combine
in Business Finance to provide comprehensive subject coverage for
finance majors.
Contents
Ch 1 Introduction
Ch 2 Consumption, investment and the capital market
Ch 3 The time value of money: an introduction to financial mathematics
Ch 4 Applying the time value of money to security valuation
Ch 5 Project evaluation: principles and methods
Ch 6 The application of project evaluation methods
Ch 7 Portfolio theory and asset pricing
Ch 8 The capital market
Ch 9 Sources of long-term finance: equity
Ch10 Sources of finance: debt
Ch11 Dividend and share repurchase decisions
Ch12 Principles of capital structure
Ch13 Capital structure decisions
Ch14 The cost of capital and taxation issues in project evaluation
Ch15 Leasing and other equipment finance
Ch16 Capital market efficiency
Ch17 Futures contracts
Ch18 Options and contingent claims
Ch19 Analysis of takeovers
Ch20 International financial management
Ch21 Management of short-term assets: inventory
Ch22 Management of short-term assets: liquid assets accounts
receivable
Appendices
Glossary
Author index
Subject index
Investments - Textbooks
NEW
*9780078034626*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT
10th Edition
By Geoffrey A Hirt, DePaul University and
Stanley B Block, Texas Christian University
2012 (June 2011) / 688 pages
ISBN: 9780078034626
ISBN: 9780071315524 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/hirtblock10e
Presenting applied theory alongside real-world examples, Fundamentals of Investment Management provides a survey of the
important areas of investments: valuation, the marketplace, fixed
income instruments and markets, equity instruments and markets,
derivative instruments, and a cross-section of special topics, such as
international markets and mutual funds. The text is user-friendly, but
makes no concessions to the importance of covering the latest and
most important material for the student of investments.
New to this edition
The text has been extensively reorganized to include modern
coverage and improve the flow of material.
Chapter 6: Industry Analysis
Chapter 7: Valuation of the Individual Firm
Part Three: Issues in Efficient Markets
Chapter 9: Efficient Markets and Anomalies
Chapter 10: Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis
Part Four: Fixed-Income and Leveraged Securities
Chapter 11: Bond and Fixed-Income Fundamentals
Chapter 12: Principles of Bond Valuation and Investment
Chapter 13: Convertible Securities and Warrants
Part Five: Derivative Products
Chapter 14: Put and Call Options
Chapter 15: Commodities and Financial Futures
Chapter 16: Stock Index Futures and Options
Part Six: Broadening the Investment Perspective
Chapter 17: A Basic Look at Portfolio Management and Capital
Market Theory
Chapter 18: Duration and Bond Portfolio Management
Chapter 19: International Securities Markets
Chapter 20: Investments in Real Assets
Chapter 21: Alternative Investments: Private Equity and Hedge Funds
Chapter 22: Measuring Risks and Returns of Portfolio Managers
Appendices
Appendix A: Compound Sum of $1
Appendix B: Compound Sum of an Annuity of $1
Appendix C: Present Value of $1
Appendix D: Present Value of an Annuity of $1
Appendix E: Time Value of Money and Investment Applications
Appendix F: Using Calculators for Financial Analysis
NEW
Additional material on behavioral finance: Chapter 10, formerly
Technical Analysis, is now Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis.
Introductory material on behavioral finance appears at the beginning
of the chapter, and the chapter shows where technical analysis can
interpret some of the behavior observed in investors.
A greatly expanded section on portfolio management: The last
section of the book now includes the introductory theory and portfolio
management chapter, followed by duration and bond portfolio management, international investing, real assets, a new chapter entitled
Alternative Investments: Hedge Funds and Private Equity, and a final
chapter on measuring investment performance.
Placement of the mutual fund chapter: The mutual fund chapter
has been moved up from Chapter 18 to Chapter 4. This fits with the
investing goals and objectives covered in Chapter 1 and meshes
with the stock market index material in Chapter 2. More information
about exchange-traded funds has also been added to this chapter.
Each chapter has been updated to reflect the most current
information in today’s world of investment management. Significant
new and updated content coverage includes material related to the
financial crisis, such as the subprime mortgage market, credit default
swaps, Federal Reserve Policy, and other related topics.
Contents
Part One: Introduction to Investments
Chapter 1: The Investment Setting
Chapter 2: Security Markets
Chapter 3: Participating in the Market
Chapter 4: Investment Companies: Mutual Funds, Exchange-Traded
Funds, Closed-End funds, and Unit Investment Trusts
Part Two: Analysis and Valuation of Equity Securities
Chapter 5: Economic Activity
*9780073530710*
FUNDAMENTALS OF
INVESTMENTS
6th Edition
By Bradford D Jordan, University of KentuckyLexington, Thomas Miller, St Louis University
and Steve Dolvin, Butler University
2012 (January 2011) / 736 pages
ISBN: 9780073530710
ISBN: 9780071315647 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/jmd6e
Fundamentals of Investments focuses on students as investment
managers, giving them information to act on by placing theory and
research in the proper context. The text offers strong, consistent pedagogy, including a balanced, unified treatment of the four main types of
financial investments: stocks, bonds, options, and futures. Topics are
organized in a way that makes them easy to apply—whether to a portfolio simulation or to real life—and supported with hands-on activities.
New to this edition
to make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time
83
quizzes, and tests directly from the end-of-chapter materials or test
bank. Problems are available as both static and algorithmic problems,
and there are also multiple-choice conceptual questions.
improvement.
Questions mapped to AACSB skill areas, Bloom’s Taxonomy
levels, and difficulty level enable you to run reports that assess specific learning outcomes.
A Self Quiz and Study program allows students to evaluate
their performance through a practice test and then receive recommendations for specific readings from the text, supplemental study
learning objective.
version of Fundamentals of Investments, linked to additional study
features, so that students can easily refer back to the text for review
and guidance.
Increased CFA coverage, support and mapping: The sixth edition
includes expanded coverage on 10 CFA readings and completely
new coverage of 15 CFA readings. In total, the sixth edition covers
more than 70 percent of the readings from Level 1 of the CFA exam
and about 35 percent of the readings from the Level 2 and 3 exams.
Each chapter opens with a CFA Exam box citing references to specific
readings from the CFA curriculum that are covered within the chapter,
mapping to the level of the CFA exam for the reading, and more than
95 percent of end-of-chapter material is related to the CFA exam,
which has been similarly mapped to CFA exam levels.
Highlights of new coverage in the sixth edition include:
Chapter 1 contains new sections on the crash of 2008, dollarweighted average returns, and the equity risk premium.
Chapter 4 contains a new material on target date funds and a
greatly expanded section on exchange-traded funds, particularly
leveraged ETFs. Considerable new material is introduced on
hedge funds, particularly their fee structure and investment styles.
Chapter 7 contains new material on the market crash of 2008.
Chapter 8 offers new material on heuristics, herding, and overcoming bias. Students have an opportunity to take an online quiz
about overconfidence.
Chapter 13 contains new material on calculating alpha using regression; calculating an information ratio; calculating a portfolio’s
R-squared; and Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS).
Chapter 18 contains some new material on bond ratings and
alternatives to bond ratings.
CONTENTS
Part I Introduction
1. A Brief History of Risk and Return
2. The Investment Process
3. Overview of Security Types
4. Mutual Funds
Part II Stock Markets
5. The Stock Market
6. Common Stock Valuation
7. Stock Price Behavior and Market Efficiency
8. Behavioral Finance and the Psychology of Investing
Part III Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
9. Interest Rates
10. Bond Prices and Yields
Part IV Portfolio
11. Diversification and Risky Asset Allocation
12. Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line
13. Performance Evaluation and Risk Management
Part V Options and Futures
84
14. Futures Contracts
15. Stock Options
Part VI Topics in Investments
17. Projecting Cash Flow and Earnings
18. Corporate Bonds
19. Government Bonds
20. Mortgage-Backed Securities
Appendix A: Answers to Test Your Investment Quotient Questions
Appendix B: Answers to Selected Questions and Problems
Appendix C: Key Formulas
Index
Global edition
INVESTMENTS
9th Edition
By Zvi Bodie, Boston University, Alex Kane, University of California-San
Diego and Alan J Marcus, Boston College
ISBN: 9780073530703
ISBN: 9780071289146 [GE] - Pub March 2011
www.mhhe.com/bkm
Bodie, Kane, and Marcus’ Investments sets the standard for graduate/MBA investments textbooks. It blends practical and theoretical
coverage, while maintaining an appropriate rigor and a clear writing
style. Its unifying theme is that security markets are nearly efficient,
meaning that most securities are priced appropriately given their risk
and return attributes. The text places greater emphasis on asset allocation and offers a much broader and deeper treatment of futures,
options, and other derivative security markets than most investment
texts. It is also the only graduate Investments text to offer an online
homework management system, McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance.
Contents
Part I Introduction
1 The Investment Environment
2 Asset Classes and Financial Instruments
3 How Securities are Traded
4 Mutual Funds and Other Investment Companies
Part II Portfolio Theory and Practice
5 Introduction to Risk, Return, and the Historical Record
6 Risk Aversion and Capital Allocation to Risky Assets
7 Optimal Risky Portfolios
8 Index Models
Part III Equilibrium in Capital Markets
9 The Capital Asset Pricing Model
10 Arbitrage Pricing Theory and Multifactor Models of Risk and Return
11 The Efficient Market Hypothesis
12 Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis
13 Empirical Evidence on Security Returns
Part IV Fixed-Income Securities
14 Bond Prices and Yields
15 The Term Structure of Interest Rates
16 Managing Bond Portfolios
Part V Security Analysis
17 Macroeconomic and Industry Analysis
18 Equity Valuation Models
Part VI Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives
20 Options Markets: Introduction
21 Option Valuation
22 Futures Markets
23 Futures, Swaps, and Risk Management
Part VII Applied Portfolio Management
24 Portfolio Performance Evaluation
25 International Diversification
26 Hedge Funds
27 The Theory of Active Portfolio Management
28 Investment Policy and the Framework of the CFA Institute
References to CFA Problems
Glossary
Name Index
Subject Index
NEW
*9780071333481*
UNDERSTANDING MUTUAL
FUNDS
By Uma Shashikant, Sunita Abraham and Arti
Bhargava
ISBN: 9780071333481
This book serves a simple purpose: it helps in preparing for the mandatory certification examination prescribed by the National Institute
of Securities Markets (NISM – Series VA – Mutual Fund Distributors
Exam). This examination is mandatory for independent advisors and
employees in the sales, distribution and customer service functions
of mutual funds and distribution companies.This book stays faithful
to the syllabus for the examination and test objectives as outlined by
NISM. Several students who take the NISM examinations in preparation for their job and project placements will find this book useful.
This book covers several basic concepts relating to mutual funds,
which may also be of interest to mutual fund investors. The objective
of this book is to simplify the basic concepts and principles relating to
mutual funds. Examples and illustrations have been used to reinforce
the concepts wherever necessary.
Contents
1. Concept And Role Of Mutual Funds
2. Fund Structure And Constituents
3. Legal And Regulatory Environment
4. Offer Document
5. Fund Distribution And Sales Practices
6. Accounting Valuation And Taxation
7. Investors Services
8. Risk, Return And Performance Of Funds
9. Mutual Fund Scheme Selection
10. Selecting The Right Investment Products
11. Financial Planning And Model Portfolios
ESSENTIALS OF INVESTMENTS WITH S&P
CARD
8th Edition
ISBN: 9780077339180
ISBN: 9780071267496 [IE without S&P Card]
ISBN: 9780071084383 [IE with Connect Plus]
www.mhhe.com/bodieess8e
The market leading undergraduate investments textbook, Essentials
of Investments, 8e by Bodie, Kane and Marcus, emphasizes asset
allocation while presenting the practical applications of investment
theory. The authors have eliminated unnecessary mathematical detail
and concentrate on the intuition and insights that will be useful to
practitioners throughout their careers as new ideas and challenges
emerge from the financial marketplace. The eighth edition has been
fully updated to reflect the recent financial crisis and includes a new
chapter on Hedge Funds.
Contents
Part 1: Elements of Investments
1- Investments: Background and Issues
2- Asset Classes and Financial Instruments
3- Securities Markets
4- Mutual Funds and Other Investment Companies
Part 2: Portfolio Theory
5- Risk and Return: Past and Prologue
6- Efficient Diversification
7- Capital Asset Pricing and Arbitrage Pricing Theory
8- The Efficient Market Hypothesis
9- Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis
Part 3: Debt Securities
10- Bond Prices and Yields
11- Managing Bond Portfolios
Part 4: Security Analysis
12- Macroeconomic and Industry Analysis
13- Equity Valuation
14- Financial Statement Analysis
Part 5: Derivative Markets
15- Options Markets
16- Option Valuation
17- Futures Markets and Risk Management
Part 6: Active Investment Management
18- Portfolio Performance Evaluation
19- Globalization and International Investing
20- Hedge Funds
21- Taxes, Inflation, and Investment Strategy
22- Investors and the Investment Process
85
Investments - Supplementary
INVESTMENTS
2nd Edition
By Mark Hirschey, University of Kansas-Lawrence and John Nofsinger,
Washington State University-Pullman
2010 (January 2009) / 672 pages
ISBN: 9780077305574 (with S&P Bind-In Card)
ISBN: 9780071271035 [IE]
ISBN: 9780071104357 [IE with S&P Card]
www.mhhe.com/hirschey2e
Investments: Analysis and Behavior, 2e is the first textbook to integrate
exciting new developments from the field of behavioral finance in a
comprehensive and balanced introduction to the field of investments.
Since behavioral is intertwined in all aspects of investing, this text
does just that. Investments: Analysis and Behavior is written from
a unique perspective that will provide students with knowledge of
investment analytical tools and an understanding of the forces that
drive the industry.
Contents
Part 1 Introduction to Investments
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Equity Markets
Chapter 3 Buying and Selling Equities
Chapter 4 Risk and Return
Part 2 Market Efficiency and Investor Behavior
Chapter 5 Asset Pricing Theory and Performance Evaluation
Chapter 6 Efficient-Market Hypothesis
Chapter 7 Market Anomalies
Chapter 8 Psychology and the Stock Market
Part 3 Investment Analysis
Chapter 9 Business Environment
Chapter 11 Value Stock Investing
Chapter 12 Growth Stock Investing
Chapter 13 Technical Analysis
Part 4 Fixed Income
Chapter 14 Bond Instruments and Markets
Chapter 15 Bond Valuation
Part 5 Investment Management
Chapter 16 Mutual Funds
Chapter 17 Global Investing
Chapter 18 Option Markets and Strategies
Chapter 19 Futures Markets
Chapter 20 Real Estate and Tangible Assets
Appendix A The Time Value of Money and Compounding
Appendix B Reference to the Chartered Financial Analyst Questions
Glossary
Index
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INVESTMENTS
2nd Edition
By Jack Clark Francis, Bernard M. Baruch College and Richard Taylor
2000 / 330 pages
ISBN: 9780071348492
A Professional reference Title
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Money Market Securities.
Chapter 2: Common and Preferred Stock.
Chapter 3: Corporate Bonds.
Chapter 4: The Time Value of Money.
Chapter 5: U.S. Treasury, Agency and Related Bonds.
Chapter 6: Municipal Bonds.
Chapter 7: Issuing and Trading Securities.
Chapter 8: Secondary Security Markets.
Chapter 9: Federal Investments Regulations.
Chapter 10: Security Market Indexes.
Chapter 11: Analysis of Financial Statements.
Chapter 12: Short Positions, Hedging, and Arbitrage.
Chapter 13: Total Risk and Risk Factors.
Chapter 14: Bond Valuation.
Chapter 15: Bond Portfolio Management.
Chapter 16: Common Stock Valuation.
Chapter 17: Technical Analysis.
Chapter 18: Efficient Markets Theory.
Chapter 19: Futures.
Chapter 20: Put and Call Options I.
Chapter 21: Put and Call Options II.
Chapter 22: Portfolio Analysis.
Chapter 23: Capital Market Theory.
Chapter 24: Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT).
Chapter 25: Portfolio Performance Evaluation.
Chapter 26: International Investing.
Appendices: A: Present Value of $1.
B: Future Value of $1.
C: Present Value of an Annuity of $1.
D: Future Value of an Annuity of $1.
86
Investments - Graduate
Cases in Corporate Finance
Global edition
INVESTMENTS
9th Edition
ISBN: 9780073530703
ISBN: 9780071289146 [GE] - Pub March 2011
www.mhhe.com/bkm
Bodie, Kane, and Marcus’ Investments sets the standard for graduate/MBA investments textbooks. It blends practical and theoretical
coverage, while maintaining an appropriate rigor and a clear writing
style. Its unifying theme is that security markets are nearly efficient,
meaning that most securities are priced appropriately given their risk
and return attributes. The text places greater emphasis on asset allocation and offers a much broader and deeper treatment of futures,
options, and other derivative security markets than most investment
texts. It is also the only graduate Investments text to offer an online
homework management system, McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance.
Contents
Part I Introduction
1 The Investment Environment
2 Asset Classes and Financial Instruments
3 How Securities are Traded
4 Mutual Funds and Other Investment Companies
Part II Portfolio Theory and Practice
5 Introduction to Risk, Return, and the Historical Record
6 Risk Aversion and Capital Allocation to Risky Assets
7 Optimal Risky Portfolios
8 Index Models
Part III Equilibrium in Capital Markets
9 The Capital Asset Pricing Model
10 Arbitrage Pricing Theory and Multifactor Models of Risk and Return
11 The Efficient Market Hypothesis
12 Behavioral Finance and Technical Analysis
13 Empirical Evidence on Security Returns
Part IV Fixed-Income Securities
14 Bond Prices and Yields
15 The Term Structure of Interest Rates
16 Managing Bond Portfolios
Part V Security Analysis
17 Macroeconomic and Industry Analysis
18 Equity Valuation Models
Part VI Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives
20 Options Markets: Introduction
21 Option Valuation
22 Futures Markets
23 Futures, Swaps, and Risk Management
Part VII Applied Portfolio Management
24 Portfolio Performance Evaluation
25 International Diversification
26 Hedge Funds
27 The Theory of Active Portfolio Management
28 Investment Policy and the Framework of the CFA Institute
References to CFA Problems
Glossary
Name Index
Subject Index
CASE STUDIES IN FINANCE
6th Edition
By Robert F Bruner, University of VA-Charlottesville
2010 (January 2009) / 816 pages
ISBN: 9780073382456
ISBN: 9780071267526 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/bruner6e
Case Studies in Finance, 6e links managerial decisions to capital
markets and the expectations of investors. At the core of almost
all of the cases is a valuation task that requires students to look to
financial markets for guidance in resolving the case problem. The
focus on value helps managers understand the impact of the firm on
the world around it. These cases also invite students to apply modern
information technology to the analysis of managerial decisions. The
cases may be taught in many different combinations. The eight-part
sequence indicated by the table of contents relates to course designs
used at the authors’ schools. Each part of the casebook suggests a
concept module, with a particular orientation.
Contents
Part 1: Setting Some Themes
Case 1 Warren E. Buffett, 2005
Case 2 Bill Miller and Value Trust
Case 3 Ben & Jerry’s Homemade
Case 4 The Battle for Value, 2004: FedEx Corp. vs. United Parcel
Service, Inc.
Part 2: Financial Analysis and Forecasting
Case 5 The Thoughtful Forecaster
Case 6 The Financial Detective, 2005
Case 7 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, Inc.
Case 8 The Body Shop International PLC 2001: An Introduction to
Financial Modeling
Case 9 Horniman Horticulture
Case 10 Kota Fibres, Ltd.
Case 11 Deutsche Brauerei
Case 12 Value Line Publishing: October 2002
Part 3: Estimating the Cost of Capital
Case 13 “Best Practices” in Estimating the Cost of Capital: Survey
and Synthesis”
Case 14 Nike, Inc.: Cost of Capital
Case 15 Teletech Corporation, 2005
Case 16 The Boeing 7E7
Part 4: Capital Budgeting and Resource Allocation
Case 17 The Investment Detective
Case 18 Worldwide Paper Company
Case 19 Target Corporation
Case 20 Aurora Textile Company
Case 21 Compass Records
Case 22 Victoria Chemicals plc (A): The Merseyside Project
Case 23 Victoria Chemicals plc (B): Merseyside and Rotterdam
Projects
Case 24 Euroland Foods S.A.
Case 25 Star River Electronics Ltd.
Part 5: Management of the Firm’s Equity: Dividends, Repurchases, Initial Offerings
Case 26 Gainesboro Machine Tools Corporation
Case 27 EMI
Case 28 JetBlue Airways IPO Valuation
Case 29 TRX, Inc.: Initial Public Offering
Case 30 Purinex, Inc.
Part 6: Management of the Corporate Capital Structure
87
Case 31 An Introduction to Debt Policy and Value
Case 32 Structuring Coprorate Financial Policy: Diagnosis of Problems and Evaluation of Strategies
Case 33 California Pizza Kitchen
Case 34 The Wm. Wrigley Jr. Company: Capital Structure, Valuation,
and Cost of Capital
Case 35 Deluxe Corporation
Case 36 Deutsche Bank Securities: Financing the Acquisition of
Consolidated Supply S.A.
Part 7: Analysis of Financing Tactics: Leases, Options, and
Foreign Currency
Case 37 Baker Adhesives
Case 38 Carrefour S.A.
Case 39 Primus Automation Division, 2002
Case 40 MoGen, Inc.
Part 8: Valuing the Enterprise: Acquisitions and Buyouts
Case 41 Methods of Valuation: Mergers and Acquisitions
Case 42 Arcadian Microarray Technologies, Inc.
Case 43 Yeats Valves and Controls
Case 44 Hershey Foods Corporation
Case 45 General Mills’ Acquisition of Pillsbury from Diageo PLC
Case 46 The Timken Company
Case 47 Matlin Patterson
Case 48 Hostile Takeovers: A Primer for the Decision Maker
Case 49 General Electric’s Proposed Acquisition of Honeywell
10. Indian Premier League
11. Option Pricing Problem Set
12. Tata Steel: The Bid for Corus
MODULE 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
13. Working Capital Management at Excel Crop Care Ltd.
MODULE 4: CAPITAL STRUCTURE, SHORT-TERM AND LONGTERM FINANCING
14. Trent Ltd. Rights Issue of Convertibles and Warrants
15. Financial Instruments Problem Set
16. BGR Energy Systems’ Initial Public Offering
17. Shree Cement Ltd.
18. Fujairah Bank
CASES IN FINANCE
2nd Edition
By Jim DeMello, Western Michigan University—Kalamazoo
2006 / 192 pages
ISBN: 9780072983227
ISBN: 9780071244367 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/demello2e
CONTENTS
CASES IN CORPORATE FINANCE
By SR Viswanath, Institute of Management Technology
2009 (April 2009)
ISBN: 9780070090255
www.mhhe.com/corpfincases
“This book will compete with the HBR cases and also the case problems given in various text-books. But the advantage here is that it
discusses Indian cases and so will be more useful, as the students
will be more familiar with the scenarios described in the cases…The
cases give an overall perspective of a business venture– Prof. Indu
Niranjan, SPJIMR, Mumbai

Basic analytical skills and principles of corporate finance
Functions of modern capital markets and financial institutions
Estimation of cost of capital
Standard techniques of analysis, including capital budgeting
Estimation and management of working capital
The first module consists of cases that form the building blocks of
modern finance. These are on time value of money, risk and return.
The second module covers capital budgeting and valuation. This
module introduces standard DCF models in a variety of settings.
A problem set on option pricing is also included here
The third module is on working capital estimation and management. Case topics include cash budgeting, seasonality and working
capital management
The fourth module (the final one) is on long term financing and
risk management.
Contents
MODULE 1: BUILDING BLOCKS
1. Lisa Mathew’s Investment Opportunities
2. Valuation Problem Set (A)
3. Reliance Capital
4. Cost of Capital for Utilities in India
5. Financial Statements and Industry Structure, 2007
6. The Use of Cash Flow Statements
7. Financial Performance of Major Steel Firms
8. Value Based Management at Marico Ltd.
MODULE 2: CAPITAL BUDGETING AND DISCOUNTED CASH
FLOW VALUATION
9. Valuation Problem Set (B)
88
Case 1- Signal Cable Company; Cash Flow Analysis
Case 2- Bigger Isn’t Always Better; Financial Ratio Analysis
Case 3- Playing the Numbers Game!; DuPont Analysis Case 4-Growing Pains; Financial Forecasting
Case 5- There’s More to Us Than Meets the Eye!; Financial Analysis
and Forecasting
Case 6- Lottery Winnings-Looks Can Be Deceptive; Time Value of
Money
Case 7- It’s Better Late Than Never!; Retirement Planning
Case 8- Paying Off That Dream House; Loan Amortization
Case 9- Wake Up and Smell the Coffee!; Time Value of Money
Case 10- Corporate Bonds-They Are More Complex Than You Think;
Bond Analysis and Valuation
Case 11- How Low Can It Go?; Application of Stock Valuation Methods
Case 12- What Are We Really Worth; Valuation of Common Stock
Case 13- The Lazy Mower: Is It Really Worth It?; Estimating Cash
Flow-New Project Analysis
Case 14- If the Coat Fits, Wear it; Replacement Project Analysis
Case 15- The Dilemma at Day-Pro; Comparison of Capital Budgeting Techniques
Case 16- Too Hot to Handle; Capital Budgeting
Case 17- Flirting with Risk; Risk and Return
Case 18- I Wish I Had a Crystal Ball; Real Options and Capital
Budgeting
Case 19- Can One Size Fit All?; Determining the Cost of Capital Case
20- We Are Not All Alike; Divisional Costs of Capital
Case 21- Where Do We Draw the Line?: Marginal Cost of Capital
and Capital Budgeting
Case 22- EVA – Does It Really Work?; Economic Value Added (EVA)
Case 23- It’s Better to Be Safe Than Sorry!; Evaluating Project Risk
Case 24- Look Before You Leverage; Debt Versus Equity Financing
Case 25- Is It Worth More Dead or Alive?; Bankruptcy and Reorganization
Case 26- Is It Much Ado About Nothing?; Dividend Policy
Case27- Timing Is Everything!; Working Capital Management
Case 28- Getting Our Act Together; Cash Budgeting
Case 29- The Elusive Cash Balance; Cash Budgeting
Case 30- A Switch in Time Saves Nine; Accounts Receivable Management
Case 31- Will it be Worthwhile to Venture?; International Capital
Budgeting
Case 32- When In Doubt, Hedge!; Hedging with Derivatives
Case 33- Made for Each Other; Valuing Corporate Acquisitions Case
34- Why Buy It When You Can Lease It?; Lease Versus Buy Analysis
Money and Capital Markets
CASES IN FINANCE
2nd Edition
By Ben Nunnally, Jr., and D. Anthony Plath, University of North Carolina
1997 / 288 pages
ISBN: 9780071145640 [IE]
MERCHANT BANKING AND FINANCIAL
SERVICES
CONTENTS
By S Gurusamy, Vaishnav College
2009 (June 2009) / 480 pages
ISBN: 9780070153622
PART I. FINANCIAL ANALYSIS, PLANNING AND STRATEGY:
1. Triple A Office Mart.
2. Airline Profitability Analysis.
3. Retirement Planning, Inc.-NEW!.
4. Babes-N-Toyland.
5. Pop’s Recycling Co.
6. Personal Computers, Inc.
7. Personality Associates. 8. Rapid Fire Batteries, Inc.
PART II. WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT:
9. Bison Tool Corp.
10. Aero-Strip, Inc.
11. Ohio Rubber Works.
PART III. CAPITAL BUDGETING:
12. B.J. Plastic Molding Company.
13. Infomercial Entertainment, Inc.
14. Restore Incorporated.
15. Kirby Industries.
16. The Winning Edge, Inc.
17. Gideon Research.
18. Metal Fabricating and Recycling-NEW!
19. Midwood Electronic -NEW!
PART IV. INTERMEDIATE AND LONG-TERM FINANCING:
20. Deal’s Computerland.
21. Clearline Filters, Inc.-NEW!
22. Suburban Electronics Company.
23. Neptune’s Locker, Inc.
24. Burkeville Power and Light.
25. Commercial Builders, Inc.-NEW!
26. Buffalo River Steele Company.
27. * Village Plaza Shopping Center.
PART V. FINANCIAL STRUCTURE, THE COST OF CAPITAL, AND
DIVIDEND POLICY:
28. The Orient Express.
29. Speciality Chemicals, Inc.-NEW!
30. McDermott Manufacturing, Inc.-NEW!
31. High Rock Industries.
32. South East Merchandisers-NEW!
33. Touring Enterprises-NEW!
34. COBA Corporation (Part A).
35. COBA Corporation (Part B).
36. * Cole-Williams, Incorporated.
37. Orchard Mill Development.
38. FuzzyTronic, Inc.
PART VI. OTHER TOPICS IN FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT:
39. Performance Cycle, Inc.
40. Progressive Office Outfitters-NEW!
41. Xtronics Corporation-NEW!
3rd Edition
A good text book on this subject written by a well-known author. This
book can be pitched in where our other titles on this subject do not
fit well for any reason.
Contents
1. Merchant Banking: An Overview
2.Merchant Banking: Regulatory Framework
3.Public Issue Management
4.Marketing of New Issues
5.Post-issue Activities
6.Prospectus
7.Underwriting of Securities
8.Capital Structure Decisions
9.Capital Market Instruments
10.Depository Receipts
11.Stock Exchange: An Overview
12.National Stock Exchange (NSE)
13.Over-the-Counter Exchange of India (OTCEI)
14.M&A Advisory Services
15.Portfolio Management Services
16.Credit Syndication Services
17.Financial Services: An Overview
18.Leasing: An Overview
19.Hire Purchase Finance
20.Bill Financing
21.Factoring and Forfeiting
22.Consumer Finance
23.Real Estate Financing
24.Credit Cards
25.Credit Rating
26.Mutual Funds
27.Venture Capital
MONEY AND CAPITAL MARKETS
10th Edition
By Peter S Rose, Texas A&M University and Milton Marquis, Florida
State University-Tallahassee
ISBN: 9780077235802 (with S&P Bind-In Card)
ISBN: 9780071284325 [IE with S&P Bind-In Card]
ISBN: 9780071268592 [IE without S&P Card]
www.mhhe.com/rose10e
Money and Capital Markets, 10th edition by Peter Rose and Milton
Marquis provides a thorough and comprehensive view of the whole
financial system. All the major types of financial institutions and financial instruments present today are discussed, along with how and
why the system of money and capital markets is changing. Money
and Capital Markets also provides a descriptive explanation of how
interest rates and security values are determined. It discusses the
current and future trends of the globalization of financial markets, the
ongoing consolidation of the financial institutions’ sector, and recent
efforts to protect consumer privacy in the financial services field.
89
CONTENTS
Part One – The Global Financial System in Perspective
Chapter 1 – Functions and Roles of the Financial System in the
Global Economy
Chapter 2 – Financial Assets, Money, Financial Transactions, and
Financial Institutions
Chapter 3 – The Financial Information Marketplace
Chapter 4 – The Future of the Financial System and the Money and
Capital Markets
Part Two – Interest Rates and the Prices of Financial Assets
Chapter 5 – The Determinants of Interest Rates: Competing Ideas
Chapter 6 – Measuring and Calculating Interest Rates and Financial
Asset Prices
Chapter 7 – Inflation and Deflation, Yield Curves, and Duration: Impact
on Interest Rates and Asset Prices
Chapter 8 – The Risk Structure of Interest Rates: Defaults, Prepayments, Taxes, and Other Rate-Determining factors
Chapter 9 – Interest-Rate Forecasting and Hedging: Swaps, Financial
Futures, and Options
Part Three – The Money Market and Central Banking
Chapter 10 – Introduction to the Money Market and the Roles Played
by Governments and Security Dealers
Chapter 11 – Commercial Banks, Major Corporations, and Federal
Credit Agencies in the Money Market
Chapter 12 – Roles and Services of the Federal Reserve and Other
Central Banks Around the World
Chapter 13 – The Tools and Goals of Central Bank Monetary Policy
Part Four – Financial Institutions: Organization, Activities, and
Regulation
Chapter 14 – The Commercial Banking Industry: Structure, Products,
and Management
Chapter 15 – Nonbank Thrift Institutions: Savings and Loans, Savings
Banks, Credit Unions, and Money Market Funds
Chapter 16 – Mutual Funds, Insurance Companies, Investment Banks,
and Other Financial Firms
Chapter 17 – Regulation of the Financial Institutions’ Sector
Part Five – Governments and Businesses in the Financial Marketplace
Chapter 18 – Federal, State, and Local Governments Operating in
the Financial Markets
Chapter 19 – Business Borrowing: Corporate Bonds, Asset-Backed
Securities, Bank Loans, and Other Forms of Business Debt
Chapter 20 – The Market for Corporate Stock
Part Six – Households in the Financial Marketplace
Chapter 21 – Consumer Lending and Borrowing
Chapter 22 – The Residential Mortgage Market
Part Seven- The International Financial System
Chapter 23 – International Transactions and Currency Values
Chapter 24 – International Banking
Money and Capital Markets Dictionary
Index
90
Portfolio Management
NEW
*9780071078016*
SECURITY ANALYSIS AND
PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
By K Sasidharan, School of Asset Management, Cochin and Alex K Mathews, Manathara
Advisory Services
2011 (August 2011) / 708 pages
ISBN: 9780071078016
This book provides a comprehensive coverage on security analysis
as well as portfolio management with a student-friendly approach.
With discussion on latest topics, numerous examples, rich pedagogy,
as well as exercises, it will adequately meet the requirements of business management students.
CONTENTS
1. Investments: Concepts and Features
2. Investment Avenues
3. Indian Capital Market
4. Stock Exchanges in India
5. Stock Market Indices
6. Depository System and Listing of Securities
7. Futures and Options
8. Real Estate
9. Risk and Return
10. Market Regulators
11. Multifactor Risk and Return Models
12. Effi cient Market Hypothesis
13. Company Valuation
14. Equity Valuation
15. Bond Valuation
16. Technical Analysis
17. Fundamental Analysis
18. Portfolio Construction
19. Markowitz Model
20. Sharpe Portfolio Optimisation Model
21. Portfolio Evaluation
22. Portfolio Revision and Management
Appendix A: Investment Analysis
Appendix B: Using Calculator/Coputer for Computations
Appendix C: Standardized Normal Distribution Table
Appendix D: List of Useful Websites
Model Question Paper
Model Question Paper
Index
RUNNING MONEY
Professional Portfolio Management
By Scott Stewart, Christopher Piros and Jeffrey Heisler
2011 (January 2010) / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780073530581
ISBN: 9780071259453 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/sph1e
Derivatives / Futures & Options
NEW
Running Money: Professional Portfolio Management 1e focuses on
the business investment decision-making from the perspective of the
portfolio manager. The authors combined professional experience
managing multi-billion-dollar mandates, working with real clients,
and solving real investment problems is reflected throughout the
text. Their goal is to expose students to what it is really like to “run
money” professionally by providing the necessary tools. This new
text is most effectively used in conjunction with cases, projects, and
real-time portfolios requiring “hands on” application of the material.
Excel Spreadsheets and Outboxes help the students understand the
approach of this first edition text.
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: Client Objectives for Managing Diversified Portfolios
Chapter 3: Asset Allocation: The Mean Variance Framework
Chapter 4: Asset Allocation Inputs
Chapter 5: Advanced Topics in Asset Allocation
Chapter 6: The Investment Management Process
Chapter 7: Introduction to Equity Portfolio Investing
Chapter 8: Equity Portfolio Construction
Chapter 9: Fixed Income Portfolio Management
Chapter 10: Internal Investing
Chapter 11: Alternative Investment Classes
Chapter 12: Portfolio Management Through Time: Taxes and Transaction Costs
Chapter 13: Performance Measurement and Attribution
Chapter 14: Incentives, Ethics and Policy
Chapter 15: Investor and Client Behavior
Chapter 16: Managing Client Relationships
Appendixes
References
Glossary
*9780071313643*
FUTURES AND OPTIONS
By Sunil Parameswaran, Tarheel Consultancy
Services
2011 (October 2010) / 600 pages
ISBN: 9780071313643
This book presents an in-depth exposition of the major derivative
categories, namely futures, options, and swaps. Written in a racy
and conversational style, the book simulates a one-on-one discussion between the reader and the author. It covers the intricacies of
the financial instruments and the markets in which they are traded.
It is embellished with sufficient numerical examples to facilitate the
learning process. Readers are given adequate opportunities to test
their comprehension by way of end-of-chapter questions and review
of key concepts. The book is intended to serve as a one-stop reference for traders, investors, and serious students of Finance. It is a
stand-alone text that seamlessly integrates material on the underlying financial securities such as stocks, stock indices, money and
bond markets, and foreign exchange with the core concepts of the
derivatives markets. It can also serve as a textbook for a graduate
level course on futures and options, and readers should find that it
provides adequate coverage of both forwards and futures contracts
and options contracts. The text can also be used as supplementary
material for courses on financial markets and international finance.
Market professionals will find this book a useful and handy reference
in their daily work.
Features
Foreword by Professor Tom Smith (Australian National University)
Exhaustive coverage of both futures and options
A racy and conversational style of exposition
Numerous illustrations and examples
Assignment questions and review of key concepts
that provide an in-depth test of the readers’ comprehension
CONTENTS
Foreword
About the Author
Preface
Acknowledgments
Figures and Tables
1. Introduction to Futures
2. Valuation of Futures Contracts
3. Hedging and Speculation
4. Orders and Exchanges
5. Money Market Futures
6. Bond Market Futures
7. Foreign Exchange Forwards and Futures
8. Stock and Stock Index Futures
9. Fundamentals of Options
91
10. Arbitrage Restrictions
11. Options Strategies and Profit Diagrams
12. Valuation of Options
13. Options on Stock Indices, Foreign Currencies, Futures Contracts,
and Volatility Indices
14. Exotic Options
15. Term Structure of Interest Rates and Valuation of Interest Rate
Options
16. Fundamentals of Swaps
Index
Chapter 32: Structural Models of Default Risk
Chapter 33: Reduced Form Models of Default Risk
Chapter 34: Modeling Correlated Default
Part VI: Computation
Chapter 35: Derivative Pricing with Finite Differencing
Chapter 36: Derivative Pricing with Monte Carol Simulation
Chapter 37: Using Octave
FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES
DERIVATIVES
By Rangarajan Sundaram and Sanjiv Das
2011 (March 2010) / 940 pages
ISBN: 9780072949315
ISBN: 9780071244800 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/sd1e
It has been the authors’ experience that the overwhelming majority
of students in MBA derivatives courses go on to careers where a
deep conceptual, rather than solely mathematical, understanding
of products and models is required. The first edition of Derivatives
looks to create precisely such a blended approach, one that is formal and rigorous, yet intuitive and accessible. The main body of this
book is divided into six parts. Parts 1-3 cover, respectively, futures
and forwards; options; and swaps. Part 4 examines term-structure
modeling and the pricing of interest-rate derivatives, while Part 5 is
concerned with credit derivatives and the modeling of credit risk. Part
6 discusses computational issues.
Contents
Part 1: Futures and Forwards
Chapter 2: Futures Markets
Chapter 3: Pricing Forwards and Futures I: The Basic Theory
Chapter 4: Pricing Forwards and Futures II
Chapter 5: Hedging with Futures & Forwards
Chapter 6: Interest-Rate Forwards & Futures
Part II: Equity Derivatives
Chapter 7: Options Markets
Chapter 8: Options: Payoffs & Trading Strategies
Chapter 9: No-Arbitrage Restrictions on Option Prices
Chapter 10: Early Exercise and Put-Call Parity
Chapter 11: Option Pricing: An Introduction
Chapter 12: Binomial Option Pricing
Chapter 13: Implementing the Binomial Model
Chapter 14: The Black-Scholes Model
Chapter 15: The Mathematics of Black-Scholes
Chapter 16: Options Modeling: Beyond Black-Scholes
Chapter 17: Sensitivity Analysis: The Option “Greeks”
Chapter 18: Exotic Options I: Path-Independent Options
Chapter 19: Exotic Options II: Path-Dependent Options
Chapter 20: Value-at-Risk
Chapter 21: Convertible Bonds
Chapter 22: Real Options
Part III: Swaps
Chapter 23: Interest-Rate Swaps and Floating Rate Products
Chapter 24: Equity Swaps
Chapter 25: Currency Swaps
Part IV: Interest Rate Modeling
Chapter 26: The Term Structure of Interest Rates: Concepts
Chapter 27: Estimating the Yield Curve
Chapter 28: Modeling Term Structure Movements
Chapter 29: Factor Models of the Term Structure
Chapter 30: The Heath-Jarrow-Morton and Libor Market Models
Part V: Credit Derivative Products
Chapter 31: Credit Derivative Products
92
Markets and Applications in Malaysia,
2nd Edition
By Ismath Bacha Obiyathulla, International Islamic University-Malaysia
2006 / 353 pages
ISBN: 9789833219957
Financial Derivatives: Markets and Applications is designed specifically for a first course in derivatives. It has been written with the
beginner in mind and assumes no previous knowledge or familiarity
with derivatives. Written in an informal, easy to read style, it guides
readers through the challenging and complex world of forwards,
futures and options. As the first book of its kind on Malaysian financial derivatives, the emphasis on local conditions enables easier
understanding. All financial derivative contracts traded in Malaysia
are covered according to their three common applications: hedging,
arbitraging and speculating which are shown by means of fully worked
out examples. Extensive use of illustrations and write-ups provide
easy comprehension of the underlying logic of derivatives.
CONTENTS
1 Derivatives: Introduction and Overview
2 Malaysian Derivatives Markets and Trading
3 Forward and Futures Markets: Pricing and Analysis
4 Stock Index Futures Contracts: Analysis and Applications
5 Interest Rate Futures: The 3-month KLIBOR Futures Contract
6 Introduction to Options
7 Options Contracts: Specifications and Trading
8 Option Strategies and Payoffs
9 Option Pricing
10 Replication, Sythetics and Arbitrage
11 Options in Corporate Finance and Real Options
12 Interest Rate Swaps, FRAs and Credit Derivatives
13 Derivatives Instruments and Islamic Banking
Financial Institutions Management
FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS MANAGEMENT
A Risk Management Approach, 7th Edition
By Anthony Saunders, New York University and Marcia Millon Cornett,
Southern Illinois University—Carbondale
ISBN: 9780073530758
ISBN: 9780071289559 [IE without S&P]
www.mhhe.com/saunders7e
Saunders and Cornett’s Financial Institutions Management: A Risk
Management Approach 7/e provides an innovative approach that
focuses on managing return and risk in modern financial institutions.
The central theme is that the risks faced by financial institutions
managers and the methods and markets through which these risks
are managed are becoming increasingly similar whether an institution
is chartered as a commercial bank, a savings bank, an investment
bank, or an insurance company. Although the traditional nature of each
sector’s product activity is analyzed, a greater emphasis is placed on
new areas of activities such as asset securitization, off-balance-sheet
banking, and international banking.
Part III Managing Risk
Ch. 18 Liability and Liquidity Management
Appendix 18A Federal Reserve Requirement Accounting
Appendix 18B Bankers Acceptances and Commercial Paper as
Sources of Financing
Ch. 19 Deposit Insurance and Other Liability Guarantees
Appendix 19A Calculation of Deposit Insurance Premiums
Appendix 19B FDIC Press Releases of Bank Failures
Appendix 19C Deposit Insurance Coverage for Commercial Banks
in Various Countries
Ch. 20 Capital Adequacy
Appendix 20A Internal Ratings-Based Approach to Measuring Credit
Risk-Adjusted Assets
Ch. 21 Product and Geographic Expansion
Appendix 21A EU and G-10 Countries: Regulatory Treatment of the
Mixing of Banking, Securities, and Insurance Activities and the Mixing
of Banking and Commerce (online)
Ch. 22 Futures and Forwards
Appendix 22A Microhedging with Futures (online)
Ch. 23 Options, Caps, Floors, and Collars
Appendix 23A Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model (online)
Appendix 23B Microhedging with Options (online)
Ch. 24 Swaps
Appendix 24A Setting Rates on an Interest Rate Swap
Ch. 25 Loan Sales
Ch. 26 Securitization
Appendix 26A Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac Balance Sheets (online)
Contents
Part I Introduction
Ch. 1 Why Are Financial Institutions Special?
Appendix 1A The Financial Crisis: The Failure of Financial Services
Specialness
Appendix 1B Monetary Policy Tools (online)
Ch. 2 Financial Services: Depository Institutions
Appendix 2A Financial Statement Analysis Using a Return on Equity
(ROE) Framwork (online)
Appendix 2B Commercial Bank’ Financial Statements and Analysis
(online)
Appendix 2C Depository Institutions and Their Regulators (online)
Appendix 2D Technology in Commercial Banking (online)
Ch. 3 Financial Services: Insurance
Ch. 4 Financial Services: Securities Brokerage and Investment
Banking
Ch. 5 Financial Services: Mutual Funds and Hedge Funds
Ch. 6 Financial Services: Finance Companies
Ch. 7 Risks of Financial Institutions
Part II Measuring Risk
Ch. 8 Interest Rate Risk I
Appendix 8A The Maturity Model (online)
Appendix 8B Term Structure of Interest Rates
Ch. 9 Interest Rate Risk II
Appendix 9A The Basics of Bond Valuation (online)
Appendix 9B Incorporating Convexity into the Duration Model
Ch. 10 Market Risk
Ch. 11 Credit Risk: Individual Loan Risk
Appendix 11A Credit Analysis (online)
Appendix 11B Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model (online)
Ch. 12 Credit Risk: Loan Portfolio and Concentration Risk
Appendix 12A CreditMetrics
Appendix 12B CreditRisk+
Ch. 13 Off-Balance-Sheet Risk
Appendix 13A A Letter of Credit Transaction (online)
Ch. 14 Foreign Exchange Risk
Ch. 15 Sovereign Risk
Appendix 15A Mechanisms for Dealing with Sovereign Risk Exposure
Ch. 16 Technology and Other Operational Risks
Ch. 17 Liquidity Risk
Appendix 17A Sources and Uses of Funds Statement, Bank of
America, December 2005 (online)
Financial Institutions and Markets
NEW
*9780078034664*
FINANCIAL MARKETS &
INSTITUTIONS
5th Edition
By Anthony Saunders, New York University and
Marcia Millon Cornett, Bentley University
ISBN: 9780078034664
ISBN: 9780071086745 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/sc5e
Financial Markets and Institutions, 5e offers a unique analysis of
the risks faced by investors and savers interacting through financial
institutions and financial markets, as well as strategies that can be
adopted for controlling and managing risks. Special emphasis is put
on new areas of operations in financial markets and institutions such
as asset securitization, off-balance-sheet activities, and globalization
of financial services.
New to this edition
McGraw-Hill’s Connect Finance. Connect Finance offers a
number of powerful tools and features to make managing assignments
93
easier, so you can spend more time teaching. Students can engage
with their coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning
process more accessible and efficient. In short, Connect Finance
facilitates student learning and optimizes your time and energies, enabling you to focus on course content, teaching, and student learning.
problems.
improvement.
learning outcomes.
version of Financial Markets and Institutions, linked to additional
study features, so that students can easily refer back to the text for
review and guidance.
12. Commercial Banks’ Financial Statements and Analysis
13. Regulation of Commercial Banks
Part IV. Other Financial Institutions
14. Other Lending Institutions: Savings Institutions, Credit Unions,
and Finance Companies
15. Insurance Companies
16. Securities Firms and Investment Banks
17. Mutual Funds and Hedge Funds
18. Pension Funds
Part V. Risk Management in Financial Institutions
19. Types of Risks Incurred by Financial Institutions
20. Managing Credit Risk on the Balance Sheet
21. Managing Liquidity Risk on the Balance Sheet
22. Managing Interest Rate and Insolvency Risk on the Balance Sheet
23. Managing Risk off the Balance Sheet with Derivative Securities
24. Managing Risk off the Balance Sheet with Loan Sales and Securitization
FINANCIAL MARKET
Extensive new coverage of and features related to the financial
crisis of 2008-2009 have been integrated throughout the text. Virtually every chapter includes new material detailing how the financial
crisis affected risk management in financial institutions. Examples of
this new coverage include:
By Pok Wee Ching, Mohd Nizal Haniff, Ganisen Sinnasamy, Rashid
Ameer, Sharifah Fadzlon Abdul Hamid
ISBN: 9789833850891 [Printed and Sold in Malaysia]
New Appendix 1A describing events leading up to the financial
crisis, events occurring at the peak of the crisis, and events associated with the aftermath of the crisis, including changes to financial
institutions, the impact on the US and world economics, federal financial and fiscal rescue efforts, and proposed regulatory changes.
A new boxed feature, Notable Events from the Financial Crisis,
appears throughout the book.
Chapter 4 includes discussion of the actions taken by the Federal
Reserve and other international central banks during and after
the financial crisis.
Chapters 5 through 10 highlight the effects of the financial crisis
on various financial markets and include discussions of the freezing of commercial paper markets, the municipal default crisis, the
mortgage market meltdown, and the role of credit derivatives in
the financial crisis.
Chapter 13 provides a synopsis of the Wall Street Reform and
Consumer Protection Act of 2010, the FDIC’s attempts to deal
with the liquidity crisis, a discussion of the TARP Capital Purchase
Program, and a review of the new international capital standards
being implemented for depository institutions worldwide.
Several chapters include discussions of major firms that have
been lost or dramatically altered as a result of the financial crisis,
including the failure of Bear Stearns, Lehman Brothers, and AIG;
conversions of Goldman Sachs, Morgan Stanley, GMAC, and CIT
Group to bank holding companies; the failure of Primary Reserve
Money Market Funds, and the failure of CIT Group.
Financial Market is an introductory textbook in the area of finance.
The book discusses on various basic topics on Malaysian financial
market such investing in shares, bonds and derivatives instruments.
It endeavors to provide a clear, simple and practical style of delivering
the subject matter to the reader via worked examples, graphs, tables
and illustrations. This is to ensure readers have good grasps of the
basic principles, theories and practical applications. The book also
includes topics of regional and global importance such as the Asian
Financial Crisis and recent US Subprime Mortgage Crisis to provide
an understanding of the impact of the crisis to the financial market.
Another key distinguishing feature of this book is it has included a
chapter about the Malaysian Islamic Capital Market. The discussion
about the various Islamic financial instruments has been kept simple
without excessive technical and legal jargons. This clearly differentiates it from others on the shelf. The authors hope that the book’s focus
on easy manner discussion approach to the various financial emerging
topics would leave the reader intellectually stimulated and satisfied.
Tables and figures in all chapters have been updated to include
the most recent available data.
Contents
Part I. Introduction and Overview of Financial Markets
1. Introduction
2. Determinants of Interest Rates
3. Interest Rates and Security Valuation
4. The Federal Reserve System, Monetary Policy, and Interest Rates
Part II. Securities Markets
5. Money Markets
6. Bond Markets
7. Mortgage Markets
8. Stock Markets
9. Foreign Exchange Markets
10. Derivative Securities Markets
Part III. Commercial Banks
11. Commercial Banks: Industry Overview
94
FINANCIAL MARKET ESSENTIALS
By Christopher Viney
ISBN: 9780070286658
www.mhhe.com/au/viney_ess1e
Christopher Viney is firmly established as Australia’s leading textbook
author in Financial Institutions and Markets thanks to his marketleading title Financial Institutions Instruments & Markets. Now Viney
has produced a completely new text to provide first year students with
a quality, authoritative product in a package that meets the unique
needs of a shorter, first year course: Financial Market Essentials.
Financial Market Essentials is a ground-up text from a trusted name,
specifically designed for use by academics that need a resource for a
12 week course. It is carefully crafted to cover the essentials without
omitting important concepts. It strikes the right balance between
real-world examples and theory, is full of current issues and topical
cases and, thanks to Viney’s enthusiasm and style, this is a text that
really engages students.
Features
Comprehensive coverage of globalisation, deregulation, technology and competition
Finance Minutes case studies and chapter on government debt
updated in light of current issues in finance
21 Interest rate swaps, currency swaps and credit default swaps
New chapter on risk management and derivatives
CONTENTS
Ch 1. What is a financial system and how does it work?
Ch 2. Interest rates, monetary policy and the economy
Ch 3. Commercial banks and investment banks
Ch 4. Personal finance
Ch 5. Business finance
Ch 6. Corporate finance
Ch 7. The stock exchange
Ch 8. Understanding the share market
Ch 9. International financial markets
Ch 10. Government debt and the payments system
Ch 11. An introduction to risk management and derivatives
Ch 12. Case studies in financial crises
Bank Management
NEW
*9780078034671*
BANK MANAGEMENT &
FINANCIAL SERVICES
9th Edition
FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS, INSTRUMENTS
AND MARKETS
By Peter S Rose, Texas A&M University and
Sylvia C Hudgins, Old Dominion University
6th Edition
By Christopher Viney, Deakin University
2009
ISBN: 9780070140899
www.mhhe.com/au/viney6e
This text discusses the structure, functions and operations of a
modern financial system and, crucially, recognises that finance is a
global business. Therefore, as well as solid integration of the local
financial environment, the international aspect has been considered
essential and means the text is as relevant to a commercial bank in
Hong Kong as to an investment bank in Sydney. Comprehensively
updated to take account of the continuing crisis in the world financial
market, this text has been further improved with an additional chapter
on risk management and derivatives. This provides flexibility to the
lecturer, who may choose to cover the four chapters in Part 6 or rely
simply on the more concise coverage of Chapter 18.
Contents
Part 1: Financial Institutions
1 A modern financial system: An overview
2 Commercial banks
3 Non-bank financial institutions
Part 2: Equity Markets
4 The share market and the corporation
5 Corporations issuing equity in the share market
6 Investors in the share market
7 Forecasting share price movements
Part 3: The Corporate Debt Market
8 Mathematics of finance: An introduction to basic concepts and
calculations
9 Short-term debt
10 Medium- to long-term debt
11 International debt markets
Part 4: Government, Debt, Monetary Policy, The Payment System
& Interest Rates
12 Government debt, monetary policy and the payments system
13 An introduction to interest rate determination and forecasting
14 Interest rate risk measurement
Part 5: The Foreign Exchange Market
15 Foreign exchange: The structure and operation of the FX market
16 Foreign exchange: Factors that influence the exchange rate
17 Foreign exchange: Risk identification and management
Part 6: Derivative Markets and Risk Management
18 An introduction to risk management and derivatives
19 Futures contracts and forward rate agreements
20 Options
ISBN: 9780078034671
ISBN: 9780071326421 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/rosehudgins9e
Bank Management and Financial Services, now in its ninth edition,
is designed primarily for students interested in pursuing careers in
or learning more about the financial services industry. It explores the
services that banks and their principal competitors (including savings
and loans, credit unions, security and investment firms) offer in an
increasingly competitive financial-services marketplace.
Contents
PART ONE Introduction to Banking and Financial Services
1. An Overview of the Changing Financial-Services Sector
2. The Impact of Government Policy and Regulation on the FinancialServices Industry
3. The Organization and Structure of Banking and the FinancialServices Industry
4. Establishing New Banks, Branches, ATMs, Telephone Services,
and Web Sites
PART TWO Financial Statements and Financial-Firm Performance
5. The Financial Statements of Banks and Their principal Competitors
6. Measuring and Evaluating the Performance of Banks and Their
Principal Competition
PART THREE Tools for Managing and Hedging Against Risk
7. Risk Management for Changing Interest Rates: Asset-Liability
Management and Duration Techniques
8. Risk Management: Financial Futures, Options, Swaps, and Other
Hedging Tools
9. Risk Management: Asset-Backed Securities, Loan Sales, Credit
Stanbys, and CreStandbysivatives
PART FOUR Managing Investment Portfolios and Liquidity Positions for Financial Firms
10. The Investment Function in Financial Services Management
11. Liquidity and Reserves Management: Strategies and Policies
PART FIVE Managing Sources of Funds for a Financial Firm
12. Managing and Pricing Deposit Services
13. Managing Nondeposit Liabilities
14. Investment Banking, Insurance, and Other Sources of Fee Income
15. The Management of Capital
PART SIX Providing Loans to Businesses and Consumers
16. Lending Policies and Procedures: Managing Credit Risk
17. Lending to Business Firms and Pricing Business Loans
18. Consumer Loans, Credit Cards, and Real Estate Lending
95
International Financial Management
Global edition
NEW
*9780078034657*
Part Four: World Financial Markets and Institutions
Chapter 11: International Banking and Money Market
Chapter 12: International Bond Market
Chapter 13: International Equity Markets
Chapter 14: Interest Rate and Currency Swaps
Chapter 15: International Portfolio Investment
Part Five: Financial Management of the Multinational Firm
Chapter 16: Foreign Direct Investment and Cross-Border Acquisitions
Chapter 17: International Capital Structure and the Cost of Capital
Chapter 18: International Capital Budgeting
Chapter 19: Multinational Cash Management
Chapter 20: International Trade Finance
Chapter 21: International Tax Environment and Transfer Pricing
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
6th Edition
By Cheol Eun, Georgia Inst of Tech and Bruce G
Resnick, Wake Forest University
2012 (March 2011) / 576 pages
ISBN: 9780078034657
ISBN: 9780071316972 [GE] - pub Oct 2011
www.mhhe.com/er6e
International Financial Management is written based on two distinct
parts: emphasis on the basics and emphasis on a managerial perspective. As capital markets of the world become more integrated, a
solid understanding of international finance has become essential for
astute corporate decision making. International Financial Management, Sixth Edition, provides students with a foundation for analysis
that will serve them well in their careers ahead. The decision-making
process is presented through the text with the goal of teaching
students how to make informed managerial decisions in an evolving global financial landscape. International Financial Management
has been completely updated with the most current data tables and
statistics in the field today.
New to this edition
New and expanded coverage of recent economic developments
such as the global financial crisis, the sovereign debt crisis of Europe,
cross-listing and security regulation, and Basel III capital adequacy
standards.
Application of key concepts through real-world scenarios, illustrated by International Finance in Practice boxes, Mini-cases,
and Case Applications. New real-world examples cover topics such
as hedging, FX market growth, and the danger of currency swaps.
Fully updated market data and statistics are integrated throughout the text. Some of this includes updated statistical analysis of
international markets and diversification with small-cap stocks.
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE
By Ashok Robin, Rochester Institute Technology
2011 (January 2010) / 512 pages
ISBN: 9780073530666
ISBN: 9780071325868 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/robin1e
With the ongoing global economic crisis still taking full effect on today’s
society, International Corporate Finance 1e brings a fresh approach
and perspective on present events. This text focuses on a key player
in this financial world: multinational corporations (MNC). By applying
general financial concepts and procedures, it explains the conduct
of financial management in MNCs. Because most corporations are
either directly or indirectly affected by multinational entities and have
a global exposure, a study of MNCH financial management has broad
applicability. This new text takes a quantitative approach with an
emphasis on excel spreadsheets and current examples.
Contents
Chapter 2: International Financial Markets: Structure and Innovation
Chapter 3: Currency and Eurocurrency Derivatives
Chapter 4: Currency Systems and Valuation
Chapter 5: Currency Parity Conditions
Chapter 6: Currency Risk Exposure Measurement
Chapter 7: Currency Exposure Management
Chapter 8: Capital Budgeting
Chapter 9: Advanced Capital Budgeting
Chapter 10: Long Term Financing
Chapter 11: Optimizing and Financing Working Capital
Chapter 12: International Alliances and Acquisitions
Chapter 13: International Trade
Chapter 14: International Taxation and Accounting
Chapter 15: International Portfolio Investments
Contents
Part One: Foundations of International Financial Management
Chapter 1: Globalization and the Multinational Firm
Chapter 2: International Monetary System
Chapter 3: Balance of Payments
Chapter 4: Corporate Governance Around the World
Part Two: The Foreign Exchange Market, Exchange Rate Determination, and Currency Derivatives
Chapter 5: The Market for Foreign Exchange
Chapter 6: International Parity Relationships and Forecasting Foreign
Exchange Rates
Chapter 7: Futures and Options on Foreign Exchange
Part Three: Foreign Exchange Exposure and Management
Chapter 8: Management of Transaction Exposure
Chapter 9: Management of Economic Exposure
Chapter 10: Management of Translation Exposure
96
INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
An Analytical Approach, 3rd Edition
By Imad Moosa, La Trobe University
ISBN: 9780070278516
www.mhhe.com/au/moosa3e
The third edition of Imad Moosa’s International Finance text has been
significantly updated and revised in this long awaited third edition.
The book is organised by starting with the basic concepts, markets,
institutions and arrangements before moving on to a description of
international financial operations. The book integrates international
coverage with appropriate discussions of Australia and the regional
context throughout. With a clear and engaging writing style, strong
Financial Planning
pedagogical framework and current data International Finance is the
ideal choice for upper level undergraduate and postgraduate courses.
Contents
Ch 1 An Overview
Ch 2 The Foreign Exchange Market
Ch 3 The Balance of Payments and Effective Exchange Rate
Ch 4 Exchange Rate Determination
Ch 5 The International Monetary System and Exchange Rate Arrangements
Ch 6 The Eurocurrency Market and International Banking
Ch 7 International Banking Regulation and Basel Accords
Ch 8 Exchange Rate Forecasting, Technical Analysis and Trading
Rules
Ch 9 Currency Futures and Swaps
Ch 10 Currency Options
Ch 11 International Arbitarage
Ch 12 Foreign Exchange Risk and Exposure
Ch 13 Foreign Exchange Risk Management
Ch 14 International Short-Term Financing and Investment
Ch 15 International Long-Term Financing and Investment
Ch 16 Foreign Direct Investment and International Capital Budgeting
Useful websites
Currency symbols
List of formulae
Glossary
Index
Behavioral Finance
BEHAVIORAL CORPORATE FINANCE
By Hersh Shefrin, Santa Clara University
ISBN: 9780072848656
ISBN: 9780071257367 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/shefrin
Contents
1- Behavioral Foundations.
2- Valuation.
3- Capital Budgeting.
4- Perceptions About Risk and Return.
5- Inefficient Markets and Corporate Decisions.
6- Capital Structure.
7- Dividend Policy.
8- Agency Conflicts and Corporate Governance.
9- Group Process.
10- Mergers and Acquisitions.
11- Application of Real-Option Techniques to Capital Budgeting and
Capital Structure (on the website only)
financial planning and wealth
management
An International Perspective
By Louis T W Cheng, Yan Tak Leung and Y H Wong
2009 (August 2008) / Softcover
ISBN: 9780071249843
Financial Planning and Wealth Management provides an updated date
and detailed documentation on what financial planning and wealth
management means and how it is being implemented in theory and
practice. This textbook also provide insights on the future development of the professions, and new theoretical concepts that are not
popular now but are critical to enhance the financial planning and
wealth management services for clients in the long run. This book
is the first of its kind published in Asia providing a holistic knowledge
on financial planning and wealth management in a textbook format.
Contents
Part I Fundamental Concepts of Financial Planning and Wealth
Management
1 An Overview of the Financial Planning and Wealth Management
Professions
2 Financial Planning: Basic Concepts, Professional Ethics, and
Practice Standards
3 Essential Concepts in Economics and Finance
4 Financial Planning Components (Part I)
5 Financial Planning Components (Part II)
6 Personal Profiling, Risk Profiling, and Life-cycle Analysis
Part II The Financial Planning Process
7 Step 1: Establishing Client-Planner Relationship
8 Step 2: Determining Client Goals and Expectations and Gathering
Client Data
9 Step 3: Determining Client’s Current Financial Status
10 Step 4: Developing and Presenting the Financial Plan
11 Steps 5 and 6: Implementing and Monitoring the Financial Plan
Part III Wealth Management
12 Investment Techniques (Part I)
13 Investment Techniques (Part II)
14 Asset Allocation Strategies
Part IV Advanced Topics
15 The Concept of Total Life Planning
16 Total Wealth Index
17 Conclusion
97
Personal Finance
The goal of building a personal financial plan is emphasized by
the model: Learn, Plan & Act, Evaluate (LPAE). This model is updated
in every chapter.
Learn - bulleted summaries of the topics students have studied
and the objectives achieved.
NEW
*9780073530659*
PERSONAL FINANCE
By Robert Walker, Kirkwood Comm College
ISBN: 9780073530659
ISBN: 9780071318181 [IE]
This new book offers students a comprehensive and engaging treatment of personal finance, while incorporating unique themes, an
application-driven pedagogy, and a definitive action plan. Unlike other
texts on the market, it offers a frank and timely discussion of living
within one’s means and incorporating personal values and priorities
into a personal financial plan. The intent is to help readers set priorities that guide their finances, rather than the other way around. This
book establishes a path toward financial freedom that is less about
accumulating wealth and more about building a future tailored to
individual goals. With Walker/Walker, your future looks bright!
Plan & Act - a checklist of action items for students to do while
setting up their financial plan.
Evaluate - questions that help students analyze the effectiveness of their plan.
An online Goal Tracker at the end of each chapter helps students create their own financial plan and align their personal goals
with their finances.
Worksheets, highlighted at the end of each chapter (and housed
in full online), show students step-by-step how to get financial aspects
of their lives under control. For example, in Chapter 5, a chapter on
credit cards, one of the accompanying worksheets guides students
through how to access a credit report, follow up on inaccuracies, and
develop action plans to improve their overall score.
QR Codes allow access to relevant content about current events
remind students of the broader implications of personal finance.
EATURES
In addition, Personal Finance addresses two persistent course
challenges: how to engage students in the material and how to reach
students who lack the computational skills needed to solve financial
problems.
Personal Finance focuses on three main goals and themes: responsible financial decision making, alignment of personal and financial goals, and the importance of maintaining a personal financial plan.
1. Engaging Students – To help students become and stay
engaged with the variety of personal finance topics in the course,
the textbook includes:
1. Responsible Financial Decision Making – Before students can
develop their own financial plan, they must understand the key terms,
concepts, and principles of financial planning. To address that need,
the text offers a comprehensive table of contents and pedagogical
features, providing students with the foundation they need to make
responsible financial decisions.
Chapter-opening scenarios that make the topics real and relatable to student readers. Personal finance is, well, personal. The
chapter-opening scenarios lay the groundwork for the importance of
the chapter topic by sharing the stories of real people. These stories
illuminate how financial planning (or the lack of) affects people differently depending on their age and life situation.
Learning Objectives shape the organization and goals of each
chapter. These objectives link to individual sections of the book and
are referenced in the review and assessment materials, allowing
instructors to assign the most important concepts in personal finance
in a deliberate and complete fashion and test students’ mastery of
that content.
In the News boxes, which incorporate current events into the text.
Examples of real-life situations to reinforce concepts and lessons. These examples are taken from current events, hypothetical
situations, and actual experiences.
Concept checks in the Making Sense boxes at the end of each
section test students’ retention of key content.
Financial Fitness boxes, which provide additional interesting
and useful tips and information about different aspects of financial
planning.
Quality end-of-chapter concept questions and quantitative practice problems, along with a running case for concept application, allow
additional opportunities for assessment and review.
You’re the Expert cases, which are extended problems that put
students in hypothetical situations and then ask them to lay out a
financial plan and solve problems.
2. Alignment of Personal and Financial Goals – Personal
Finance sets itself apart from the field by helping students direct
their finances according to their goals. While maximizing wealth
may well be in the long-term interests of many, not everyone is
going to be wealthy – nor is everyone motivated by the pursuit
of wealth. Similarly, the text examines the value of mindful
spending and emphasizes the importance of living within one’s
means by living simply, reducing consumption, and budgeting
for a long-term, sustainable financial plan.
Interesting quotes about finance. Students have enjoyed the
Walkers’ quotes and have demonstrated their enthusiasm by sharing
new ones, many of which are included in this volume.
Financial Fitness / Stopping Little Leaks boxes give creative and,
in some cases, eye-opening tips about how cutting down on small,
unnecessary spending can lead to big savings.
An online Every Penny Counts spending journal and instructions
for using it effectively encourages mindful spending.
Maintaining a Personal Financial Plan – Students are encouraged to actively assess their relationship with money by including in
every section examples relevant to students’ lives and plans. In this
way, the text teaches students to make and review financial plans
as a lifelong habit.
98
Live and interactive media through the authors’ blog (www.frugalfunandfinancialfitness.blogspot.com) and Twitter account (@frugalfinances). Through these resources, students can access additional
articles, tips, and thoughts about finance directly from the authors.
QR codes, which enable students to use their smartphones to
access relevant, updated content about current events or chapter
quizzes directly from the Walker website.
2. Solving Financial Problems – To help students master the
math in personal finance, the text incorporates the following strategies and tools:
A detailed explanation of time value of money early in the book
(Chapter 2). This allows students time to learn the concept and then
move on to applying it throughout the course, in different areas of
personal finance.
Doing the Math boxes throughout each chapter present example
problems that require the use of financial calculations to solve.
to make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time
quizzes, and tests directly from the end-of-chapter materials or test
bank. Problems are available as both static and algorithmic problems,
and there are also multiple-choice conceptual questions.
improvement.
Questions mapped to AACSB skill areas, Bloom’s Taxonomy
levels, and difficulty level enable you to run reports that assess specific learning outcomes.
Interactive Applications stimulate critical thinking and reinforce
key concepts, and students receive immediate feedback and can track
their progress in their own report. Students will be asked to “click and
drag” specific choices to make decisions, categorize, or put in a time
sequence, and then are asked multiple-choice questions to confirm
understanding of the key concepts of the activity.
Detailed Feedback offers the option to present worked-out solutions to the problem, showing the students each step of the process.
A Self Quiz and Study program allows students to evaluate
their performance through a practice test and then receive recommendations for specific readings from the text, supplemental study
learning objective.
Connect Plus Finance combines all the great features of Connect Finance, along with access to an online version of Personal
Finance, so that students can easily refer back to the text for review
and guidance. This media rich e-book links directly to tutorials and
online resources.
CONTENTS
Section One: MONEY $ MONEY $ MONEY $
Chapter 1 Money Matters: Values, Vision, Mission, and You
Chapter 2 Time Value of Money
Chapter 3 Planning and Budgeting
Chapter 4 Financial Instruments and Institutions
Section Two: CREDIT MANAGEMENT
Chapter 5 Consumer Credit: Credit Cards and Student Loans
Chapter 6 Credit Bureau Reports and Identity Theft
Chapter 7 Auto and Home Loans
Chapter 8 Debt, Foreclosure, and Bankruptcy
Section Three: LIMITING YOUR LIABILITY
Chapter 9 Tax Management
Chapter 10 Insurance: Covering Your Assets
Section Four: WEALTH ACCUMULATION
Chapter 11 Investment Basics
Chapter 12 Mutual Funds
Chapter 13 Stocks
Chapter 14 Bonds
Chapter 15 Real Estate Investments
Section Five: PERPETUAL PAYOFFS
Chapter 16 Retirement and Estate Planning
Chapter 17 Financial Planning for Life
NEW
*9780073530697*
PERSONAL FINANCE
10th Edition
By Jack R Kapoor, College of Dupage, Les
R Dlabay, Lake Forest College and Robert J
Hughes, Dallas County Comm College
2012 (January 2011) / 768 pages
ISBN: 9780073530697
ISBN: 9780071327657 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/kapoor10e
Your journey to financial freedom starts here! Kapoor/Dlabay/Hughes’
market-leading Personal Finance provides practical guidance on how
students can achieve peace of mind with regard to their financial situation. It provides many financial planning tools using a step-by-step
approach to help students identify and evaluate choices as well as
understand the consequences of decisions in terms of opportunity
costs. Managing money in order to obtain freedom from financial
worries – that’s what the 10th edition of Personal Finance is all about!
New to this edition
Connect Finance offers a number of powerful tools and features to
make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time
improvement.
learning outcomes.
LearnSmart ensures your students are learning faster, studying
more efficiently, and retaining more knowledge. It pinpoints concepts the student does not understand and maps out a personalized
study plan for success. Based on students’ self-diagnoses of their
proficiency, LearnSmart intelligently provides students with a series
of adaptive questions. This provides students with a personalized
one-on-one tutor experience.
Interactive Applications stimulate critical thinking and reinforce key
concepts, and students receive immediate feedback and can track
their progress in their own report. Students will be asked to “click
and drag” specific choices to make decisions, categorize, or put in
a time sequence, and then are asked multiple-choice questions to
confirm understanding of the key concepts of the activity.
learning objective.
99
version of Personal Finance, linked to additional study features, so
that students can easily refer back to the text for review and guidance.
In response to the economic crisis, the authors address the real
and changing financial needs and dilemmas of students. For example,
the book guides students through career planning and discusses the
importance of identifying their own strengths and weaknesses as
well as opportunities and threats within their chosen field. In a time
when finding a job is especially challenging, the book also suggests
actions for improving employability in tough economic times. In addition, Personal Finance, 10e addresses getting and staying out of
debt; financing college education; managing a future financial crisis;
and investing in conservative securities to minimize losses during
economic downturns.
Every chapter has been revised and updated with information
most relevant to today’s students. New material includes coverage of:

Financial planning, housing, and banking phone applications
Social entrepreneurship as a career option
Cross-cultural financial services
Rent-to-buy options
New legislation including the Credit Card Act of 2009, The Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act, and The Health Care and
Education Reconciliation Act of 2010
The Tenth Edition builds on an already unmatched pedagogical
program with the following new features:
How To boxes in every chapter walk students step by step through
specific personal finance activities such as filing taxes online or
opening a brokerage account.
New “My Life Stages” boxes at the end of each chapter recommend to students the financial preparations they should consider at
different stages in their life. This addresses the needs of changing
demographics within the personal finance course area since it now
includes many returning and part time students.
Contents
Part 1 Planning Your Personal Finances
1 Personal Finance Basics and the Time Value of Money
Appendix: The Time Value of Money
2 Financial Aspects of Career Planning
Appendix: Resumes, Cover Letters, and Interviews
3 Money Management Strategy: Financial Statements and Budgeting
4 Planning Your Tax Strategy
Part 2 Managing Your Personal Finances
5 Financial Services: Savings Plans and Payment Accounts
6 Introduction to Consumer Credit
7 Choosing a Source of Credit: The Costs of Credit Alternatives
Part 3 Making Your Purchasing Decisions
8 Consumer Purchasing Strategies and Legal Protection
9 The Housing Decision: Factors and Finances
Part 4 Insuring Your Resources
10 Property and Motor Vehicle Insurance
11 Health, Disability, and Long-Term Care Insurance
12 Life Insurance
Part 5 Investing Your Financial Resources
13 Investing Fundamentals
14 Investing in Stocks
15 Investing in Bonds
16 Investing in Mutual Funds
17 Investing in Real Estate and Other Investment Alternatives
Part 6 Controlling Your Financial Future
18 Starting Early: Retirement Planning
19 Estate Planning
Appendixes
Appendix A: Financial Planners and Other Financial Planning Information Sources
Appendix B: Consumer Agencies and Organizations
Appendix C: Daily Spending Diary
Endnotes
Photo Credits
Index
Personal Financial Planner
100
NEW
*9780071078863*
MANAGING YOUR
PERSONAL FINANCE
By Patrick Kheng Ping Chan
2011 (August 2010) / 160 pages
ISBN: 9780071078863
Managing Your Personal Finances aims to increase the financial
literacy of individuals and help them to better manage their finances.
Covering the insights and various elements of personal financial planning, this book equips them with the financial road map and tools,
via a structured financial planning process alongside relevant case
studies and useful pointers, to help them achieve their financial goals.
Managing Your Personal Finances lays the foundation essential for
managing one’s personal finances. The book is organized into 5 main
parts focusing on the 5G of wealth management.
Contents
Preface
About the Author
Part 1- Grounding your wealth
Chapter 1 Why do you want to be a millionaire?
Chapter 2 Mind your own finances
Chapter 3 Financial health checkup
Part 2- Generating your wealth
Chapter 4 Creation of wealth: Multiple sources of income
Chapter 5 Cash management: Making your money work harder
than you
Part 3- Guarding your wealth
Chapter 6 Wealth preservation with debt management
Chapter 7 Wealth preservation with tax planning
Chapter 8 Wealth protection with insurance planning
Part 4- Growing your wealth
Chapter 9 Compounding your money for wealth growth
Chapter 10 Wealth accumulation with investment
Part 5 – Giving your wealth
Chapter 11 Wealth accumulation for retirement
Chapter 12 Wealth distribution with estate planning
References
PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING
By Lewis J Altfest, PACE University
2007 (April 2006) / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780072536409
ISBN: 9780071252935 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/altfest
CONTENTS
PART I PLANNING BASICS.
Chapter 1 Introduction to PFP.
Chapter 2 Time Value of Money.
Chapter 3 Beginning the Planning Process.
PART II ONGOING HOUSEHOLD PLANNING.
Chapter 4 Household Finance.
Chapter 5 Financial Statements Analysis.
Chapter 6 Cash Flow Planning.
Chapter 7 Debt.
PART III PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT.
Chapter 8 Non Financial Investments.
Chapter 9 Financial Investments.
Chapter 10 Risk Management.
PART IV SPECIALIZED PLANNING.
Chapter 11 Other Insurance.
Chapter 12 Retirement Planning.
Chapter 13 Educational Planning.
PART V TAX AND ESTATE PLANNING.
Chapter 14 Tax Planning.
Chapter 15 Estate Planning.
PART VI PLANNING ESSENTIALS.
Chapter 16 Stocks, Bonds and Mutual Funds.
Chapter 17 Background Topics.
PART VII INTEGRATED DECISION MAKING.
Chapter 18 Capital Needs Analysis.
Chapter 19 Behavioral Financial Planning.
Chapter 20 Completing the Process.
PART VIII FURTHER SPECIALIZED TOPICS.
A. Special Circumstances Planning.
B. Career Basics.
C. Regulation.
Appendix A Modern Investment Theory.
Appendix B Employee Benefits.
Appendix C Behavioral Finance-Applications.
Appendix D Comprehensive Financial Plan-Dan and Laura.
*Web based
Finance for the Non-Financial Managers
NEW
hypothesis, fair value accounting, and the financial rating agencies
in precipitating the crisis.
The examination of Kraft Foods Corporation’s $23 billion hostile
takeover of British confectioner Cadbury Plc, including the role played
by activist investor Nelson Peltz.
Expanded coverage of real options analysis, including decision
trees.
An update of the empirical evidence on corporate restructuring
and shareholder value creation.
The use of Sensient Technologies Corporation (SXT), the world’s
largest food and beverage color company, as an extended example
throughout the book.
Fresh examples throughout the text, including new company examples and updated data to keep the text at the forefront of currency.
Contents
Part I: Assessing the Financial Health of the Firm
Chapter 1: Interpreting Financial Statements
Chapter 2: Evaluating Financial PerformanceAppendix: International
Differences in Financial Structure
Part II: Planning Future Financial Performance
Chapter 3: Financial Forecasting
Chapter 4: Managing Growth
Part III: Financing Operations
Chapter 5: Financial Instruments and Markets
Appendix: Using Financial Instruments to Manage Risks
Chapter 6: The Financing Decision
Appendix: The Irrelevance Proposition
Part IV: Evaluating Investment Opportunities
Chapter 7: Discounted Cash Flow Techniques
Appendix: Mutually Exclusive Alternatives and Capital Rationing
Chapter 8: Risk Analysis in Investment Decisions
Appendix: Asset Beta and Adjusted Present Value
Chapter 9: Business Valuation and Corporate Restructuring
Appendix: The Venture Capital Method of Valuation
Appendix A: Present Value of $1
Appendix B: Present Value of an Annuity of $1
Glossary
Suggested Answers to Odd-Numbered End-of-Chapter Problems
*9780078034688*
ANALYSIS FOR FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
10th Edition
By Robert C Higgins, University of Washington
ISBN: 9780078034688
ISBN: 9780071086486 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/higgins10e
Analysis for Financial Management, 10e presents standard techniques and modern developments in a practical and intuitive manner
with an emphasis on the managerial applications of financial analysis.
It is intended for non-financial managers and business students
interested in the practice of financial management.
New to this edition
Discussion of relevant aspects of the recent financial crisis,
with emphasis on the possible roles played by the efficient market
101
Risk Management
Mathematics of Finance
NEW
RISK MANAGEMENT AND INSURANCE
*9780071288934*
Financial Mathematics
for Actuaries
2nd Edition
By Scott Harrington and Gregory Niehaus of University So CarolinaColumbia
2004 / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780072339703
ISBN: 9780071232449 [IE - 2 Color Text]
By Wai-Sum Chan, Chinese University of Hong
Kong and Yiu-Kuen Tse, Singapore Management
University
www.mhhe.com/hn2e
CONTENTS
1. Risk and Its Management
2. Objectives of Risk Management
3. Risk Identification and Measurement
4. Pooling Arrangements and Diversification of Risk
5. Insurer Ownership, Financial, and Operational Structure
6. Insurance Regulation
7. Insolvencies, Solvency Ratings,and Solvency Regulation
8. Insurance Pricing
9. Risk Aversion and Risk Management by Individuals and Corporations
10. Insurability of Risk, Contractual Provisions, and Legal Doctrines
11. Loss Control
12 Legal Liability for Injuries
13. Automobile Insurance
14. Homeowners Insurance
15. Life Insurance and Annuities
16. Employee Benefits: Overview and Group Medical Coverage
17. Retirement Plans
18. Workers’ Compensation and Employee Injuries
19. Social Security 20. Corporate Risk Management and Shareholder
Wealth
21. Tax, Regulatory, and Accounting Factors Affecting Corporate
Risk Management
22. Risk Retention/Reduction Decisions
23. Commercial Insurance Contracts
24. Hedging Risk with Derivative Contracts
25. Alternative Risk Transfer
26. Analysis Tools used in Corporate Risk Management
27. Enterprise Risk Management: A Case Study
28. Corporate Liability to Customers, Third Parties, and Shareholders
29. Issues in Liability Risk and It’s Management
2011 (Oct 2010) / 336 pages
ISBN: 9780071288934
This is an introductory textbook on the mathematics of interest rates
for actuarial science students. It is written at a level of rigor that is
required for students majoring in actuarial science and prepares them
for further analysis of financial instruments. It emphasizes an intuitive
treatment of the mathematics of finance and insurance, with special
attention to applications. Each chapter contains many examples illustrating the applications of mathematical analysis to financial products
and personal financial management. The authors use the financial
functions in Excel as the computational tool in this book, which are
illustrated through numerous examples.
Contents
About the Authors
Preface
List of Mathematical Symbols
Chapter 1 Interest Accumulation and Time Value of Money
Chapter 2 Annuities
Chapter 3 Spot Rates, Forward Rates and the Term Structure
Chapter 4 Rates of Return
Chapter 5 Loans and Costs of Borrowing
Chapter 6 Bonds and Bond Pricing
Chapter 7 Bond Yields and the Term Structure
Chapter 8 Bond Management
Chapter 9 Stochastic Interest Rates
Appendix A Review of Mathematics and Statistics
Appendix B Answers to Selected Exercises
Index
BUSINESS MATHEMATICS
By Zin Ibrahim and Daud Mohamad
2008 / 292 pages
ISBN: 9789833850280
Business Mathematics is an introductory text on the practical applications of mathematics in business. Using examples and exercises,
the book illustrates the derivation of common business applications
like compound interest and annuity. Each section in this book builds
upon concepts from previous sections, thus guiding the reader to a
gradual understanding of the material in its entirety. Although this book
is aimed at students taking business-related courses, non-business
students who want to understand the calculation of financial charges
will also find the book useful.
102
Financial System
FINANCIAL AND ACTUARIAL MATHEMATICS
By Yiu-Kuen Tse, Singapore Management University and Wai-Sum Chan,
Chinese University of Hong Kong
2007 (January 2007) / 400 pages
ISBN: 9780071258562
This is an introductory textbook covering the mathematics of interest
rates, life contingencies and loss models. It can be adopted as (1)
the main text of a one-semester first course in the mathematics of
interest rates and actuarial mathematics, using selected chapters and
sections, (2) as the main text of a one-semester first course in the
mathematics of interest rates and investments, using all chapters in
Part I, or (3) as a supplementary text of a one-semester first course
in actuarial mathematics, using all chapters in Part II.
CONTENTS
About the Authors
Preface
List of Mathematical Symbols
Part I Financial Mathematics
Chapter 1 Interest Accumulation and Time Value of Money
Chapter 2 Annuities
Chapter 3 Rates of Return
Chapter 4 Amortization and Sinking Fund
Chapter 5 Bonds
Chapter 6 Bond Management
Chapter 7 Applications
Chapter 8 Stochastic Interest Rates
Part II Actuarial Mathematics
Chapter 9 Survival Models and Life Contingencies
Chapter 10 Life Insurance, Life Annuities and Net Premiums
Chapter 11 Short-term Risk Models for Life Insurance
Appendices
Answer Key
Index
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICAL
FINANCE
ESSENTIALS OF FINANCIAL SERVICES
2nd Edition
By S Gurusamy, DG Vaishnav College
2009 (March 2009) / 452 pages
ISBN: 9780070083103
It is designed to suit the requirements of undergraduate students of
commerce and management. This book provides a thorough foundation to the subject of Financial Services. It deals with contemporary
topics like merchant banking, venture capital , pension funds and
covers the syllabus on toto.
Contents
1. Financial Services: An Overview
2. Financial Services Environment
3. Merchant Banking
4. Public Issue Management
5. New Issues Market (NIM)
6. Underwriting of Securities
7. Capital Market
8. Stock Exchange
9. SEBI: Functions and Working
10. Leasing
11. Accounting for Lease Framework
12. Hire Purchase 20. Pension Plan
13. Factoring
14. Consumer Finance
15. Venture Capital
16. Mutual Funds
17. Credit Rating
18. Insurance: An Overview
19. Insurance: Regulatory
2nd Edition
By Robert L Brown, University of Waterloo, Canada, and Petr Zima,
Conestoga College, Canada
2011 (January 2011) / 304 pages
ISBN: 9780071756051
Now updated to reflect the changing environment of business finance,
this book includes new material on life insurance, life annuities,
and more. Students learn how to master effective problem-solving
techniques with 1,224 practice problems and questions. The large
number and variety of practical applications offer a feel for how to
conduct business and financial transactions in the real world. Finally,
review problems offer the opportunity for more study or self-testing.
FINANCIAL SERVICES
2nd Edition
2009 (May 2009) / 590 pages
ISBN: 9780070153349
Financial Services an important segment of the financial system,
is considered an essential adjunct for the development. This book
Financial Services provides a comprehensive coverage of contemporary topics such as Factoring, Leasing, Venture Capital Financing,
Insurance, Pension Funds and Micro-Financial services.
Contents
1. Financial Services: An overview
2. Credit Cards
3. Debit Card
4. Smart Cards
5. Credit Rating
6. Commercial Bill Financing
7. Consumer Finance
8. Hire Purchase Finance
9. Insurance Services
10. Factoring and Forfeiting
11. Leasing-An Overview
12. Accounting and Reporting for Lease
13. Lease Evaluation
103
14. Merchant Banking
15. Mutual Funds
16. Money Market Mutual Funds (MMMFs)
18. Public Issue of Securities: A Conceptual Framework
19. Securitization
20. Stock-Invest
21. Underwriting of securities
22. Book-Building
23. Venture Capital: An overviews
24. Venture Capital Funds- Regulatory Framework
25. Venture Capital in India
26. Infrastructure Financing Services
27. Housing Financing Services
28. M&A Advisory Services
29. Portfolio Management Services
30. Credit Syndication Services
31. Asset-Liability Management Services (ALMS)
32. Custodial Services
33. Micro Financial Services
34. Depository (Demat) Services
35. Depository Receipts
36. Non-Banking Financial Institutions (NBFIs)
37. Stock-Trading
38. Pension Fund: An Overview
FINANCIAL SERVICES AND SYSTEMS
2nd Edition
2009 (June 2009) / 456 pages
ISBN: 9780070153356
A good text book on this subject written by a well-known author. This
book can be pitched in where our other titles on this subject do not
fit well for any reason.
Contents
Financial System
1. Financial System-An Overview
2. Macroeconomic Aggregates
3. Indian Financial System
4. Profile of Entrepreneur
5. Global Financial System
6. Capital Structure Decisions
Financial Services
7. Financial Services-An Overview
8. Book Building
9. Credit Cards
10. Debit Cards
11. Smart Cards
12. Credit Rating
13. Commercial Bill Financing
14. Consumer Finance
15. Hire Purchase Finance
16. Insurance Services
17. Factoring and Forfeiting
18. Leasing-An Overview
19. Accounting and Reporting for Lease
20. Lease Evaluation
21. Merchant Banking
22. Mutual Funds
23. Money Market Mutual Funds
25. Securitization
26. Stock Invest
27. Underwriting of Securities
28. Venture Capital-An Overview
104
29. Venture Capital Funds-Regulatory Framework
30. Venture Capital in India
FINANCIAL SERVICES
5th Edition
By M Y Khan, University of Delhi
2009 (October 2009) / 960 pages
ISBN: 9780070681996
www.mhhe.com/khanfs5e
This new edition of the leading text book on Financial Services is
aimed at reflecting the current regulatory and policy developments in
the financial sector in India. The recent economic depression world
wide has led to a shift in many policies for this sector. The book aims
to capture them well. This book will continue to be useful to the students of the management as well as commerce disciplines. It will also
cater to the needs of professionals in the financial services sector as
a valuable source of reference
Contents
Chapter 1. Non-Banking Financial Companies
Chapter 2. Theoretical and Regulatory Framework of Leasing
Chapter 3. Accounting/Reporting Framework and Taxation of Leasing
Chapter 4. Financial Evaluation of Leasing
Chapter 5. Hire-Purchase Finance and Consumer Credit
Chapter 6. Factoring and Forfaiting
Chapter 7. Bills Discounting
Chapter 8. Housing Finance
Chapter 9. Insurance Services and Products
Chapter 10. Venture Capital Financing
Chapter 11. Banking: Products and Services
Chapter 12. Mutual Funds: Products and Services
Chapter 13. Issue Management: Intermediaries
Chapter 14. Issue Management: Activities / Procedures
Chapter 15. Issue Management: Pre-Issue and Post-Issue Obligations
and Other Requirements
Chapter 16. Corporate Restructuring
Chapter 17. Stock Broking, Depositories, Custodial Services and
Securities Lending Scheme
Chapter 18. Credit Rating
Upper Division Insurance
Real Estate Principles, Analysis & Management
THEORY OF INTEREST
3rd Edition
By Stephen Kellison
ISBN: 9780073382449
ISBN: 9780071276276 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/kellison3e
The third edition of The Theory of Interest is significantly revised
and expanded from previous editions. The text covers the basic
mathematical theory of interest as traditionally developed. The book
is a thorough treatment of the mathematical theory and practical
applications of compound interest, or mathematics of finance. The
pedagogical approach of the second edition has been retained in the
third edition. The textbook narrative emphasizes both the importance
of conceptual understanding and the ability to apply the techniques
to practical problems. The third edition has considerable updates that
make this book relevant to students in this course area.
Contents
Chapter 1: The Measurement of Interest
Chapter 2: Solution of Problems in Interest
Chapter 3: Basic Annuities
Chapter 4: More General Annuities
Chapter 5: Amortization Schedules and Sinking Funds
Chapter 6: Bond and Other Securities
Chapter 7: Yield Rates
Chapter 8: Practical applications
Chapter 9: More advanced financial analysis
Chapter 10: The term structure of interest rates
Chapter 11: Duration, convexity and immunization
Chapter 12: Stochastic approaches to interest
Chapter 13: Options and other derivatives
APPENDIXES
Appendix A: Table numbering the days of the year
Appendix B: Illustrative mortgage loan amortization schedule
Appendix C: Basic mathematical review
Appendix D: Statistical background
Appendix E: Iteration methods
Answers to the exercises
Glossary of notation
Index
REAL ESTATE PRINCIPLES
A Value Approach, 3rd Edition
By David C Ling and Wayne Archer of University of Florida at Gainesville
2010 (October 2009) / 704 pages
ISBN: 9780073377322
ISBN: 9780070167131 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/lingarcher3e
Real Estate Principles: A Value Approach demonstrates how value is
central to virtually all real estate decision-making. Students using Ling
and Archer should finish the course with a value-oriented framework,
and a set of valuation and decision making tools that can be applied in
a variety of real-world situations. The key to making sound investment
decision is to understand how property values are created, maintained,
increased or destroyed. Since the launch of Real Estate Principals:
A Value Approach, 2e significant and lasting changes have come
upon the world of real estate. This is very true in real estate finance
and capital sources where most of the traditional lenders have been
transformed or displace, giving way to a radically different set of player
in mortgage finance. There has been change as well with profound
and far-reaching implications in a world where it is understandable
that property values can go down as well as up. This realization will
color every aspect of real estate investment, finance and transactions
for the foreseeable future.
Contents
Part 1: Setting the Stage
Chapter 1: The Nature of Real Estate and Real Estate Markets
Chapter 2: Value and Real Estate Decisions
Part 2: Legal and Regulatory Determinants of Value
Chapter 3: Legal Foundations to Value
Chapter 4: Conveying Real Property Interests
Chapter 5: Government Controls and Real Estate Markets
Part 3: Market Analysis and Appraisal
Chapter 6: Market Determinants of Value
Chapter 7: Forecasting Ownership Benefits and Value: Market Research
Chapter 8: Valuation Using the Sales Comparison and Cost Approaches
Chapter 9: Valuation Using the Income Approach
Part 4: Financing Home Ownership
Chapter 10: Real Estate Finance: The Laws and Contracts
Chapter 11: Residential Mortgage Types and Borrower Decisions
Chapter 12: Sources of Funds for Residential Mortgages
Part 5: Brokering and Closing the Transaction
Chapter 13: Real Estate Brokerage and Listing Contracts
Chapter 14: Contracts for Sale and Closing
Part 6: Time, Opportunity Cost and Value Decisions
Chapter 15: The Effects of Time and Risk on Value
Chapter 16: Mortgage Calculations and Decisions
Part 7: Financing and Investing in Commercial Real Estate
Chapter 17: Commercial Mortgage Types and Decisions
Chapter 18: Sources of Commercial Debt and Equity Capital
Chapter 19: Investment Decisions: Ratios
Chapter 20: Investment Decisions: NPV and IRR
Chapter 21: Income Taxation and Value
Part 8: Creating and Maintaining Value
Chapter 22: Enhancing Value through Ongoing Management
Chapter 23: Leases and Property Types
Chapter 24: Development: The Dynamics of Creating Value
105
Real Estate Finance / Investment
REAL ESTATE FINANCE & INVESTMENTS
14th Edition
By William B Brueggeman, Southern Methodist University and Jeffrey
Fisher, Indiana University At Bloomington
ISBN: 9780073377339
ISBN: 9780071289184 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/bf14e
The Fourteenth Edition of Real Estate Finance and Investments prepares students to understand the risks and rewards associated with
investing in and financing both residential and commercial real estate.
Concepts and techniques included in the chapters and problem sets
are used in many careers related to real estate. The material in this
edition is also relevant to individuals who want to better understand
real estate for their own personal investment and financing decisions. The Fourteenth Edition is designed to help students learn how
to evaluate the risk and return associated with the various ways of
investing and lending. Upcoming students who are interested in this
field can use this book as a guide to perform the right kind of analysis to make informed real estate finance and investment decisions.
Contents
Part One Introduction
1 Real Estate Investment: Legal Concepts
2 Basic Real Estate Financing: Notes and Mortgages
3 Mortgage Law Foundation: The Time Value of Money
Part Two Financing Residential Properties
4 Fixed Rate Mortgage Loans
5 Adjustable and Floating Rate Mortgage Loans
6 Mortgages: Additional Concepts, Analysis, and Applications
7 Single Family Housing: Pricing, Investment, and Tax Considerations
8 Underwriting and Financing Residential Properties
Part Three Financing Income Properties (Debt and Equity)
9 Income-Producing Properties: Leases, Rents, and the Market for
Space
10 Valuation of Income Properties: Appraisal and the Market for
Capital
11 Investment Analysis and Taxation of Income Properties
12 Financial Leverage and Financing Alternatives
13 Risk Analysis
14 Disposition and Renovation of Income Properties
15 Financing Corporate Real Estate
Part Four Financing Proposed Projects
16 Financing Project Development
17 Financing Land Development Projects
Part Five Alternative Real Estate Financing and Investment
Vehicles
18 Structuring Real Estate Investments: Organizational Forms and
Joint Ventures
19 The Secondary Mortgage Market: Pass-Through Securities
20 The Secondary Mortgage Market: CMOs and Derivative Securities
21 Real Estate Investment Trusts (REITs)
22 Real Estate Investment Performance and Portfolio Considerations
Index
106
Professional References
ISLAMIC FINANCE AND BANKING SYSTEM
By Sudin Haron and Wan Nursofiza Wan Azmi
2009 (July 2009) / 548 pages
ISBN: 9789833850303 (Softcover)
ISBN: 9789833850617 (Hardcover)
A Professional Asian Publication
This book, Islamic Finance and Banking System: Philosophies, Principles & Practices, introduces readers to the history and development of
Islamic banking. It provides an in-depth discussion on the theoretical
and conceptual aspects of Islamic banking. Key concepts in Islamic
Finance and Banking, and how they are applied to provide alternative
Islamic Financing options, are examined. The vibrant and thriving
takaful industry and Islamic capital market are also explored here.
In addition, the book evaluates the role and development of special
organizations related to the Islamic financial system.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Islamic Economic System
Chapter 2: History and Development of the Islamic Banking System
Chapter 3: Objectives, Philosophy and Principles of Islamic Banking
Chapter 4: The Concept of Interest, Usury and Riba
Chapter 5: Laws and Regulations of Islamic Banking
Chapter 6: Operational Aspects and Practices of Islamic Banking
System
Chapter 7: Islamic Financial Markets
Chapter 8: Islamic Insurance System
Chapter 9: Organizations Related to the Islamic Banking System
Title Index
A
Accounting and Bookkeeping: Principles and Practice [Aust]
Assoc of Accounting Technicians
62
Accounting for Decision-Making and Control, 7e
Zimmerman
Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging
Trombley
43
Reck 54
Accounting Information and Reporting Systems [Aust]
Aseervatham
38
Hurt
37
Hurt
37
Accounting Made Easy, 2e [India]
Agrawal
18
Jackling
6
Accounting: Texts and Cases, 13e
Anthony
60
Accounting: Understanding and Practice, 3e [UK]
Perks
10
Accounting: What the Numbers Mean, 9e
Marshall
58
Accounting: What the Numbers Mean, Revised 2nd Edition [Aust]
Marshall
59
Hoyle
40
Hoyle
38
Advanced Financial Accounting, 9e
Baker
40
Advanced Financial Accounting, Updated Edition [Asian]
Tan
42
Higgins
Apple Blossom Cologne Company: Audit Case, 5e
Paul 49
Auditing & Assurance Services, 2e [UK]
Eilifsen
47
Louwers
46
Louwers
43
Messier
43
Auditing after Sarbanes-Oxley, 3e
Thibodeau
46
Auditing and Assurance Services in Australia, 4e [Aust]
Gay
48
Stuart
44
Australian Financial Accounting, 6e [Aust]
Deegan
19
Rose
95
Behavioral Corporate Finance
Shefrin
82, 97
Business Finance, 10e [Aust]
Peirson
82
Business Mathematics [Asian]
Ibrahim
102
49, 59
71, 101
B
C
Case Studies in Finance, 6e
Bruner
78, 87
Casebook to accompany Foundations of Financial Management, 14e
Block
77
Cases in Corporate Finance [India]
Viswanath
88
Cases in Finance, 2e
DeMello
88
Nunnally
89
College Accounting Chapter 1-14 with Annual Report, 2e
Wild
36
Wild
7, 37
Haddock
35
College Accounting: Chapters 1-30, 13e
Price
36
Yacht
30
107
Title Index
Yacht
29
Computer Accounting using MYOB Business Software: Version 19.5, 13e [Aust]
Neish
31
Computer Accounting with Peachtree by Sage Complete Accounting 2011: Release 19.0, 15e
Yacht
30
Yacht
29
Computer Accounting with Quickbooks Pro 2011: MP - wQBPremAccCD, with Student CD, 13e Kay
29
Kay
29
Ng
41
Corporate Finance with S&P Card, 9e
Ross
81
Corporate Finance: Core Principles and Applications, 3e
Ross
81
Cost Accounting: Principles and Applications, 7e
Brock
35
Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis, 5e
Blocher
34
Cost Management: Strategies for Business Decisions, 4e
Hilton
34
Sundaram
92
Enterprise Information Systems: A Pattern-Based Approach, 3e
Dunn
38
Equity Valuation and Analysis, 2e
Lundholm
57
Copley
53
Essentials of Advanced Financial Accounting
Baker
39
Essentials of Coporate Finance, 2e [Aust Adaptation]
Ross
76
Essentials of Corporate Finance, 7e
Ross
74
Essentials of Financial Services, 2e [India]
Gurusamy
Essentials of Investments with S&P Card, 8e
Bodie
85
Ethical Obligations and Decision-Making in Accounting: Text and Cases, 2e
Mintz
46, 62
D
Derivatives
E
103
F
Finance and Investments using the Wall Street Journal
Crabb
79
Cornett
68
Williams
5
Financial Accounting [India]
Gabriel
18
Financial Accounting and Reporting [UK]
Collins
19
Financial Accounting Theory, 2e [UK]
Deegan
54
Financial Accounting Theory, 3e [Aust]
Deegan
55
Financial Accounting, 15e Williams
14
Spiceland
16
Libby
15
Financial Accounting: A New Perspective
Solomon
20
Financial Accounting: An IFRS Perspective [Asian Adaptation]
Wild
16
Financial Accounting: Including International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) [Asian]
Williams
19
Wild
12
Spiceland
11
Financial Accounting: with IFRS Fold Out Primer, 5e
Wild
17
Financial and Actuarial Mathematics [Asian]
Tse
103
Financial Derivatives: Markets and Applications in Malaysia, 2e [Asian]
Obiyathulla
108
92
Title Index
Financial Institutions Management: A Risk Management Approach, 7e
Saunders
93
Financial Institutions, Instruments and Markets, 6e [Aust]
Viney
95
Financial Management for Beginners, 3e [Asian]
Samad
75
Khan
Financial Market [Asian]
Pok
94
Financial Market Essentials [Aust]
Viney
94
Saunders
93
Financial Markets and Corporate Strategy, 2e Grinblatt
82
Hillier
72
Financial Mathematics for Actuaries [Asian]
Chan
102
Financial Planning and Wealth Management: An International Perspective [Asian]
Cheng
97
Revsine
Financial Services and Systems, 2e [India]
Gurusamy
104
Financial Services, 2e [India]
Gurusamy
103
Khan
104
Penman
56
Financial Statement Analysis, 10e
Subramanyan
57
FinGame 5.0 Participant’s Manual with Registration Code, 5e
Brooks
78
Hopwood
61
Foundations of Financial Management with Time Value of Money Card, 14e
Block
72
Fundamental Accounting Principles, 20e
Wild
7
Fundamental Accounting Principles: Including International Financial Reporting Standards Wild
5
73, 80
56, 60
(IFRS)
Edmonds
14
Edmonds
11
Fundamental Financial and Managerial Accounting Concepts with H-D Annual Report
Edmonds
8
Fundamental Managerial Accounting Concepts, 6e
Edmonds
23
Fundamentals of Advanced Accounting, 4e
Hoyle
41
Hoyle
39
Hillier
73
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 5e [Aust Adaptation]
Ross
76
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 5e [UK Adaptation]
Firer
71
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 7e
Brealey
67
Ross
77
Ross
65
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: An Asian Perspective [Asian Adaptation]
Ross
74
Ross
66
Fundamentals of Cost Accounting, 3e
Lanen
33
Fundamentals of Financial Accounting with Annual Report, 3e
Phillips
15
Fundamentals of Financial Management, 5e [India]
Chandra
75
Hirt
83
Jordan
83
Cruz
50
Futures and Options [Asian]
Parameswaran
91
109
Title Index
I
Intermediate Accounting with British Airways Annual Report, 6e
Spiceland
32
Intermediate Accounting, 7e
Spiceland
31
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective [Asian]
Lam
32
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective, 2e [Asian]
Lam
31
Doupnik
55
International Corporate Finance
Robin
96
International Finance: An Analytical Approach, 3e [Aust]
Moosa
96
Eun
96
Introduction to Accounting: An Integrated Approach, 6e
Ainsworth
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 6e [UK]
Thomas
20
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 7e, (The) [UK]
Thomas
13
Brewer
27
Brewer
22
Investment, 2e
Hirschey
86
Investments, 9e
Bodie
84, 87
Islamic Finance and Banking System [Asian Prof]
Haron
106
M: Finance
Cornett
69
Manageial Accounting, 14e
Garrison
23
Langfield-Smith
25
Seal
27
Management Accounting, 4e [UK Adapation]
Seal
26
Management Accounting, 5e [India]
Khan
28
Management Accounting, Revised Edition, 3e [Aust]
Neish
28
Management Control Systems, 12e
Anthony
61
Whitecotton
27
Managerial Accounting for Managers, 2e
Noreen
26
Hilton
24
Garrison
24
Managing Your Personal Finance [Asian]
Chan
100
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities: 2013 Edition, 4e
Spiler
50
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entitities: 2012 Edition, 3e
Spilker
52
Spilker
51
Spilker
49
Merchant Banking and Financial Services, 3e [India]
Gurusamy
89
Modern Advanced Accounting, 10e
Larsen
42
Money and Capital Markets, 10e
Rose
89
Peach Blossom Cologne Company, 4e
Paul
48
Personal Finance
Walker
98
Personal Finance, 10e Kapoor
99
Personal Financial Planning
Altfest
100
Principles and Contemporary Issues in Internal Auditing [Asian]
Mary Lee
6
M
P
110
48
Title Index
Principles of Accounting, 19e [Asian Adaptation]
Wild
8
Whittington
44
Principles of Corporate Finance, 10e
Brealey
79
Principles of Corporate Finance: Concise, 2e
Brealey
80
Jones
50
Jones
49
R
Real Estate Finance & Investments, 14e
Brueggeman
106
Real Estate Principles: A Value Approach, 3e
Ling
105
Risk Management and Insurance, 2e
Harrington
102
Running Money: Professional Portfolio Management
Stewart
91
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Accounting, Revised Edition
Lerner
9
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting, Revised Edition Lerner
21
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Principles of Accounting
Lerner
9
Schaum’s Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting, 4e
Lerner
8, 21, 62
Schaum’s Outline of Cost Accounting, 3e
Polimeni
35
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Accounting, Revised 2nd Edition
Shim
21
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Management, 3e Shim
9, 79
Schaum’s Outline of Intermediate Accounting I: Revised, 2e
Englard
33
Schaum’s Outline of Intermediate Accounting II, 2e
Englard
33
Schaum’s Outline of Investments, 2e
Francis
86
Schaum’s Outline of Managerial Accounting, Revised 2nd Edition Shim
28
Schaum’s Outline of Mathematical Finance, 2e Brown
103
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Accounting I, 5e
Lerner
9
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Accounting II, 4e
Lerner
10
Schaum’s Quick Guide to Business Finance: 201 Decision-Making Tools for Business, Shim
79
Sasidharan
90
Edmonds
58
Poh
52
Spilker
51
Spilker
49
Theory of Interest, 3e
Kellison
S
Finance, and Accounting Students
T
77, 105
U
Shashikant
85
111
Author Index
A
Assoc of Accounting and Bookkeeping: Principles and Practice [Aust]
62
Accounting Technicians
Agrawal
Accounting Made Easy, 2e [India]
18
Ainsworth
Introduction to Accounting: An Integrated Approach, 6e
Altfest
Personal Financial Planning
Anthony
Accounting: Texts and Cases, 13e
60
Anthony
Management Control Systems, 12e
61
Aseervatham
Accounting Information and Reporting Systems [Aust]
38
Baker
Advanced Financial Accounting, 9e
40
Baker
Essentials of Advanced Financial Accounting
39
Blocher
Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis, 5e
34
Block
Casebook to accompany Foundations of Financial Management, 14e
77
Block
Foundations of Financial Management with Time Value of Money Card, 14e
72
Bodie
Essentials of Investments with S&P Card, 8e
85
Bodie
Investments, 9e
Brealey
67
Brealey
Principles of Corporate Finance, 10e
79
Brealey
Principles of Corporate Finance: Concise, 2e
80
Brewer
27
Brewer
22
Brock
Cost Accounting: Principles and Applications, 7e
35
Brooks
FinGame 5.0 Participant’s Manual with Registration Code, 5e
78
Brown
Schaum’s Outline of Mathematical Finance, 2e 103
Brueggeman
Real Estate Finance & Investments, 14e
106
Bruner
Case Studies in Finance, 6e
6
100
B
84, 87
78, 87
C
Chan
Financial Mathematics for Actuaries [Asian]
102
Chan
Managing Your Personal Finance [Asian]
100
Chandra
Fundamentals of Financial Management, 5e [India]
75
Cheng
Financial Planning and Wealth Management: An International Perspective [Asian]
97
Collins
Financial Accounting and Reporting [UK]
19
Copley
53
Cornett
68
Cornett
M: Finance
69
Crabb
Finance and Investments using the Wall Street Journal
79
Cruz
50
112
Author Index
D
Deegan
Australian Financial Accounting, 6e [Aust]
19
Deegan
Financial Accounting Theory, 2e [UK]
54
Deegan
Financial Accounting Theory, 3e [Aust]
55
DeMello
88
Doupnik
55
Dunn
Enterprise Information Systems: A Pattern-Based Approach, 3e
38
Edmonds
14
Edmonds
11
Edmonds
Fundamental Financial and Managerial Accounting Concepts with H-D Annual Report
Edmonds
Fundamental Managerial Accounting Concepts, 6e
23
Edmonds
58
Eilifsen
Auditing & Assurance Services, 2e [UK]
47
Englard
Schaum’s Outline of Intermediate Accounting I: Revised, 2e
33
Englard
Schaum’s Outline of Intermediate Accounting II, 2e
33
Eun
96
Firer
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 5e [UK Adaptation]
71
Francis
Schaum’s Outline of Investments, 2e
86
Gabriel
Financial Accounting [India]
18
Garrison
Manageial Accounting, 14e
23
Garrison
24
Gay
Auditing and Assurance Services in Australia, 4e [Aust]
48
Grinblatt
Financial Markets and Corporate Strategy, 2e 82
Gurusamy
Essentials of Financial Services, 2e [India]
103
Gurusamy
Financial Services and Systems, 2e [India]
104
Gurusamy
103
Gurusamy
Merchant Banking and Financial Services, 3e [India]
89
Haddock
35
Haron
Islamic Finance and Banking System [Asian Prof]
106
Harrington
Risk Management and Insurance, 2e
102
Higgins
Hillier
72
Hillier
73
Hilton
Cost Management: Strategies for Business Decisions, 4e
34
Hilton
24
Hirschey
Investment, 2e
86
Hirt
83
Hopwood
61
Hoyle
40
E
8
F
G
H
71, 101
113
Author Index
Hoyle
38
Hoyle
41
Hoyle
39
Hurt
37
Hurt
37
I
Ibrahim
Business Mathematics [Asian]
102
J
Jackling
6
Jones
50
Jones
49
Jordan
83
Kapoor
Personal Finance, 10e 99
Kay
Computer Accounting with Quickbooks Pro 2011: MP - wQBPremAccCD, with Student CD, 13e
29
Kay
29
Kellison
Theory of Interest, 3e
Khan
Khan
Khan
Management Accounting, 5e [India]
28
Lam
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective [Asian]
32
Lam
Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective, 2e [Asian]
31
Lanen
Fundamentals of Cost Accounting, 3e
33
Langfield-Smith
25
Larsen
Modern Advanced Accounting, 10e
42
Lerner
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Accounting, Revised Edition
Lerner
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting, Revised Edition Lerner
Schaum’s Easy Outline of Principles of Accounting
Lerner
Schaum’s Outline of Bookkeeping and Accounting, 4e
Lerner
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Accounting I, 5e
9
Lerner
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Accounting II, 4e
10
Libby
15
Ling
Real Estate Principles: A Value Approach, 3e
Louwers
46
Louwers
43
Lundholm
Equity Valuation and Analysis, 2e
57
Marshall
Accounting: What the Numbers Mean, 9e
58
Marshall
Accounting: What the Numbers Mean, Revised 2nd Edition [Aust]
59
Mary Lee
Principles and Contemporary Issues in Internal Auditing [Asian]
48
Messier
43
K
77, 105
73, 80
104
L
9
21
9
8, 21, 62
105
M
114
Author Index
Mintz
Ethical Obligations and Decision-Making in Accounting: Text and Cases, 2e
46, 62
Moosa
International Finance: An Analytical Approach, 3e [Aust]
96
Neish
Computer Accounting using MYOB Business Software: Version 19.5, 13e [Aust]
31
Neish
Management Accounting, Revised Edition, 3e [Aust]
28
Ng
41
Noreen
Managerial Accounting for Managers, 2e
26
Nunnally
89
Financial Derivatives: Markets and Applications in Malaysia, 2e [Asian]
92
Parameswaran
Futures and Options [Asian]
91
Paul
Peach Blossom Cologne Company, 4e
48
Paul Apple Blossom Cologne Company: Audit Case, 5e
49
Peirson
Business Finance, 10e [Aust]
82
Penman
56
Perks
Accounting: Understanding and Practice, 3e [UK]
10
Phillips
Fundamentals of Financial Accounting with Annual Report, 3e
15
Poh
52
Pok
Financial Market [Asian]
94
Polimeni
Schaum’s Outline of Cost Accounting, 3e
35
Price
College Accounting: Chapters 1-30, 13e
36
Reck Accounting for Governmental and NonProfit Entities, 16e
54
Revsine
Robin
International Corporate Finance
96
Rose
95
Rose
Money and Capital Markets, 10e
89
Ross
Corporate Finance with S&P Card, 9e
81
Ross
Corporate Finance: Core Principles and Applications, 3e
81
Ross
Essentials of Coporate Finance, 2e [Aust Adaptation]
76
Ross
Essentials of Corporate Finance, 7e
74
Ross
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 5e [Aust Adaptation]
76
Ross
77
Ross
65
Ross
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: An Asian Perspective [Asian Adaptation]
74
Ross
66
N
O
Obiyathulla
P
R
56, 60
115
Author Index
S
Samad
Financial Management for Beginners, 3e [Asian]
75
Sasidharan
90
Saunders
Financial Institutions Management: A Risk Management Approach, 7e
93
Saunders
93
Seal
27
Seal
Management Accounting, 4e [UK Adapation]
26
Shashikant
85
Shefrin
Behavioral Corporate Finance
Shim
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Accounting, Revised 2nd Edition
Shim
Schaum’s Outline of Financial Management, 3e Shim
Schaum’s Outline of Managerial Accounting, Revised 2nd Edition 28
Shim
Schaum’s Quick Guide to Business Finance: 201 Decision-Making Tools for Business, Finance, and
79
Accounting Students
Solomon
Financial Accounting: A New Perspective
20
Spiceland
16
Spiceland
11
Spiceland
Intermediate Accounting with British Airways Annual Report, 6e
32
Spiceland
Intermediate Accounting, 7e
31
Spiler
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entities: 2013 Edition, 4e
50
Spilker
McGraw-Hill’s Taxation of Individuals and Business Entitities: 2012 Edition, 3e
52
Spilker
51
Spilker
49
Spilker
51
Spilker
49
Stewart
Running Money: Professional Portfolio Management
91
Stuart
44
Subramanyan
Financial Statement Analysis, 10e
57
Sundaram
Derivatives
92
Tan
Advanced Financial Accounting, Updated Edition [Asian]
42
Thibodeau
Auditing after Sarbanes-Oxley, 3e
46
Thomas
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 6e [UK]
20
Thomas
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 7e, (The) [UK]
13
Trombley
Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging
43
Tse
Financial and Actuarial Mathematics [Asian]
82, 97
21
9, 79
T
103
V
Viney
Financial Institutions, Instruments and Markets, 6e [Aust]
95
Viney
Financial Market Essentials [Aust]
94
Viswanath
Cases in Corporate Finance [India]
88
116
Author Index
W
Walker
Personal Finance
98
Whitecotton
27
Whittington
44
Wild
36
Wild
7, 37
Wild
Financial Accounting: An IFRS Perspective [Asian Adaptation]
16
Wild
12
Wild
Financial Accounting: with IFRS Fold Out Primer, 5e
17
Wild
Fundamental Accounting Principles, 20e
7
Wild
Fundamental Accounting Principles: Including International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
5
Wild
Principles of Accounting, 19e [Asian Adaptation]
8
Williams
5
Williams
Financial Accounting, 15e 14
Williams
Financial Accounting: Including International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) [Asian]
19
Yacht
30
Yacht
29
Yacht
Computer Accounting with Peachtree by Sage Complete Accounting 2011: Release 19.0, 15e
30
Yacht
29
Y
Z
Zimmerman
Accounting for Decision-Making and Control, 7e
49, 59
117
REVIEW COPY REQUEST FORM
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
www.mheducation.asia
u Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this
catalog for text adoption consideration, please complete this
request form and fax to your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside
back cover for fax number) or to McGraw-Hill Singapore.
u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserve the right to refuse any requests which do not
relate to teaching.
u Please make copies of this form if necessary.
REQUESTED BY
Name
Room #
Department
University
Address
Tel
Fax
Email address
COMP REQUEST
Please indicate ISBN No, Author & Title
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Course Name
Enrolment
Subject
Commencement Date
Decision Date
Current Text Used
Individual Decision
Group Decision
McGRAW-HILL MAILING LIST
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
www.mheducation.asia
Please include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hill books.
Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email
address at
I am already on your mailing list but my address has changed. Please update my record to the following new address.
Name
(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)
Position
Department
University
Address
Postal Code
Tel
Fax
Email address
SUBJECT OF INTEREST
o Accounting
o Advertising
o Business Management
o Finance & Investment
o Marketing
o Economics
o Human Resource Management
o Insurance & Real Estate
o Training
o Computing
o Aeronautical & Aerospace
Engineering
o Architecture & Urban Planning
o Chemical Engineering
o Civil Engineering
o Construction
o Electronics & Communications
o Electrical Engineering
o General Engineering
o Industrial & Plant Engineering
o Mass Communication
o Mechanical Engineering
o Music
o Medical Science
o Philosophy & Religion
o Dentistry
o Physical Education
o Nursing
o Political Science
o Agriculture
o Psychology
o Biology
o Sociology
o Chemistry
o Forestry
o Geography & Geology
o Physics & Astronomy
Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354
to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
Singapore office.
o Zoology
o Mathematics & Statistics
o Art & Humanities
o Education
o English
o English as a 2nd Language/ELT
o Foreign Language
o Health & Nutrition
o History
o Law
o Library Science
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy.
We use your contact information to fulfill your
request and service your account and to provide
you with additional information from McGrawHill (Asia) and other parts of The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc. We occasionally make a portion
of our mailing list available to selected third party
companies whose products or services may be of
interest to you. For further information or to let us
know your preferences with respect to receiving
marketing materials, please send an email to
marketingsvc_mhea@mcgraw-hill.com or write
to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin
Link, Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill
Companies Customer Privacy Policy at http://www.
mcgraw-hill.com/privacy.html
M c G R AW - H I L L E D U C A T I O N ( A S I A )
SINGAPORE
(also servicing Brunei & Mauritius)
60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775
Tel: (65) 6863 1580 • Customer Service Hotline: (65) 6868 8188
Fax (65) 6862 3354
eMail: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com • website: www.mheducation.asia
CHINA
(Representative Office)
McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc
Suite 906, 9/F, SP Tower A
Tsinghua Science Park
No. 1, Zhongguancun East Road
Haidian District
Beijing 100084, P R China
Tel: (86-10) 6279 0299
Fax: (86-10) 6279 0292
eMail: instructorchina@mcgraw-hill.com
HONG KONG
Suites 2906-10, Tower 2
Times Square
1, Matheson Street, Causeway Bay
Hong Kong
Tel: (85-2) 2730 6640
Fax: (85-2) 2730 2085
eMail: miehk_mhe@mcgraw-hill.com
INDIA
(also servicing Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nepal & Sri Lanka)
Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private
Limited
B-4, Sector 63
Distt Gautam Budh Nagar
Noida, UP-201301, India
Tel: (91-12) 438 3400
Fax: (91-12) 438 3401 - 403
eMail: saurabh_sharma@mcgraw-hill.com
INDONESIA
(Appointed Agent)
P T Media Global Edukasi
Imperium Design 27
Lippo Karawaci
Tangerang 15810
Indonesia
Tel: (62-21) 28899 961 / 28899 962
Fax: (62-21) 65702417
eMail: info@mge.co.id
JAPAN
McGraw-Hill Education Japan
3F, Ascend Shimbashi
6-19-19 Shimbashi, Minato-ku
Tokyo 105-0004
Japan
Tel: (81-3) 5408 1888
Fax: (81-3) 5408 1880
eMail: mhejpn@mcgraw-hill.com
KOREA
McGraw-Hill Korea Inc
3F, Ji-Woo Bldg
376-12 Seokyo-Dong
Mapo-Ku
Seoul 121-210, Korea
Tel: (82-2) 325 2351
Fax: (82-2) 325 2371
eMail: miekr_mhe@mcgraw-hill.com
MALAYSIA
McGraw-Hill Malaysia Sdn Bhd
No. 40, Jalan Pengacara U1/48
Temasya Industrial Park
40150 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: (60-3) 7627 6888
Fax: (60-3) 7627 6838
eMail: msia_mhe@mcgraw-hill.com
PHILIPPINES
(Appointed Agent)
Ideacademy Inc.
Unit LG5 Alfaro Place
146 L.P. Leviste Street
Salcedo Village
Makati City, Metro Manila
Philippines
Tel: (63-2) 519 2672 / 519 2675
Fax: (63-2) 519 2676
eMail: myla_katzav@ideacademyinc.biz
TAIWAN
7/F, No: 53 Bo-Ai Road
Taipei 100
Taiwan
Tel: (886-2) 2311 3000
Fax: (886-2) 2388 8822
eMail: mietw_mhe@mcgraw-hill.com
THAILAND
(also servicing Cambodia & Laos)
40/27 Soi Inthamara 8
Suthisarn Road, Phayathai
Bangkok 10400, Thailand
Tel: (66-2) 615 6555
Fax: (66-2) 615 6500
eMail: mieth_mhe@mcgraw-hill.com
VIETNAM
(Representative Office)
The Nomad Offices
Level 16 & 17 Gemadept Tower
6 Le Thanh Ton Street
Ben Nghe Ward, District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
Vietnam
Tel: (84-8) 6255 6829; (84-8) 6255 6889
Fax: (84-8) 6255 6801
eMail: van_yen_quang@mcgraw-hill.com
Accounting & Finance 2012
Preparing Students for
the World That Awaits
McGraw-Hill Higher Education empowers instructors to help students succeed academically
now and into the future by providing flexible, superior-quality solutions that serve the
needs of instructors and students end to end - from textbooks and digital instructional
content and tools to innovate subject mastery, experiential learning and assignment/
assessment solutions.
Connect.
We connect instructors and students to valuable course content
and resources - and we connect instructors and students to each
other - with the best traditional and digital teaching tools.
Accounting
Learn.
We enable greater learning and deeper comprehension with the
highest-quality tools and content that let students engage with
their coursework when, where and however they learn best.
&
Succeed.
We provide the learning resources students need to connect
success in the classroom with success in the world that awaits.
60 Tuas Basin Link
Singapore 638775
Tel (65) 6863 1580
Fax (65) 6862 3354
email: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com
website: www.mheducation.asia
C11-000813-X
2012
Finance